JP2018201729A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of achieving diversification of display mode of images by a light guide member.SOLUTION: A concavity Z is formed on a lower end face 715B4 of a light guide plate 715B. Light incident on the light guide plate 715B from light emission means 834 is separated at least in two directions to advance inside the light guide plate 715B and thereby form, between the light separated in each direction, a region which shines weaker than the light or where the light does not reach. Thereby, it is possible to cause the lighting manner of the light guide plate 715B to become random to enable achievement of diversifying the display mode of the light guide plate 715B.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 41

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a ball game machine.

  A typical example of a gaming machine is a pachinko machine. In a conventional typical pachinko machine, when entering a start opening provided in a game area, a lottery is performed according to the entry, and when a big win is won in the lottery, a special gaming state is entered. A configuration is known in which a large number of game balls can enter a winning opening. In recent years, a pachinko machine having a variety of effects by providing a light guide plate in a game area to emit and display a predetermined design by entering light from an end face is known (for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Laying-Open No. 2015-80625

  However, the mode in which the predetermined design is displayed by the light guide plate (light guide member) shines uniformly according to the color of the light source such as the LED, and the variation of the mode displayed by the light guide tends to be poor. There was a problem.

  Accordingly, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of realizing diversification of image display modes using a light guide member.

In order to solve the above-described problem, a gaming machine according to claim 1,
A light guide member having a light guide portion capable of emitting and displaying a predetermined image by light when the light is incident from a predetermined end side so that the light travels along a predetermined continuous direction intersecting the thickness direction When,
A plurality of light emitting means for outputting light incident on the predetermined end side of the light guide member;
Light incident on the light guide member from the light emitting means travels partially as weak light, or comprises a light guide means serving as a light guide including a predetermined direction in which the light does not travel,
The light guide means shines stronger than a portion extending in the predetermined direction on both sides inclined to one and the other about the light source along the plate surface of the light guide member with respect to the predetermined direction. It is characterized by guiding light from the light emitting means.

Further, the gaming machine according to claim 2 is:
A light guide member having a light guide portion capable of emitting and displaying a predetermined image by light when the light is incident from a predetermined end side so that the light travels along a predetermined continuous direction intersecting the thickness direction When,
A plurality of light emitting means for outputting light incident on the predetermined end side of the light guide member;
The light incident on the light guide member from the light emitting means is separated into at least two directions and travels in the light guide member, and the light is emitted weaker than the light between the separated lights, or the light And a light guide means configured to form a region that does not reach.

  ADVANTAGE OF THE INVENTION According to this invention, the game machine which can implement | achieve diversification of the display mode of the image by a light guide member can be provided.

Front side perspective view of a pachinko machine as an example of a gaming machine Perspective view showing pachinko machine in open state Perspective view showing the pachinko machine in another open state A perspective view showing the pachinko machine in yet another open state Front view of pachinko machine Front view of the pachinko machine with the front block removed Front view of game board Rear perspective view of pachinko machine Rear view of pachinko machine Block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine Flow chart showing an example of main control main processing Flow chart showing an example of main control interrupt processing Time chart for explaining when the suggestive effects appear in the decorative pattern variation display The schematic diagram which shows the screen transition of the decoration symbol display apparatus along the time chart of FIG. The schematic diagram which shows the screen transition figure of the decoration symbol display apparatus along the time chart of FIG. The schematic diagram which shows the screen transition figure of the decoration symbol display apparatus along the time chart of FIG. (A) is a screen diagram showing an example of a screen in which a player can select whether or not to restore the decorative symbol change display performed before transitioning to the special game state in the special game state; b) is a screen diagram showing an example of a screen that is displayed when the decorative symbol variation display is restored in the special gaming state. The figure which shows an example of the appearance probability of the reserved full tank effect in the pachinko machine of 1st Embodiment. Time chart for explaining the suggestion effect cancellation function The schematic diagram which shows the pachinko machine of 3rd Embodiment used as an own machine, and the other pachinko machine connected so that communication with the said pachinko machine was possible. The screen figure which shows an example of the display content of the decoration design display apparatus at the time of operating a selection operation apparatus in the operation possible period generated during the variable display of a decoration design The figure which shows an example of the appearance probability of the reserved full tank effect in the pachinko machine of 5th Embodiment. The figure explaining an example for making it easy to increase the frequency | count of holding of the right of the unit game which concerns on a special design Front view of game board in pachinko machine according to seventh embodiment (A) is a front view of a reel device, (b) is a front view of a middle reel. Front view for explaining the operation of the lottery result display device Schematic diagram showing the transition of display by the reel device when the second sub-sign warning is performed Schematic diagram showing the transition of display by the reel device when the second sub-sign warning is performed Schematic diagram showing transition of display by reel device when countdown notice is given (A) is an enlarged front view of the vicinity of the reel device in the game board, and (b) is a simplified cross-sectional view of the main configuration of the game board along the line AA in FIG. 30 (a). (A) is a simplified cross-sectional view of the main configuration including the reel device along line BB in FIG. 30 (a), and (b) illustrates a school of fish displayed beyond the display area of the reel device. Front view for (A) is an enlarged front view of the vicinity of the upper and lower start winning devices in the game board of the pachinko machine according to the eighth embodiment, (b) is a cross-sectional view of the game board taken along the line CC of FIG. 32 (a), (C) is a top view of FIG. 32 (a) as viewed from above, and (d) is the vicinity of the information display section when a player who is playing a pachinko machine according to the eighth embodiment looks obliquely in the lower left direction. Figure showing how to see (A) is a front view of the reel device of the ninth embodiment, (b) is a simplified cross-sectional view of the reel device taken along the line DD of FIG. 33 (a), and (c) is a front view of the gaming machine. Schematic cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine cut in the vertical direction at a substantially central position in the left-right direction in FIG. 4, (d) is a top view of the pressing operation device and the wave lamp (A) is a front view of the reel device when the display area of each symbol row by three reels is a basic display region, and (b) is a reduction in the display area of each symbol row by three reels. The front view of the reel device in the case of the display area, (c) is a top view of the reel device schematically showing a mechanism for changing the display area of the symbol row, and (d) is a reduction of the display area of the symbol row. Top view of the reel device schematically showing the state of being done An exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine according to the eleventh embodiment, viewed from the front side. Disassembled perspective view of drum base viewed from the front The perspective view which looked at the light-guide plate unit from the rear side The exploded perspective view of the light-guide plate unit seen from the front side An exploded perspective view of the light guide plate unit viewed from the rear side An exploded perspective view of the light guide plate unit viewed from the rear side (A) is a schematic diagram explaining the advancing direction of the light which injected into the lower end surface in a light-guide plate, (b) is a front view of the light-guide plate which shows an example of how to shine.

  With respect to an embodiment of the gaming machine according to the present invention, a pachinko machine 100 as an example of a ball and ball gaming machine which is a kind of gaming machine will be described, and then a modified example and other types of gaming machines will be described. First, regarding the embodiment of the pachinko machine 100, a structural configuration, an electrical configuration, and various control processes will be described in order.

<Structural structure>
First, the structure of the structural part of the pachinko machine 100 will be described with reference mainly to FIGS. 1 to 4 are perspective views showing various states of the pachinko machine 100, FIG. 1 shows a closed state of the pachinko machine 100, and FIG. 2 shows that the front block 102 and the intermediate block 103 are integrated with the outer frame 101. 3 shows a state in which the front block 102 is opened with respect to the intermediate block 103, and FIG. 4 shows a state in which the rear block 104 is opened with respect to the intermediate block 103. Show. 5 is a front view of the pachinko machine 100, and FIG. 6 shows a state in which the front block 102 of the pachinko machine 100 is removed from the state of FIG. Various wirings are omitted in each figure, and a part of the configuration of the game board 400 is omitted in FIGS. 3 and 6.

  The pachinko machine 100 includes, for example, an outer frame 101, a front block 102, an intermediate block 103, and a rear block 104, as shown in FIGS. It is configured to be displaceable.

  The outer frame 101 has a function as a main body support means for supporting the main body portion of the pachinko machine 100. For example, as shown in FIG. 2, the outer frame 101 is a substantially quadrilateral frame in which a top plate portion 111, a bottom plate portion 112, a left side plate portion 113, and a right side plate portion 114 are assembled, and the pachinko machine 100 is installed. The game machine is installed in a game machine installation facility (island facility) provided in the game hall and is firmly fixed by a fixture (not shown). In the pachinko machine 100, the outer frame 101 is not an indispensable configuration, and the main body portion corresponding to the configuration of the pachinko machine 100 excluding the outer frame 101 has the same inner shape as the outer frame 101 or the outer frame 101. It is good also as a structure with which the island facility was equipped with the support mechanism to support, and a part of locking mechanism which locks the main-body part.

  Intermediate block support mechanisms 121 and 122 are provided on one side of the outer frame 101 in the left-right direction (on the left side plate portion 113 side). The outer frame 101 and the intermediate block 103 are connected (coupled) by the intermediate block support mechanisms 121 and 122, and the main body portion of the pachinko machine 100 rotates one end side (left side) in the left-right direction in the front view of the pachinko machine 100. The base end side is configured to be capable of rotating forward with the other end side (right side) serving as a rotating front end side.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 1, the intermediate block support mechanisms 121 and 122 are provided separately at the upper end portion and the lower end portion of the outer frame 101. Each of the intermediate block support mechanisms 121 and 122 is configured such that, for example, a shaft portion provided in the intermediate block 103 is supported from below by a shaft support portion provided in the outer frame 101, and a shaft portion is provided in a shaft hole provided in the shaft support portion. It is comprised so that rotation is possible by setting it as the state inserted. In addition, the structure which can rotate the main-body part of the pachinko machine 100 including the intermediate block 103 is not limited to the above structure, and a shaft hole is provided on the intermediate block 103 side and a shaft part is formed on the outer frame 101 side. Other configurations may be used.

  The intermediate block support mechanisms 121 and 122 are provided with a function of releasing the connection state between the outer frame 101 and the intermediate block 103 by a predetermined removal operation, and the main body portion of the pachinko machine 100 including the intermediate block 103 is attached to the outer frame 101. Removably attached to it. For example, the connection state of the intermediate block 103 with respect to the outer frame 101 is released by performing a predetermined removal operation of opening the intermediate block 103 with respect to the outer frame 101 by a predetermined amount or more and moving it upward. The Thereby, the main body portion of the pachinko machine 100 can be removed from the outer frame 101.

  The front block 102 is disposed so as to overlap the front side with respect to the intermediate block 103, and the intermediate block 103 and the front block 102 are connected by front block support mechanisms 131 and 132 provided on the left side of the front view. The front block support mechanisms 131 and 132 have the same configuration as the intermediate block support mechanisms 121 and 122, support the front block 102 so as to be pivotable forward with respect to the intermediate block 103, and remove it by a predetermined removal operation. It is configured to be possible.

  The rear block 104 is arranged on the rear side with respect to the intermediate block 103, and the intermediate block 103 and the rear block 104 are arranged by rear block support mechanisms 136, 137 (see FIG. 8) provided on the left side in front view. It is connected. The rear block support mechanisms 136 and 137 have the same configuration as the intermediate block support mechanisms 121 and 122 and the front block support mechanisms 131 and 132, and support the rear block 104 so that the rear block 104 can be rotated rearward with respect to the intermediate block 103. And, it is configured to be supported so as to be removable by a predetermined removal operation.

  The pachinko machine 100 also includes an intermediate block locking mechanism that restricts the opening and closing of the intermediate block 103 relative to the outer frame 101, a front block locking mechanism that restricts the opening and closing of the front block 102 relative to the intermediate block 103, an intermediate block locking mechanism, and a front block There is provided a lock operating mechanism that is operated to unlock and lock the block locking mechanism. As shown in FIG. 3, the intermediate block 103 is provided with a key cylinder 141 as a lock operating mechanism that is exposed to the front side of the pachinko machine 100 through the opening of the front block 102.

  As a predetermined operation on the key cylinder 141, when a right rotation operation is performed with an operation key (not shown), the movable portion 143 of the intermediate block locking mechanism provided in the intermediate block 103 is activated. As a result, the engagement between the engaged portion 142 provided on the outer frame 101 and the movable portion 143 as part of the intermediate block locking mechanism is released, and the intermediate block 103 is in an open / close permitted state with respect to the outer frame 101. Become.

  On the other hand, the movable portion 144 of the front block locking mechanism provided in the intermediate block 103 is operated in response to a left rotation operation with a predetermined operation key on the key cylinder 141. As a result, the engaged portion 145 provided on the front block 102 as a part of the front block locking mechanism and the movable portion 144 are disengaged, and the front block 102 is in an open / close permitted state with respect to the intermediate block 103. Become.

  Further, the pachinko machine 100 is provided with a rear block opening / closing regulating mechanism that regulates opening / closing of the rear block 104 with respect to the intermediate block 103. By this rear block opening / closing restriction mechanism, the rear block 104 can be switched with respect to the intermediate block 103 between a state in which opening / closing is prohibited (open / close prohibited state) and a state in which opening / closing is permitted (open / close permitted state) by a predetermined operation. It is said that.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 4, the rear block opening / closing restriction mechanism includes two opening / closing restriction portions 150 </ b> A and 150 </ b> B provided in the intermediate block 103 and one opening / closing restriction portion 150 </ b> C provided in the rear block 104. . The three opening / closing regulating portions 150A to 150C are provided with rotating pieces 151A to 151C that can be rotated. The rotating pieces 151A to 151C change the engagement state with the opening portion arranged so as to overlap in the front-rear direction in the closed state of the rear block 104 due to the rotation operation, and thereby the open / close prohibited posture corresponding to the open / close prohibited state And an open / close permission posture corresponding to the open / close permission state can be switched. When all the rotating pieces 151A to 151C are in the opening / closing allowable posture, the rotating pieces 151A to 151C can pass through the openings, and the rear block 104 is in an opening / closing allowable state with respect to the intermediate block 103. The open / close prohibited posture and the open / close allowable posture may be switched between the open / close prohibited state and the open / close permitted state by at least one of the positions and orientations of the rotating pieces 151A to 151C. Alternatively, it may be configured to move in a certain direction, or may be configured to operate by a combination of movement and rotation. Hereinafter, the same applies to the change in posture when the constituent members in each apparatus move between a plurality of postures.

  Among the three rotating pieces 151A to 151C, two rotating pieces 151A and 151B corresponding to a part of them are formed in the rear block 104 in the open / close prohibited state of the rear block 104 as shown in FIG. One rotating piece 151C exposed to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 through the opening and corresponding to the remaining portion is exposed to the front side of the intermediate block 103 as shown in FIG. For this reason, it is not possible to switch all the rotating pieces 151A to 151C to the opening / closing allowable posture only by an operation from one side such as the back side of the pachinko machine 100 or the front side of the intermediate block 103. Has been increased.

  Further, the pachinko machine 100 is provided with a game ball movement restricting mechanism for restricting the movement of the game ball from the intermediate block 103 to the front block 102. As shown in FIGS. 3 and 6, for example, the game ball movement restriction mechanism is configured by a combination of a flow restriction piece 161 provided in the intermediate block 103 and a restriction changing unit 162 provided in the front block 102. The flow restricting piece 161 is biased by a coil spring (not shown) toward the front side where the front block 102 is located.

  In a state in which the front block 102 is closed with respect to the intermediate block 103 (a closed state of the front block 102), the flow-down restricting piece 161 is in a movement-permitted state that allows the game ball to flow down. The change unit 162 is pushed and pushed to the rear side of the intermediate block 103. The flow restricting piece 161 is arranged to be shifted rearward with respect to a guide passage (not shown) for guiding the game ball from the intermediate block 103 to the front block 102 in the movement-permitted state. Thereby, in the closed state of the front block 102, the movement of the game ball from the intermediate block 103 to the front block 102 is permitted.

  On the other hand, in the state where the front block 102 is opened with respect to the intermediate block 103 (open state of the front block 102), the pressure of the flow restricting piece 161 by the restriction changing unit 162 is released, and compared with the closed state of the front block 102. Accordingly, the movement restriction state in which the flow restriction piece 161 protrudes toward the front block 102 is set. The flow restriction piece 161 protrudes into the guide passage in the movement prohibited state, and prevents the game ball from flowing down to the downstream side. Thereby, the movement of the game ball from the intermediate block 103 to the previous block 102 is prohibited.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 100, as shown in FIG. 2, for example, the intermediate block 103 is closed with respect to the outer frame 101 at the lower end portion on the rear side of the intermediate block 103 and on the rotation front end side (left side in the rear view). An open / close detection switch 108 for detecting whether or not the intermediate block 103 is provided is provided. Further, as shown in FIG. An open / close detection switch 109 for detecting whether or not the front block 102 is closed with respect to 103 is provided.

  Next, each structure of the front block 102, the intermediate block 103, and the back block 104 is demonstrated in order.

  As shown in FIGS. 1 and 3, the front block 102 forms a substantially entire front surface of the pachinko machine 100 and is a substantially rectangular member having a thickness in the front-rear direction, and decorates the front surface portion of the pachinko machine 100. It functions as a front decoration means. The front block 102 is mainly configured by a base frame 201 made of synthetic resin, and is configured by attaching a plurality of functional parts before and after the base frame 201. On the front side of the base frame 201, a front decorative body 210 that forms the front surface of the pachinko machine 100 surrounds the opening 210A along the outer edge of the opening 210A that is formed to include the front-view center portion of the front block 102. It is attached. In a state where the base frame 201 and the front decorative body 210 constituting the front block 102 are combined, the opening 210A is formed through the wide area excluding the outer periphery to which the front decorative body 210 is attached. The intermediate block 103 including the game board 400 located on the rear side of the front block 102 is configured to be visible to the player through the opening 210A.

  1 and 3, the front block 102 includes a central panel 220 provided on the back side of the base frame 201 so as to close the opening 210A, a main storage mechanism 230 for storing game balls, An auxiliary storage mechanism 240 that stores game balls and a launch operation device 250 that is operated by a player to launch game balls stored in the main storage mechanism 230 are provided.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 1 and 5, the front block 102 has an opening peripheral portion 211 that surrounds the periphery of the opening 210A as a part of the front decorative body 210, and projects forward on the lower side with respect to the opening 210A. An upper projecting portion 217, a lower projecting portion 218 located below the upper projecting portion 217 and projecting forward, and an upper projecting portion 217 and a lower projecting portion on the right side of the lower projecting portion 218. A flat portion 219 is formed which is configured by a substantially flat region located on the back side from 218 and on which the firing operation device 250 is disposed. The main storage mechanism 230 is disposed on the upper protrusion 217, and the auxiliary storage mechanism 240 is disposed on the lower protrusion 218.

  The center panel 220 has a function as a cover body that allows the rear side to be visually recognized while closing the opening 210 </ b> A formed penetrating in the front-rear direction in a state where the base frame 201 and the front decorative body 210 are combined. For example, as shown in FIGS. 1 and 3, the center panel 220 includes a panel frame 221 (see FIG. 3) attached from the rear side of the base frame 201, and a light transmitting property fitted on the front side of the panel frame 221. 1 and a light transmitting rear plate 223 (see FIG. 3) fitted substantially parallel to the front plate 222 with a predetermined gap on the rear side of the panel frame 221. Yes.

  The main storage mechanism 230 has a function of storing game balls acquired as the game progresses and game balls lent out from the game hall. For example, as shown in FIG. 1, the main storage mechanism 230 includes a storage portion 231, a ball removal mechanism (not shown), and a ball removal operation member 232 that operates the ball removal mechanism. The storage unit 231 includes an inflow port 231 </ b> A that allows game balls to flow into the storage unit 231 from the inside of the pachinko machine 100, and an outflow port (not shown) that allows game balls to flow out from the storage unit 231 into the pachinko machine 100. A discharge port (not shown) formed upstream from the outflow port is provided. By releasing the discharge port, the game ball is released from the storage unit 231 to the player side without being taken into the pachinko machine 100. The ball removal mechanism has a function of switching the discharge destination of the game ball between the outlet and the outlet.

  A game ball acquired according to the progress of the game and a game ball lent according to a lending operation to a lending operation device 292 described later mainly flow into the storage unit 231 through the inflow port 231A. The storage portion 231 is formed with an opening on the upper side, and a game ball owned by a player is manually inserted through the opening, or a game ball lent out at a game hall is supplied.

  The game balls that have flowed into the storage unit 231 are sequentially guided to the side where the outflow port and the discharge port are formed (upper right side in FIG. 1) while being aligned in a row. When a ball removing operation (for example, a pressing operation) is not performed on the ball removing operation member 232, the game ball is guided to a launching device 330 (see FIG. 3) described later through an outlet. On the other hand, when the ball removal operation is performed on the ball removal operation member 232, the game ball is guided to the auxiliary storage mechanism 240 (see FIG. 1) through the discharge port.

  As shown in FIGS. 1 and 5, the auxiliary storage mechanism 240 opens and closes the storage unit 241 having the inflow ports 241A and 241C (see FIG. 5) and the discharge port 241B (see FIG. 1) of the game ball, and the discharge port 241B. And a ball removal operation member 242 for operating the ball removal mechanism 243. A game ball or the like acquired as the game progresses mainly flows into the main storage mechanism 230, but flows into the storage unit 241 through the inlet 241A if the storage unit 231 is full. Further, even in response to the ball removal operation on the ball removal operation member 232, the game ball flows from the storage unit 231 to the storage unit 241 through the inflow port 241C.

  The bottom surface of the storage unit 241 is inclined downward toward the discharge port 241B. When the discharge port 241B is opened by a ball removal operation (for example, a pressing operation) with respect to the ball removal operation member 242, all the game balls stored in the storage unit 241 can be sequentially released to the outside of the pachinko machine 100. In addition, when the discharge port 241B is completely opened by the ball removal operation on the ball removal operation member 242, the release state is kept until a return operation (for example, a pressing operation again) is performed on the ball removal operation member 242. Maintained. A ball overflow switch 249 (see FIG. 10) for detecting whether or not game balls are excessively stored in the storage unit 241 is provided at the back of the inflow port 241A.

  As shown in FIGS. 1 and 5, the firing operation device 250 includes a pedestal 251 projecting forward from the flat portion 219 of the front decorative body 210, a rotatable firing handle 252 provided around the pedestal 251, A variable resistor 253 (see FIG. 10) for detecting the rotation operation amount of the firing handle 252, a contact sensor 254 (see FIG. 10) for detecting that a player is in contact with the firing handle 252, and the firing handle 252 It includes a firing stop switch 255 (see FIG. 5) that invalidates the injection of the game ball accompanying the rotation operation by the player's operation. When the launch handle 252 is rotated by the player, a game ball is ejected from the launch device 330 (see FIG. 3) toward the game board 400 (see FIG. 3) with an intensity corresponding to the rotational operation amount. When the contact between the firing handle 252 and the player is not detected by the contact sensor 254, or when the firing operation is invalidated by the operation of the firing stop switch 255, the firing handle 252 is rotated. However, the game ball is not ejected from the launching device 330.

  In addition, frame light emitting devices 271 to 275 (see FIG. 10) are provided at the back of the front decorative body 210 in the front block 102. The frame light emitting devices 271 to 275 are arranged so as to overlap the opening peripheral portion 211 of the front decorative body 210 and are attached to the base frame 201. As shown in FIG. 5, the opening peripheral edge 211 includes an upper central edge 211A, an upper left edge 211B and an upper right edge 211C located on both the left and right sides of the upper central edge 211A, and an upper left edge. The left side edge portion 211D positioned below 211B and the right side edge portion 211E positioned below the upper right side edge portion 211C as light emitting portions, and frame light emission corresponding to each light emitting portion Devices 271 to 275 are installed.

  The frame light-emitting devices 271 to 275 include an upper center frame light-emitting device 271 corresponding to the upper central edge portion 211A, a left upper frame light-emitting device 272 corresponding to the left upper edge portion 211B, and an upper-right frame light emission corresponding to the upper right side edge portion 211C. The apparatus 273 includes a left frame light emitting device 274 corresponding to the left edge 211D, and a right frame light emitting device 275 (see FIG. 10) corresponding to the right edge 211E. Each of the frame light emitting devices 271 to 275 integrates and electrically connects a light emitting diode (LED) as one or a plurality of light emitting means, an electronic component such as a resistor for controlling the LED, and the electronic components. And a printed circuit board.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 5, the front block 102 is provided with, for example, an upper left acoustic output port 211F and an upper right acoustic output port 211G at the upper portion of the opening peripheral edge 211, and these upper left acoustic output ports 211F. In addition, an upper left acoustic device 281 and an upper right acoustic device 282 (see FIGS. 3 and 10) are provided corresponding to each of the upper right acoustic output ports 211G. The upper left acoustic device 281 and the upper right acoustic device 282 are attached to the base frame 201 so as to be located behind (in the rear of) the opening peripheral edge 211 of the front decorative body 210.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 1, the front block 102 is provided with a game ball lending device 290, for example, on the upper right portion of the upper protrusion 217. The game ball lending device 290 includes a frequency display device 291 that displays a numerical value corresponding to the remaining amount of banknotes, cards, and the like placed in a card unit (not shown) arranged side by side in the pachinko machine 100, and a game ball lending A lending operation device 292 operated by the player when receiving the card, and a return operation device 293 operated by the player when returning the bills, cards, etc. inserted into the card unit. When a lending operation is performed on the lending operation device 292 in a valid state in which bills or cards are inserted into the card unit and numerical values corresponding to those amounts are displayed on the frequency display device 291, the lending operation is performed. In response, a predetermined number of game balls are lent out from the payout device 540 (see FIG. 8) of the rear block 104, and the display of the frequency display device 291 is updated as the game balls are lent out. On the other hand, when a return operation is performed on the return operation device 293 in the valid state, a card in which the equivalent of the banknote corresponding to the remaining amount or the remaining amount is recorded is returned from the card unit according to the returning operation.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 1, the front block 102 is provided with an input operation device 260 capable of an input operation different from the shooting operation by the player. The input operation device 260 includes, for example, a push operation device 261 that can perform a push operation, a rotation operation device 262 that can perform a rotation operation, and a selection operation device 263 that can perform an up / down / left / right direction operation. With these operation devices 261 to 263, an effect selection operation for selecting an effect to be executed in the pachinko machine 100, an apparatus setting operation for setting the volume and light amount of each device for executing the effect of the pachinko machine 100, or a player It is possible to execute a production setting operation or the like that enables execution of the performance of the pachinko machine 100 according to the game before the previous time by inputting information, and these operations can be performed by the player or the game hall manager as necessary. It is said that.

  For example, although the details will be described later, the pressing operation device 261 functions as an operation device for causing a predetermined suggestive effect to appear during a period in which the decorative symbol is variably displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479 (see FIG. 7). To do. The “suggesting effect” is an effect that suggests the degree of ease (or expectation) of the transition to the special game state after the decorative symbol is confirmed and displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479.

  Note that an input operation unit (for example, an annular rotation operation unit in the rotation operation device 262) that the player contacts in the input operation device 260 is rotated, moved up and down by an input operation unit driving means such as a motor or a solenoid, or It is preferable that an operation such as vibration is executed by control of the pachinko machine 100 (for example, control of the sub-control board 940 (see FIG. 10)), either before or after the input operation, or during the input operation, By operating the input portion at a plurality of timings, it is possible to diversify the effects accompanied by the input operation, such as actively prompting the input operation.

  Next, the intermediate block 103 will be described. The intermediate block 103 is a substantially rectangular member having substantially the same size as the front block 102, and the front block 102 and the rear block 104 are attached so that the main body of the pachinko machine 100 is integrated. have. The intermediate block 103 is configured by attaching a plurality of functional components including the game board 400 to the base frame 301.

  3 and 4, the intermediate block 103 includes a base frame 301 having an opening, a game board 400 (see FIG. 3) that is attached from the front side while covering the opening of the base frame 301, and a base frame A game board support mechanism that rotatably and detachably supports the game board 400 with respect to the 301, a game board fixing mechanism that fixes the position of the game board 400 with respect to the base frame 301, and a game ball on the game board 400. Based on a command from the launching device 330 (see FIG. 3) to be ejected, a main control device 370 (see FIG. 4) that is attached to the back side of the game board 400 and controls the progress of the game in an integrated manner. And a sub-control device 390 (see FIG. 4) for controlling game effects and state notifications.

  In the base frame 301, as shown in FIG. 3, a guide passage portion 301A in which a guide passage for guiding a game ball released from a payout device 540 (see FIG. 8) described later to the front block 102 is formed, A plurality of wirings (not shown) and an opening 301B where the signal relay device 311 is located are provided. The opening 301B has a shape penetrating in the front-rear direction below the game board 400, and a plurality of wires inserted into the opening 301B are various devices provided in the front block 102 (for example, frame light emitting devices 271 to 271). 275, an upper left acoustic device 281 and an upper right acoustic device 282) and devices (for example, the main control device 370 and the sub control device 390) provided on the back side of the intermediate block 103 and the rear block 104 The signal relay device 311 includes a wiring, and has a function as a relay board that relays a part of the wiring.

  As shown in FIG. 3, the game board 400 includes a flat base 401 having a through-hole through which a game ball such as a discharge port 401A can pass back and forth, and an outer rail that curves smoothly from the lower left to the upper right of the base 401. 402, the inner rail 403 that curves smoothly from the lower right to the upper left of the base body 401, the return ball prevention mechanism 404 attached to the upper left end of the inner rail 403, and the upper right end of the outer rail 402 And a rebound preventing member 405 to be attached. The outer rail 402 guides a game ball launched from a launch device 330 described later into the game area. The return ball prevention mechanism 404 prevents the game ball once released into the game area from the launch passage 401B formed at a portion where the outer rail 402 and the inner rail 403 are opposed in parallel from returning to the launch passage 401B. The recoil prevention member 405 has a shock absorption property that prevents a significant recoil of the game ball that has passed the upper center of the game board 400 and directed to the right side through the upper center and returns to the left side again. For example, it is made of a material such as vibration damping rubber.

  As shown in FIG. 3, a return ball passage portion 163 is formed in the lower portion on the back side of the front block 102. There is a gap between the guide member 335 for guiding the game ball from the launcher 330 in the direction of the launch path 401B and the outer rail 402, and the launcher 330 was launched but launched without exceeding the return ball prevention mechanism 404. The game ball returning backward in the passage 401B is returned to the auxiliary storage mechanism 240 (see FIG. 5) from the inlet 241A (see FIG. 5) via the return ball passage portion 163 arranged below the gap.

  The game ball that has advanced beyond the return ball prevention mechanism 404 reaches the game area, and moves (flows down) while falling in the game area by its own weight. The game area has a substantially circular outer peripheral shape, and is divided into a shape having a large area in the front-rear width slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball. The game area is roughly divided by the outer rail 402 and the inner rail 403 at the outer peripheral portion, the front side is partitioned by the rear plate 223 of the center panel 220 in a substantially planar shape, and the rear side is substantially planar by the base body 401 of the game board 400. It is divided into. Various structures provided in the game area will be described later.

  As shown in FIG. 3, the launching device 330 sequentially sends out game balls stored in the main storage mechanism 230 to the launch position, and a ball feed solenoid 332 that drives the ball feed mechanism 331 (FIG. 10). A launching mechanism 333 for injecting a game ball arranged at the launch position, a launching solenoid 334 for driving the launching mechanism 333 (see FIG. 10), and a game ball launched from the launching mechanism 333 on the game board 400. And a guide member 335 for guiding to the firing passage 401B. As described above, the launch device 330 operates in response to the launch operation on the launch operation device 250, and the drive control of the launch solenoid 334 changes in accordance with the launch operation on the launch operation device 250 to adjust the launch force.

  As shown in FIG. 4, the main controller 370 includes a main control board 920 (see FIG. 10) and a board case 371 having a split structure that accommodates the main control board 920. The main control board 920 is housed in a light-transmitting board case 371 that is sealed so that it cannot be opened without leaving a trace.

  Further, the main control device 370 is rotatably attached to the back side of the game board 400. Specifically, an attachment portion 372 is rotatably connected and fixed to the base 401 of the game board 400 on the back side, and the main controller 370 is attached to the attachment portion 372. As a result, not only the rear side (front side) of the main control device 370 but also the front side (back side) of the main control device 370 is operated on the game board 400 by rotating the mounting portion 372. It can be easily confirmed while attached. The main control device 370 may be connected to the attachment portion 372 so that it cannot be removed without leaving a trace, and the removal state of the main control device 370 may be easily managed.

  The sub-control device 390 includes a sub-control board 940 (see FIG. 10) and a board case 391 having a split structure that accommodates the sub-control board 940. For example, the sub-control board 940 is housed in a translucent board case 391 that is sealed so that it cannot be opened without leaving a trace, like the main control board 920. It is attached to the back side.

  Here, in the game board 400, various structures arranged in the game area will be described with reference mainly to FIG. FIG. 7 is a front view of the game board 400.

  As shown in FIG. 7, the game board 400 includes a base body 401, flow-down changing members such as nails 411 and windmills 412 that change the flow direction and flow speed of the game ball, and a center disposed at the center of the base body 401. The structure 420, the middle start winning device 431 disposed on the lower side with respect to the central structure 420, and the starter according to the second special symbol disposed on the lower right side with respect to the central structure 420 (specifically The right start winning device 432), the big winning devices 433 and 434 (specifically, the lower big winning device 433 and the upper big winning device 434) disposed below the right start winning device 432, and the right start. Arranged on the upper side (upstream side) of the winning device 432, the starting device 436 related to the normal design, and on the upper right side of the game board 400, and above (upstream side) the upper and lower big winning devices 433,434. And a combination actuating device 435 Located on the left and right sides of the middle starting winning device 431 a regular winning device 439A, and a 439B.

  The middle start winning device 431 is a winning device in which two winning devices (specifically, the left middle start winning device 431A and the right middle start winning device 431B) are integrated. The left middle start winning device 431A is a start device related to the first special symbol, and the right middle start winning device 431B is a start device related to the second special symbol similar to the right start winning device 432. That is, the middle start winning device 431 is a winning device having two functions as a starting device related to the first special symbol and a starting device related to the second special symbol.

  The middle start winning device 431 includes a distribution unit 620 that distributes the game ball that has entered from the entrance 611 to either the left middle start winning device 431A or the right middle start winning device 431B. The distribution unit 620 is configured such that each time a game ball enters from the entrance 611, the winning devices 431A and 431B serving as game ball distribution destinations are alternately switched. Thereby, the game balls that have entered the middle start winning device 431 basically alternately enter the left middle start winning device 431A or the right middle start winning device 431B.

  The middle start winning device 431 does not allow a part of the game balls that have entered from the entrance 611 to enter any of the middle start winning devices 431A and 431B, and the right or left side of the middle start winning device 431 with a very low probability. It has the function to discharge | emit on the game board 400 from the opening formed in this. The probability that the game ball that has entered from the entrance 611 will be discharged without entering the start winning devices 431A and 431B is, for example, about 1/100, and preferably about 1/1000.

  In addition, the game board 400 is provided with a plurality of switches as detection means for detecting the passage of the game ball corresponding to the above-mentioned left middle start winning device 431A or the like (see FIG. 10), and corresponds to each switch. The entry of a game ball into a predetermined area can be detected. For example, a middle start prize switch (left middle start prize switch 441A) that detects a game ball that has entered the left middle start prize device 431A, and a middle start prize switch (middle on the right side) that detects a game ball that has entered the right middle start prize device 431B. A start winning switch 441B), a right starting winning switch 442 for detecting a game ball that has entered the right starting winning device 432, a lower great winning switch 443 for detecting a game ball that has entered the lower winning device 433, and an upper winning device 434. Upper prize winning switch 444 for detecting a game ball that has entered, a combination actuating switch 445 for detecting a game ball that has entered the consecutive action device 435, a start switch 446 for detecting a game ball that has entered the starter 436, and a lower prize winning A non-specific passage switch 447 for detecting a game ball that has entered a non-specific passage (not shown) formed inside the device 433; A specific path switch 448 for detecting a game ball that has entered a specific path (not shown) formed inside the grand prize winning device 433, and a general prize switch 449A for detecting each of the game balls that have entered the general winning devices 439A and 439B. 449B and the like are installed on the game board 400.

  Further, the game board 400 is provided with various sensors for preventing fraud (see FIG. 10), and an abnormality occurring in the pachinko machine 100 can be detected. For example, a magnetic sensor 491, a vibration sensor 492, a radio wave sensor 493, and the like are installed on the game board 400.

  The entrance portion of the game ball of the central structure 420 and the starter 436 constitutes a ball entrance, and the game ball that has entered each ball entrance is discharged into the game area. Game balls of each winning device, specifically, left middle starting winning device 431A, right middle starting winning device 431B, right starting winning device 432, lower major winning device 433, upper major winning device 434 and general winning devices 439A, 439B. The entrance portion of each constitutes a winning opening, and the game balls that have entered each winning opening are guided through a through-hole formed in the base 401 to a recovery / discharge passage (not shown) formed on the back side of the base 401. In addition, the game balls that have not entered each winning device are guided to the collection / discharge passage through the discharge port 401A provided in the most downstream portion of the game area. The game balls guided to the collection discharge passage are discharged from the pachinko machine 100 to a game ball circulation device (not shown) provided in the game hall. When a game ball enters one of the winning devices, a predetermined number of gaming balls corresponding to the type of the winning device are paid out from the payout device 540 (see FIGS. 8 and 9).

  Each winning device may be configured separately from the other winning devices, or two or more winning devices (for example, the left middle starting winning device 431A and the right middle starting winning device) like the middle start winning device 431. The winning device may be constituted by a device integrated with 431B). In addition, it is not always necessary for the starting device such as the left middle starting winning device 431A to be a winning opening from which a predetermined number of game balls are paid out when the game balls enter, and the game balls are again not returned to the game area. It is good also as the entrance to be released.

  Each of the general winning device 439A and the general winning device 439B guides the entered game ball to the back side of the base 401 without changing the approach probability of the game ball to them. Although the middle start winning device 431 does not change the entrance probability to the entrance 611, as described above, a part of the game balls that have entered the middle start winning device 431 are placed in either of the left and right middle start winning devices 431A and 431B. Without being entered (that is, without being guided to the back side of the base body 401), it is discharged onto the game board 400 (that is, the game area).

  Further, the right start winning device 432 related to the second special symbol has a mechanism for changing the entrance probability of the game ball into the inside. The mechanism for changing the probability of entering the game ball need not be provided only in the starting device related to the second special symbol. Instead of or in addition to that, the starting device and the general winning device related to the first special symbol. 439A, 439B may be provided in any one or a plurality of winning devices such as a middle start winning device 431 including a starting device related to the first special symbol and a starting device related to the second special symbol. In addition, the mechanism for changing the entrance probability of the game ball may be constituted by a drive means such as an electrically driven solenoid, and is represented by a mechanism that operates by the weight of the game ball that has entered the predetermined area. You may comprise by the mechanism which operate | moves mechanically.

  The right start prize winning device 432 according to the second special symbol includes a right entry restriction mechanism 452 that changes an entry probability of a game ball to the inside by a transition between an entry allowable attitude and an entry prohibited attitude, and a right entry restriction mechanism A right entry restricting solenoid 462 (see FIG. 10) for driving 452. The right entry restriction mechanism 452 includes two movable pieces that are driven by the right entry restriction solenoid 462. When the right entry restriction mechanism 452 is in the entry prohibition posture, the two movable pieces are the entrance (award opening). The game ball cannot enter the right start prize-winning device 432 by adopting an arrangement that narrows (or closes)), but when the right entry restricting mechanism 452 is in the approaching allowable posture, the two movable pieces are at their tips. The game ball can enter the right start winning device 432 by arranging the parts so that the interval between the parts is increased. The right entry restriction mechanism 452 enters the right when a game ball that has entered the starter 436 related to the normal symbol is won by a lottery based on detection by the start switch 446 (hereinafter also referred to as “normal symbol lottery”). In accordance with the drive by the restriction solenoid 462, the posture is allowed to enter the predetermined allowable number of times and for a predetermined time.

  As shown in FIG. 7, the lower grand prize winning device 433 includes a lower entry restriction mechanism 453 for restricting the entry of a game ball into the inside by a transition between an allowable entry position and an prohibited entry attitude, and a lower entry restriction mechanism. The lower entry restriction solenoid 463 (see FIG. 10) that changes the posture of the mechanism 453 and the transition between the non-guidance posture and the guidance posture causes the game ball that has entered the lower prize winning device 433 to be a non-specific passage or a specific passage. A sorting mechanism (not shown) for sorting and a switching solenoid 465 (see FIG. 10) for switching the guidance destination of the game ball by changing the attitude of the sorting mechanism are provided. When the lower entry restricting mechanism 453 is in the entry prohibition posture, the lower entry restricting mechanism 453 closes the entrance (winning entrance), so that the game ball cannot enter the lower outstanding prize device 433. When the lower entry restricting mechanism 453 is in the approach permitting posture, the lower entry restricting mechanism 453 opens the entrance, so that the game ball can enter the lower prize-winning device 433. In addition, the game ball that has entered the lower prize-winning device 433 is guided to a non-specific path when the distribution mechanism is in a non-guided posture protruding forward, and is in a guided posture in which the distribution mechanism is immersed backward. It is guided to a specific passage. The specific passage, the non-specific passage, and the distribution mechanism are provided to diversify the game state transition, and when a game ball enters the specific passage, an advantageous game state is given to the player as a privilege. .

  As shown in FIG. 7, the upper prize winning device 434 includes an upper entry restriction mechanism 454 that restricts the entry of a game ball into the inside by a transition between an entry allowable attitude and an entry prohibited attitude, and an upper entry restriction. An upper entry restriction solenoid 464 (see FIG. 10) that changes the posture of the mechanism 454 is provided. When the upper entry restriction mechanism 454 is in the entry prohibition posture, the upper entry restriction mechanism 454 closes the entrance (winning port) so that the game ball cannot enter the upper prize winning device 434, but the upper entry restriction mechanism 454 Is in the allowance for entering position, the upper entry restricting mechanism 454 opens the entrance to allow the game ball to enter the upper prize winning device 434.

  In addition, as an approach allowable posture and an entry prohibition posture as a mechanism for changing the probability of entering a game ball into the right entry restricting mechanism 452 or the like, each mechanism is configured to receive a winning opening (or a winning opening) of each device. In response to a change in posture of the operation member that switches between a special state in which a game ball can enter and a normal state in which the game ball cannot enter, at least one of the position and orientation of the operation member differs depending on each posture I just need it. Further, as a mechanism for changing the entrance probability of a game ball such as the right entry restriction mechanism 452, it is not always necessary to set the game ball in an inaccessible state, and the game ball is allowed to enter even in the normal state. In the state, the posture of the operation member may be changed so that the game ball can enter more easily than the normal state.

  A game ball can enter the lower prize-winning apparatus 433 and the upper prize-winning apparatus 434 when winning a lottery. Specifically, the lottery based on the fact that the game ball that has entered the left middle start winning device 431A related to the first special symbol is detected by the left middle start winning switch 441A (hereinafter also referred to as “first special symbol lottery”). Or a game ball that has entered the right middle start winning device 431B or the right start winning device 432 according to the second special symbol is detected by the right middle start winning switch 441B or the right start winning switch 442. When a lottery (hereinafter also referred to as “second special symbol lottery”) is won, at least one of the lower entry restriction solenoid 463 and the upper entry restriction solenoid 464 is activated. By this operation, at least one of the lower approach restricting mechanism 453 and the upper approach restricting mechanism 454 takes the approach permitting posture for a predetermined time for a predetermined number of times. In addition, the distribution mechanism shifts to the guidance posture in accordance with the operation of the switching solenoid 465 after a predetermined time from the transition of the lower entry restriction mechanism 453 to the approach allowable posture, and further switches after the predetermined time from the transition to the guidance posture. The non-guided posture is returned in response to the stop of the solenoid 465.

  The combination operating device 435 is a device for setting conditions necessary for the lower prize winning device 433 and the upper prize winning device 434 to start operating. After winning the big win lottery, either the lower big prize device 433 or the upper big prize device 434 starts operation on condition that the game ball of the combination operating device 435 passes. For this reason, when a player wins a big hit, the player can start a special gaming state at the timing he / she intends. Note that it is not always necessary that either the lower prize-winning device 433 or the upper prize-winning device 434 start the operation on condition that the game ball of the combination actuating device 435 passes, instead of or In addition, either the lower prize-winning device 433 or the upper prize-winning device 434 may be activated when a predetermined time elapses.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 7, the game board 400 is integrated with display devices 471 to 473 for displaying symbol change display and lottery results, and display devices 476 to 478 for displaying the number of times a game is held. A display device having a plurality of light emitting units is provided in a lower left portion corresponding to a part of the game board 400. The plurality of light emitting units are partitioned in advance into light emitting areas corresponding to each device, and the state of each device is displayed according to the light emitting state.

  Specifically, the first special symbol is variably displayed on the game board 400 in accordance with the first special symbol lottery, or the first special symbol is fixedly displayed with a stop symbol corresponding to the lottery result. The special symbol display device 471 related to the special symbol and the second special symbol are displayed in a variable manner in accordance with the second special symbol lottery, or the second special symbol is displayed with the stop symbol corresponding to the lottery result. Special symbol display device 472 related to the special symbol, special symbol hold display device 476 that displays the number of times the unit game is held according to the first special symbol, and special symbol hold that displays the number of times the unit game is held related to the second special symbol A display device 477 is provided. The right of the unit game related to the first special symbol and the right of the unit game related to the second special symbol are each reserved up to four times. Here, the unit game is a game for one time executed based on one start prize, and whether or not a lottery is executed based on one start prize and a lottery based on the determination A series of games including the start and end of variable display until the result is displayed.

  When the right of the unit game related to the first special symbol is held up to the maximum number of times, it is assumed that the game ball that has entered the left middle start winning device 431A is detected by the left middle start winning switch 441A (see FIG. 10). However, the unit game right related to the first special symbol is not added. Similarly, when the right of the unit game related to the second special symbol is reserved up to the maximum number of times, the game ball that has entered the right middle start winning device 431B or the right start winning device 432 is the right middle start winning switch 441B (FIG. 10) or the right start winning switch 442 (see FIG. 10), the right of the unit game related to the second special symbol is not added.

  Each of the special symbol display device 471 related to the first special symbol and the special symbol display device 472 related to the second special symbol is composed of a plurality of light emitting units, and is controlled by the main control board 920 (see FIG. 10). . Each of the display of the first special symbol and the display of the second special symbol is represented by a light emission pattern of the plurality of light emitting units (a combination of a light emission state including a light emission color (off, on, flashing)). The special symbol hold display device 476 related to the first special symbol and the special symbol hold display device 477 related to the second special symbol have the number of times of holding depending on the combination of the light emission states (off, on, flashing) of the two single color light emitting units. indicate.

  In addition, the game board 400 includes a normal symbol display device 473 that displays a normal symbol in a variable manner or a normal symbol that is fixedly displayed in accordance with a lottery result according to the normal symbol. A normal symbol hold display device 478 for displaying the number of hold times of the right of the unit game is provided. The right to unit games related to normal symbols is reserved up to 4 times. When the right of the unit game related to the normal symbol is held up to the maximum number of times, the right of the unit game related to the normal symbol is not added even if the game ball that has entered the starter 436 is detected by the start switch 446.

  The normal symbol display device 473 includes a plurality of light emitting units, and is controlled by the main control board 920 (see FIG. 10). A normal symbol is expressed by a light emission pattern of a plurality of light emitting units. Further, the normal symbol hold display device 478 displays the number of hold times by a combination of the light emission states (off, on, flashing) of the two single color light emitting units.

  In addition, the game board 400 is displayed so as to overlap the rear of the central structure 420, so that the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner or the decorative symbols are displayed in a unit game related to the first special symbol and the second special symbol. A decorative symbol display device 479 is provided. The variation display and confirmation display of the decorative symbols are controlled by the sub-control board 940, and are synchronized with the variation display and confirmation display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol by the main control board 920. In the variation display of the decorative symbol, more complicated and various effects are executed than the variation display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. It should be noted that the variation display and final display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol and the variation display and final display of the decorative symbol always start to change at the same timing or stop display as the final display. It is not necessary, and the setting may be such that the change is started at substantially the same timing while providing a slight time difference at each timing, and the final display is performed at substantially the same timing.

  Further, the game board 400 includes a board surface light emitting device 490 (see FIG. 10) provided on the back side of various structures, and the board surface light emitting device 490 accompanies the progress of the game based on the control by the sub control board 940. Various light emission effects and state notifications by light emission are executed.

  Here, various game states and transitions between game states will be described. The normal game state (hereinafter abbreviated as “normal game state”) is a state in which the variable display time of the first special symbol, the second special symbol, and the normal symbol is long (hereinafter also referred to as “non-short state”). Correspond.

  When a big win is won in the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery, the game ball enters the specific passage (the internal passage of the lower grand prize winning device 433) during the special game state that shifts based on the win. Depending on whether or not, the game state to be transferred after the special game state is different. If the game ball does not enter the specific passage during the special game state, the variation display time of the first special symbol lottery, the second special symbol, and the normal symbol is shorter than the non-short-time state (hereinafter referred to as the “short-time state”). And a gaming state (hereinafter also referred to as a “low-probability state”) in which the winning probability of the jackpot in the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery is the same as the normal gaming state (hereinafter also referred to as “low probability state”). In the following, it is also referred to as “time saving gaming state”. On the other hand, when a game ball enters the specific passage during the special game state, the game is in a short-time state and the winning probability of the big hit in the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery is higher than the normal game state. The game state (hereinafter also referred to as “probability game state”), which is a “high probability state” (hereinafter, also referred to as “high probability state”).

  The short-time gaming state is maintained until the total number of unit games related to the first special symbol and the second special symbol reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times), but thereafter returns to the normal gaming state. In addition, the probability variation gaming state is maintained until the total number of unit games related to the first special symbol and the second special symbol reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times), but thereafter returns to the normal gaming state.

  Note that the transition between the gaming state and the gaming state is not necessarily configured as described above. For example, the high probability state may be continued until the next big win, or the gaming state may be changed depending on other contents. At least one may be configured, a configuration in which a gaming state different from the above-described gaming states is further included, or a configuration in which the gaming state is shifted by a condition different from the above-described conditions may be employed.

  Next, the operation of the main devices of the game board 400 will be described in chronological order. In the main control board 920, winning random numbers, jackpot symbol random numbers, stop pattern random numbers, various variation pattern random numbers related to special symbols (common to the first special symbol and the second special symbol) are generated, and various game states are generated. When a game ball that has entered the left middle start winning device 431A, which is the starting device related to the first special symbol, is detected by the left middle start winning switch 441A (see FIG. 10), the first special symbol starts winning. At the time of starting winning the first special symbol, if the unit game right related to the first special symbol is not reserved up to the maximum number of times, the winning random number, jackpot symbol random number and stop pattern random number relating to the special symbol are acquired, It is stored in a predetermined area of the main control board 920 RAM.

  The unit game with random numbers acquired based on the start winning of the first special symbol is not in the special game state, and is not in the unit game related to the first special symbol or the second special symbol, but the first special symbol and the second special game. If the unit game right related to the symbol is not reserved, it starts immediately after storing the random numbers. In addition, even when the game is not in a special game state, when the unit game right related to the first special symbol or the second special symbol is reserved during the unit game related to the first special symbol or the second special symbol. The unit game based on the current start winning is started after the end of the unit game relating to all the special symbols (the first special symbol and the second special symbol) held before the current winning. If each random number is acquired based on the start winning of the first special symbol during the special gaming state, the unit game based on the random number is all of the units that were held before the current starting winning prize after the special gaming state. It starts after a unit game related to a special symbol.

  In addition, the unit game based on random numbers acquired based on the start winning of the second special symbol is not in the special game state and is not in the unit game related to the first special symbol or the second special symbol, but the first special symbol and the first special game If the unit game rights related to the 2 special symbols are not reserved, the game is started immediately after storing the random numbers. In addition, even when the game is not in a special game state, when the unit game right related to the first special symbol or the second special symbol is reserved during the unit game related to the first special symbol or the second special symbol. The unit game based on the current start winning is started after the end of the unit game relating to all the special symbols (the first special symbol and the second special symbol) held before the current winning. When each random number is acquired based on the start winning of the second special symbol during the special gaming state, the unit game based on the random number is all the games that were held before the current starting winning prize after the special gaming state. It starts after a unit game related to a special symbol.

  That is, the unit games related to the first special symbol and the second special symbol are executed in the order of the start winning prize. Note that it is not always necessary that the unit games related to the first special symbol and the second special symbol are executed in the order of the start winning prize, and one of the special symbols is executed in preference to the other special symbols. For example, the unit game based on the start winning of the second special symbol may be executed in preference to the unit game related to the first special symbol. In other words, during a unit game related to the first special symbol or the second special symbol, if the first special symbol starts winning, and then the second special symbol starts winning, the starting prize is later The configuration may be such that the unit game based on the start winning of the second special symbol is preferentially executed, or the two special symbols may not be alternative but may be varied simultaneously.

  In the case of winning a jackpot in the first special symbol lottery based on the start winning of the first special symbol, the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot winning in the first special symbol lottery is further based on the acquired jackpot symbol random number ( The type of jackpot symbol) is determined. The types of stop symbols correspond to the types of jackpots, for example, the number of rounds corresponding to the number of times the lower entry restriction mechanism 453 or the upper entry restriction mechanism 454 takes the entry allowable posture (for example, 6 rounds and 16 rounds), A plurality of types of jackpots are set corresponding to the type of gaming state such as a gaming state that shifts after the special gaming state (whether or not to shift to the probability variation gaming state), and a jackpot symbol is set for each type. In the first special symbol lottery, when a big win is not won, a lost symbol different from the big win symbol is set as a stop symbol.

  After the first special symbol lottery, based on the current gaming state, lottery result, stop pattern random number value, various variation pattern random number values, and the number of reserved unit rights related to the first special symbol, the first special symbol The design variation display time is determined, and the design variation pattern is selected. The variation pattern of the decorative symbol is roughly divided into a variation pattern (hereinafter, “reach” in which reach display is performed before the decorative symbol corresponding to the stop symbol (big hit symbol or lose symbol) related to the first special symbol is fixedly displayed. There is also a variation pattern in which reach display is not performed before a decorative symbol corresponding to the case where the stop symbol related to the first special symbol is a lost symbol is fixedly displayed.

  Note that “reach display” is a display that is confirmed and displayed in the left and right display areas in the decorative symbol display device 479 after the decorative symbol variable display in the unit game relating to the first special symbol or the second special symbol is started. The display result when the remaining decorative symbols that continue to change display in the center display area are confirmed and displayed in the center display area (ie This is a display that suggests to the player that there is a possibility of a big hit depending on the stop symbol).

  The reach display includes a normal reach that is a reach display with a relatively short variation display time (for example, approximately 25 seconds to approximately 30 seconds) and a reach display that has a variation display time longer than the normal reach (for example, approximately 60 seconds to approximately 180 seconds). Super Reach is included. Note that the types of reach display are not limited to the two types of normal reach and super reach, but may be three or more types including special reach that is a reach display with a variable display time longer than super reach.

  The reach variation pattern is provided for each type of reach display such as normal reach and super reach. Note that only one type of normal reach may be set, or a plurality of types having different variable display times may be set. When a plurality of types of normal reach are set, the reach variation pattern is provided for each type of normal reach. Similarly, only one type of super reach may be set, or a plurality of types having different variable display times may be set. When a plurality of types of super reach are set, the reach variation pattern is provided for each type of super reach.

  After the variation display time of the first special symbol is determined and the variation pattern of the decoration symbol is selected, the variation display of the first special symbol in the special symbol display device 471 related to the first special symbol and the decoration in the decoration symbol display device 479 The variation display (variation effect) of the symbol is started, the variation display with a constant pattern is continued over the variation display time in the first special symbol, and the variation pattern over the variation display time in the decorative symbol. Will continue to be displayed. Thereafter, as the variable display time elapses, the stop symbol related to the first special symbol is fixedly displayed, and the symbol corresponding to the stop symbol of the first special symbol is fixedly displayed as a decorative symbol. The final display of the first special symbol and the decorative symbol is continued for at least a predetermined time.

  When the stop symbol related to the first special symbol is a jackpot symbol, the gaming state shifts to the special gaming state after the final display of the first special symbol. In the special gaming state, the lower entry restriction mechanism 453 and the upper entry restriction mechanism 454 of the lower prize winning device 433 are allowed to enter the prescribed number of times in a predetermined order according to the type of the big hit. . When a predetermined number (for example, 8) of game balls are detected by the big winning switches 443 and 444 in each of the allowed entry postures in the lower entry restriction mechanism 453 and the upper entry restriction mechanism 454, or a predetermined maximum When the allowable entry time (for example, 29.5 seconds) has elapsed, the lower entry restriction mechanism 453 or the upper entry restriction mechanism 454 shifts to the entry prohibition posture. Thereafter, after a predetermined entry prohibition time has elapsed, either the lower entry restriction mechanism 453 or the upper entry restriction mechanism 454 returns to the entry allowable posture again. This entry restriction operation is repeated a predetermined number of times in a predetermined order corresponding to the type of jackpot.

  The lower entry restriction mechanism 453 and the upper entry restriction mechanism 454 are configured such that only one of them takes an entry allowable posture during the special game state, and after a predetermined waiting time has elapsed from the start of the special game state (after the opening period) ) Will shift to the first allowed entry posture. In addition, the special gaming state ends after a predetermined entry prohibition time has elapsed since the last return to the prohibition posture and a predetermined standby time has elapsed thereafter (after the ending period). After the end of the special gaming state, as described above, the state shifts to the short-time gaming state or the probability variation gaming state.

  In various gaming states, the game ball that has entered the right middle start winning device 431B or the right start winning device 432, which is the starting device related to the second special symbol, is the right middle start winning switch 441B (see FIG. 10) or the right start winning switch. When it is detected by 442 (refer to FIG. 10), the start special prize of the second special symbol is obtained. The control of the unit game based on the start winning of the second special symbol is executed in the same manner as the control related to the first special symbol described above. That is, if the right of the unit game related to the second special symbol is not reserved up to the maximum number of times when starting the second special symbol, each random number related to the special symbol is acquired and the unit game based on the start winning is executed. Is done. Also, stop symbol determination according to the second special symbol lottery, decoration symbol variation pattern selection, variation display execution, game state transition control, etc. are executed in the same manner as the control related to the first special symbol. Is done.

  In various gaming states, when a game ball that has entered the starter 436 is detected by the start switch 446, the winning random number for the normal symbol is acquired unless the right of the unit game related to the normal symbol is reserved up to the maximum number of times. Then, it is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM of the main control board 920. At this time, if the unit game related to the normal symbol is not in progress, the unit game related to the acquired normal symbol is started immediately after the storage. On the other hand, if the unit game related to the normal symbol is in progress, the unit game related to the acquired normal symbol is started after the unit game based on the right of the unit game related to the already obtained normal symbol.

  In the unit game related to the normal symbol, it is determined whether or not the winning game is won based on the value of the winning random number, and when winning, a predetermined winning symbol is set as the stop symbol. On the other hand, when the normal symbol lottery is not won, a predetermined lose symbol is set as the stop symbol. After the normal symbol lottery, the normal symbol display device 473 starts the variable display of the normal symbol. In the non-time-short state, the variable pattern is continuously displayed over a predetermined variable display time, and in the time-short state. The variable display by a fixed pattern is continued over a predetermined variable display time shorter than the non-time-short state. As the predetermined time corresponding to the gaming state elapses, the stop symbol related to the normal symbol is fixedly displayed over a certain period of time.

  When the stop symbol related to the normal symbol is a winning symbol, the right entry restriction mechanism 452 of the right start winning device 432 shifts to the entry allowable posture at least once after the normal symbol is confirmed and displayed. Specifically, when winning in a non-time-saving state (normal game state and special game state), the right start winning device 432 allows entry for a predetermined maximum entry allowable time (for example, approximately 0.1 seconds). In the case of winning in the time-short state (time-short game state and probability variable game state), the predetermined maximum entry allowable time (for example, approximately 4.8 seconds) is longer than that in the case where the right start winning device 432 is in the non-time-short state. ) Intermittently (for example, divided into three times) to allow the approach allowable posture. However, when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are detected by the right start winning switch 442, the right entry restriction mechanism 452 shifts to the entry prohibition posture without waiting for the maximum allowable entry time to elapse. In addition, even if the number of times of transition to the permissible approach posture has not reached the predetermined number of times, the operation of the right start winning device 432 in the unit game related to the current normal symbol ends.

  Next, the structure regarding the game play of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment will be described.

  In order to receive the second special symbol lottery (hereinafter, this lottery may be referred to as “right special symbol lottery”) based on the start winning to the right start prize winning device 432, first, the normal symbol lottery must be won. In addition, the game ball must enter the right start winning device 432 in a state where the right start winning device 432 is allowed to enter based on the winning. The winning probability of winning for the normal symbol in the normal gaming state is the same as the winning probability in the short-time gaming state, but the staying time (for example, approximately) 0.1 seconds) is set to be extremely short compared to the time spent in the short-time state (for example, approximately 4.8 seconds), so in the normal gaming state, the opportunity per unit time for receiving the right special symbol lottery is Per unit time for receiving the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery (hereinafter, these lotteries may be referred to as “center side special symbol lottery”) based on the start winning to the middle start winning device 431 It is much smaller than the opportunity. On the other hand, in the short-time state such as the short-time gaming state and the probability variation gaming state, the opportunity per unit time for receiving the right special symbol lottery is significantly larger than the opportunity per unit time for receiving the central special symbol lottery. ing.

  Accordingly, the player plays a game aiming at a transition to a probability-changing game state by winning a big hit in the central special symbol lottery and then allowing the game ball to enter the specific passage in the special game state thereafter. On the other hand, in the short-time gaming state and the probability variation gaming state, the game is played aiming to win a big win in the right special symbol lottery before each gaming state ends.

  Specifically, the game board 400 is provided with a central structure 420 in the center of the game area where the game balls flow down, and a game technique (left-handed game) in which the game balls flow down mainly from the left side of the central structure 420. Method) and a game method (right-handed game method) in which a game ball flows down mainly from the right side of the central structure 420 can be selectively performed. A player plays a game using the left-handed gaming method in the normal gaming state, and plays a game using the right-handed gaming method in the short-time gaming state and the probability-changing gaming state. Further, since the lower prize-winning device 433 and the upper prize-winning device 434 are arranged on the right side with respect to the central structure 420, the game is played by the right-handed game technique even in the special game state.

  Next, the rear block 104 will be described. 8 and 9 are a rear perspective view and a rear view showing the pachinko machine 100, respectively. In FIG. 8, the outer frame 101 is omitted for easy understanding.

  As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the rear block 104 is configured by attaching other members and devices to the base 501. By connecting the base body 501 and the intermediate block 103 by the rear block support mechanisms 136 and 137, the rear block 104 is supported so as to be openable and closable with respect to the intermediate block 103.

  The rear block 104 has a game ball tank 510 serving as a ball storage unit for storing game balls, and rectifies the game balls (for example, in one row) continuously on the downstream side of the game ball tank 510 and aligns them in one row. A tank rail 520 as a ball alignment portion, a case rail 530 as a ball guiding portion for guiding a game ball flowing in from the tank rail 520 on the downstream side of the tank rail 520, and a game ball payout on the downstream side of the case rail 530 A payout device 540 that lends out game balls, and guidance as a ball guide unit that guides game balls that have flowed out of the payout device 540 downstream of the payout device 540 to a guide passage (not shown) formed in the base 501. A member 550, a payout control device 560 for controlling the payout of game balls and the lending of game balls by the payout device 540, and external power A function as a power supply means for converting and outputting power of a predetermined voltage required for various types of devices and the like, and a game ball ejection based on a launch operation on the launch operation device 250 are controlled in cooperation with the main control board 920. A power supply / launch control device 570 having a function as a launch control means, a payout control device 560, a game ball lending device 290 (see FIG. 1), and a card unit (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 100 And a relay device 950 that relays signals between them.

  The base body 501 is integrally formed of resin (for example, ABS resin), and includes a base portion 502 corresponding to the front side portion and a protective cover portion 503 positioned behind the base portion 502. The upper portion of the base portion 502 is formed in a substantially frame shape along the outer shape of the rear block 104, and the lower portion is formed in a substantially flat shape having a thickness in the front-rear direction. It has a function as a mounted part.

  The protective cover portion 503 is formed in a substantially plate shape having a thickness in the front-rear direction. The protective cover 503 is not shaped to cover the entire back surface of the intermediate block 103, but a part of the back surface of the intermediate block 103 that requires frequent inspection and confirmation, such as a part of the main controller 370, is attached to the back surface of the pachinko machine 100. It is set to a size that forms a window portion for exposure to the window. A large number of air holes 503 </ b> A having a function of improving the heat dissipation of heat generation in the main control device 370 and the sub control device 390 are formed on the back surface of the protective cover portion 503.

  The game ball tank 510 is a horizontally long box-shaped container that opens upward, and game balls supplied from a ball circulation device (not shown) of the island facility are sequentially supplied to one end side in the longitudinal direction. An opening (not shown) is formed on one end side in the longitudinal direction different from the side where the game ball is supplied in the game ball tank 510. The bottom surface of the game ball tank 510 is gently inclined in the longitudinal direction, and the game ball supplied to the game ball tank 510 moves to the opening side by its own weight. Further, the bottom surface of the game ball tank 510 is inclined in a direction (front-rear direction) perpendicular to the longitudinal direction as compared with the longitudinal direction, and guides the game ball to the side where the opening is provided (for example, the front side). . Further, a metal antistatic plate (not shown) is attached to the bottom surface of the game ball tank 510 so as to overlap the game ball tank 510, and the antistatic plate is connected to the ground potential so that the inside of the game ball tank 510 and The static electricity of the game ball on the downstream side is removed.

  The tank rail 520 is attached to the side where the opening of the game ball tank 510 is formed, and the game ball flows through the opening of the game ball tank 510. The tank rail 520 gradually increases in height as a passage forming member 521 that forms a passage for a substantially bowl-shaped gaming ball having a width through which game balls pass in a row, and an upper surface of the passage formed by the passage forming member 521. And a rectifying member 522 that rectifies the game balls flowing down the passage from the height of the top and bottom to the first level gradually. The passage formed by the tank rail 520 is gently inclined toward the downstream side, and guides the game ball to the side opposite to the game ball tank 510.

  The case rail 530 is formed in a vertically long shape so as to continue to the lower side of the tank rail 520, and a game ball from the tank rail 520 flows in. The case rail 530 continues downward while curving left and right so that game balls do not flow vigorously. In addition, a ball break detector 539 for detecting a ball break is provided in the middle portion of the ball path of the case rail 530. The ball breakage detection unit 539 includes a storage ball switch 591 (see FIG. 10). The storage ball switch 591 causes ball clogging or the like on the case rail 530 or the upstream side thereof, and a game ball is placed in the case rail 530. Detects out-of-ball condition that is not replenished normally.

  The payout device 540 includes a payout mechanism for sending out the game ball, a payout motor 542 (see FIG. 10) as a driving means for driving the payout mechanism, and a payout counting switch 592 (see FIG. 10). In accordance with the operation of the payout motor 542 based on the control by the payout control device 560, the game balls stored in the ball passage are released downstream. The passage of the released game ball through the ball passage is detected by a payout counting switch 592, whereby the payout control device 560 (payout control board 930) counts the number of payout of game balls.

  As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the payout control device 560 and the power supply / launch control device 570 are attached so as to overlap the lower back surface of the base portion 502 of the base body 501 so as to be positioned at the lower back side of the rear block 104. It has been. The rear block 104 including the payout control device 560 and the power supply / launch control device 570 can be continuously used even when the game board 400 is replaced with another game board in a model change or the like.

  The payout control device 560 includes a payout control board 930 (see FIG. 10) and a board case that houses the payout control board 930, and the payout control board 930 does not leave any trace of opening, like the main control board 920. The substrate case is sealed so that it cannot be opened.

  The power / fire control device 570 includes a power / fire control board 900 (see FIG. 10) and a board case that houses the power / fire control board 900. The power / fire control board 900 is the same as the main control board 920. Are accommodated in a sealed substrate case.

<Electrical configuration>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. FIG. 10 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 100. As shown in FIG. 10, the pachinko machine 100 includes control circuit devices such as a power supply / launch control board 900, a power supply monitoring board 910, a main control board 920, a payout control board 930, and a sub control board 940. In FIG. 10, a relay circuit device that only relays various signals is omitted. Hereinafter, these main control circuit devices will be individually described in detail.

  The power supply / launch control board 900 includes a power supply unit 901 that supplies power of a predetermined voltage to each part of the pachinko machine 100 via a power supply path (broken line in the figure), and a launching device according to the operation of the launching operation device 250. A launch control unit 902 that controls the driving of 330, and a signal relay unit 903 that relays an initialization signal from the initialization switch 907 and a ball overflow signal from the ball overflow switch 249.

  The power supply unit 901 takes in external power (for example, AC 24 volts) supplied from the outside and converts it into internal power (for example, DC 24 volts), and generates various types of power from the internal power. The power generated by the power supply unit 901 is power of driving voltage (for example, DC 12 volts) for driving devices such as various solenoids and various motors, drives various switches, and executes control processing. Power of control voltage (for example, DC 5 volts) for backup, power of backup voltage for holding the contents of the RAM of the main control board 920, and the like.

  The power supply unit 901 supplies various power generated from the internal power to the power supply monitoring board 910, the main control board 920, the payout control board 930, the sub control board 940, and the like. Specifically, internal power, driving voltage, control voltage, and backup voltage power are supplied to the power monitoring board 910. The main control board 920 is supplied with driving voltage, control voltage, and backup voltage power, and these powers are supplied via the power supply monitoring unit 911 of the power supply monitoring board 910. The payout control board 930 is supplied with driving voltage and control voltage power. The sub-control board 940 is supplied with driving voltage and control voltage power. The firing control unit 902 and the signal relay unit 903 are supplied with driving voltage and control voltage power.

  A power switch 909 is connected to the power supply unit 901. When the power switch 909 is in an off state, the external power capture is stopped. It is to be noted that the power switch 909 is turned off or a power plug (not shown) connected to the power supply unit 901 via the power switch 909 is removed from an external power supply outlet (not shown). A state where the supply of power to the inside of the machine 100 is stopped and a state where the supply of external power itself is stopped are collectively referred to as a “power failure state”.

  The power supply unit 901 is configured to normally output the control voltage power over a predetermined period even after the transition to the power failure state. As a result, the main control board 920 can save the state and finish the control so that the current control state can be restored.

  The firing control unit 902 controls the driving of the ball feed solenoid 332 and the firing solenoid 334 of the launching device 330 in cooperation with the main control board 920. The ball feed solenoid 332 and the firing solenoid 334 are permitted to operate when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, it is detected that the player is touching the firing handle 252 (see FIG. 1) based on a contact sensor signal from the contact sensor 254, and a launch stop switch 255 for stopping the launch is provided. On the condition that it is not operated, the firing control unit 902 outputs a firing permission signal in an on state to the main control board 920. The main control board 920 outputs a firing solenoid control signal and a ball feed solenoid control signal to the firing control unit 902 based on the firing permission signal and the firing abnormality signal. The firing control unit 902 activates the ball feed solenoid 332 based on the ball feed control signal in the on state, and activates the launch solenoid 334 based on the reception of the launch solenoid control signal in the on state and the resistance value of the variable resistor 253. Let As a result, the game balls are sequentially fired from the launching device 330 with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor 253 (the rotational operation amount of the firing handle 252).

  The signal relay unit 903 outputs an on-state initialization signal to the main control board 920 when the initialization switch 907 is pressed. In the main control board 920, the storage information stored in the RAM of the main control board 920 is initialized in response to the reception of the ON state initialization signal. The initialization switch 907 is not necessarily configured to output a signal to the main control board 920 via the signal relay unit 903. For example, the initialization switch 907 is directly mounted on the main control board 920. The initialization switch 907 may be accommodated in the substrate case 371, and thus illegal signal input targeting a section in which a signal is transmitted can be suppressed.

  Further, when the ball overflow switch 249 detects a game ball, the signal relay unit 903 outputs an on-state ball overflow signal to the main control board 920. The main control board 920 outputs a low-speed payout signal to the payout control board 930 based on the detection of the ball overflow signal in the ON state, and the payout control board 930 that has received the low-speed payout signal receives the rotation speed of the payout motor 542 (payout). The game ball payout speed from the device 540 is reduced. The main control board 920 outputs a high-speed payout signal to the payout control board 930 based on the detection of the ball overflow signal in the off state, and the payout control board 930 that has received the high-speed payout signal controls the rotation speed of the payout motor 542. Make it faster.

  The power monitoring board 910 is a power monitoring section 911 that monitors the power supply status from the power / fire control board 900, and supplies power and transmits various signals between the power / fire control board 900 and the main control board 920. And a signal relay unit 912 for relaying. The power monitoring unit 911 also outputs a power failure signal to the main control board 920 in response to the transition to the power failure state, and monitors the voltage of 24 VDC which is the maximum voltage output from the power source unit 901. When the state where the voltage is less than 22 volts continues for a predetermined time, it is determined that the state is a power failure, and an on-state power failure signal is output to the main control board 920. The main control board 920 recognizes the transition to the power failure state by receiving the power failure signal in the on state.

  The main control board 920 comprehensively controls the operation of the pachinko machine 100. On the main control board 920, an MPU (not shown) as a one-chip microcomputer is mounted. The MPU includes a CPU (not shown) as an arithmetic processing unit, a ROM (not shown) storing various control programs and fixed data executed by the CPU, and various data temporarily during execution of the control program. And a RAM (not shown) for storing and the like. In addition, various circuits such as a timer circuit (not shown), a counter circuit (not shown), a clock generation circuit (not shown), a signal transmission / reception circuit (not shown) are mounted on the main control board 920. Yes. The RAM of the main control board 920 is configured to be able to maintain (back up) internal data by supplying a backup voltage from the power / fire control board 900 even after the transition to the power failure state.

  The payout control board 930 controls a game ball payout operation by the payout apparatus 540 according to an instruction from the main control board 920 and a game ball lending operation by the payout apparatus 540 according to an operation of the game ball lending apparatus 290. As with the main control board 920, the payout control board 930 is an MPU (not shown) as a one-chip microcomputer including a CPU (not shown), ROM (not shown), and RAM (not shown), a timer circuit. Various circuits such as (not shown), a counter circuit (not shown), a clock generation circuit (not shown), a signal transmission / reception circuit (not shown) are mounted.

  The payout control board 930 is equipped with an input / output port as a connection means for connecting to other devices so as to be able to communicate information. For example, the main control board 920 and the relay device 950 can perform bidirectional information input / output communication. The open / close detection switches 108 and 109, the storage ball switch 591 and the payout counting switch 592 are connected so that only information input communication in only one direction is possible, and the payout motor 542 has information in only one direction. Only output communication is possible. Note that the RAM of the payout control board 930 may be configured to have a backup function that allows internal data to be maintained over a certain period in a power failure state, like the RAM of the main control board 920, or the RAM of the main control board 920. Unlike the case, the internal data may not be maintained in a power failure state.

  The sub control board 940 controls operations of various rendering devices, various light emitting devices, various acoustic devices, and the like based on instructions from the main control board 920. The sub-control board 940 is equipped with an input / output port as a connection means for connecting to other devices so as to be able to perform information communication. The input operation device 260 is connected to be capable of information communication in both directions, and the decorative symbol display device 479 is connected to be capable of only one-way information output communication.

<Various control processes>
Next, various control processes executed by the main control board 920 will be described. The control processing in the main control board 920 can be broadly divided into main processing that is started upon recovery from a power failure state, and periodic execution (in this embodiment, with a cycle of 2 ms (milliseconds)). Timer interrupt processing.

  First, the main process executed by the main control board 920 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing a main process of the main control board 920 (abbreviated as “main control main process” in FIG. 11).

  In the main process of the main control board 920, first, a series of control start processes (program start process S1001 to random number initial setting process S1019) for starting up the main control board 920 and initializing various information are executed only once. After that, the interrupt prohibition processing S1020 for prohibiting the interrupt, the winning random number initial value counter (partial area of the RAM), the jackpot symbol random number initial value counter (partial area of the RAM) and the normal symbol related to the special symbol Random initial value update processing S1021 for updating the value of the winning random number initial value counter (part of the RAM), and a first variation type counter for determining a variation display time (variation time), a variation pattern, etc. Fluctuation counter update processing S1022 for updating the value of the fourth variation type counter (part of the RAM), and interrupts are permitted. And write permission process S1023 is repeatedly executed. When a timer interrupt request is generated before the interrupt permission process S1023, the timer interrupt process is executed immediately after the interrupt permission process S1023.

  In a series of control start processes, a program start process S1001 for setting an initial value to a stack pointer (part of the RAM) for controlling the execution of a program, an interrupt mode setting process S1002 for setting an interrupt mode, and a payout control board A stand-by standby process S1003 that waits for a predetermined time until 930, the sub-control board 940, and the like stand up is executed.

  After start-up standby process S1003, determination process S1004 of the output state of the initialization signal from initialization switch 907 of power supply / emission control board 900, determination process S1005 of the value of power failure information (part of RAM), storage Information storage state determination processing S1007 is performed, and it is determined based on these determination results whether or not to save the stored information in the RAM. Here, the stored information is information necessary for returning to the state of the game before the power failure, and corresponds to a part of the RAM that has been updated according to the progress of the game before the power failure. The counter value related to the unit game in the middle, the counter value stored by the start winning, and the like are exemplified.

  The storage state of the stored information is determined as follows. First, a checksum value for a storage area in a predetermined range of the RAM is calculated (checksum calculation process S1006), and the current checksum value and a power failure monitoring process S1202 (see FIG. 12) accompanying the transition to the previous power failure state. It is determined whether or not the exclusive OR with the RAM determination value that is the 2's complement of the checksum value calculated in (0) is “0” (determination processing S1007), and thereby the current checksum value and It is determined whether or not the checksum value at the time of transition to the power failure state is the same.

  When the initialization signal is in the on state (S1004: Y), when the power failure information is not a predetermined power failure value indicating that the stored information is stored and terminated when the transition to the power failure state is completed (S1005: N), or saved If the information is not normally held (S1007: N), a RAM clear process S1008 for erasing the stored information in the RAM is executed. After it is determined that the stored information is normally held (S1007: Y), or after the RAM clear process S1008 is executed, hardware for initializing various devices connected to the main control board 920 A hardware initialization process S1009 is executed.

  After the hardware initialization process S1009, a determination process S1010 of whether or not the power failure information is a power failure value is executed. When the power failure information is a power failure value (S1010: N), a RAM recovery setting process S1011 for initial setting of various types of information including a return of stored information and a recovery command indicating completion of the setting are set (return command). Output processing S1012). By returning the stored information in the RAM return setting process S1011, the control state of the main control board 920 is returned to the control state immediately before the transition to the previous power failure state.

  On the other hand, when the power failure information is not a power failure value (S1010: Y), various types of information are initialized without returning the retained information (RAM initial setting processing S1013), and an initialization command indicating the completion of the setting is output. (Initialization command output processing S1014).

  In the RAM recovery setting process S1011 and the RAM initial setting process S1013, the power failure information is set to a predetermined energization value different from the power failure value, and various error states such as fraud detection errors immediately before the transition to the previous power failure state. Even if has occurred, all those error states are cleared. Further, either the return command or the initialization command is output from the main control board 920 to both the payout control board 930 and the sub control board 940, and the payout control board 930 and the sub control board 940 that have received the return command or the initialization command. In each of these, a predetermined initialization process is executed.

  After the initial setting of the RAM according to the situation at the time of start-up (determination process S1004 to initialization command output process S1014), if the condition device is operating at the time of transition to the previous power failure state, the special gaming state is set. Preparation for returning is performed (special gaming state return preparation processing S1015). Specifically, in the special game state return preparation process S1015, the operating states of the condition device and the accessory continuous operation device are determined, and a process corresponding to the game situation in the power failure state is executed in the sub-control board 940. The

  After the special game state return preparation process S1015, it is determined whether or not the time-short state flag is set to determine whether it is a time-short state or a non-time-short state (determination process S1016). In the case (S1016: Y), a time reduction command is output (time reduction command output processing S1017). On the other hand, if it is in the non-time-short state (S1016: N), a non-time-short command is output (non-time-short command output processing S1018). Thereafter, the value of the winning random number counter (part of the RAM) related to the special symbol is initialized (random number initial setting process S1019).

  Next, timer interrupt processing executed by the main control board 920 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing (abbreviated as “main control interrupt processing” in the figure) executed by the main control board 920.

  In the timer interrupt process of the main control board 920, first, an interrupt start process S1201 for starting a timer interrupt is executed. Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the interrupt control register. As a result, interrupts other than this timer interrupt are prohibited. Thereafter, a power failure monitoring process S1202 to an external information output process S1221 related to substantial control such as game progress control of the pachinko machine 100 and monitoring of various sensors are sequentially executed. However, when the game progress is stopped based on various fraud detections (S1207: Y), the control signal output process S1208 to the external information output process S1221 are not executed. Finally, an interrupt permission process S1222 that permits the next timer interrupt is executed, and the current timer interrupt process ends. In the following, various main processes will be described individually.

  In the power failure monitoring process S1202, the value of the power failure information (part of the RAM) is updated based on the output state of the power failure signal output from the power monitoring unit 911 of the power monitoring board 910. Specifically, the output state of the power failure signal is confirmed three times, and when the on state is detected at all three times, it is determined that the power failure state is present. If it is not determined in this determination that the power is out, the power outage information is maintained at the energization value.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the power failure monitoring process S1202 that the power is out, the following process is executed. First, the value of the power failure information is changed from the energization value set in the RAM recovery setting process S1011 or the RAM initial setting process S1013 (see FIG. 11) to a predetermined power failure value. Also, a checksum value for a storage area in a predetermined range of the RAM is calculated, and the 2's complement of the checksum value is set as the RAM determination value. As a result, the pachinko machine 100 enters an infinite loop that does not perform substantial control such as game progress or monitoring of various sensors, and the state of the RAM after the RAM determination value is set is held based on the backup power. The Since the output state of the power failure signal is confirmed three times, each process of timer interruption is executed twice after the first reception of the power failure signal is detected.

  In the random number update process S1203, the winning random number counter related to the special symbol, the big hit symbol random number counter, the stop pattern selection counter, and the winning random number counter related to the normal symbol are updated. Specifically, when the value of the winning random number counter related to the special symbol is a value different from the specified maximum value (for example, “576”), the value is changed by “1” larger than the current value, and the special symbol is changed. When the value of the winning random number counter relating to is the specified maximum value, it is changed to the specified minimum value (“0”). However, if the value after the change is the same as the cyclic initial value for the winning random number counter related to the special symbol, the value of the winning random number counter related to the special symbol is the same as the winning random number initial value counter related to the special symbol. The cyclic initial value is also set to the same value as the winning random number initial value counter.

  The jackpot symbol random number counter, the stop pattern selection counter, and the winning random number counter related to the normal symbol are also updated in the same manner as the winning random number counter related to the special symbol. However, as the update range determined by the specified maximum value and specified minimum value of each counter, a unique value is set for each counter, and a plurality of counters are updated asynchronously. Is referred to an initial value counter unique to each counter. For example, the winning random number counter related to the special symbol and the winning random number initial value counter related to the special symbol have the same value range, and the big hit symbol random number counter and the big hit symbol random number initial value counter have the same value range, The winning random number counter related to the normal symbol and the winning random number initial value counter related to the normal symbol have the same value range.

  In the random number initial value update process S1204, the winning random number initial value counter related to the special symbol, the big hit symbol random number initial value counter, and the winning random number initial value counter related to the normal symbol are updated. Specifically, if the value of the winning random number initial value counter related to the special symbol is different from the specified maximum value (for example, “576”), the value is changed to a value “1” larger than the current value, When the value of the winning random number initial value counter related to the symbol is the specified maximum value, it is changed to the specified minimum value (“0”). The initial random number counter for the special symbol and the initial random number counter for the normal symbol are also the initial random numbers for the special symbol, except that the specified maximum value and the specified minimum value are unique to those counters. It is updated in the same way as the value counter.

  In the variation counter update process S1205, the values of the first variation type counter to the fourth variation type counter for determining the variation display time (variation time), the variation pattern, and the like are updated. Specifically, when the value of the first variation type counter is a value different from a specified maximum value (for example, “187”), the value is changed to a value that is larger by “1” than the current value, and the first variation When the value of the type counter is the specified maximum value, it is changed to the specified minimum value (“0”). The second variation type counter to the fourth variation type counter are also updated in the same manner as the first variation type counter except that the specified maximum value and the specified minimum value are values unique to those counters. Is done.

  Note that each winning random number counter, jackpot symbol random number counter, stop pattern selection counter and each variation type counter related to special symbols and normal symbols are not necessarily configured as described above, and at least a part of the counter is configured as another configuration. For example, it may be configured to update from a constant initial value without using an initial value counter, or may be configured by a random number generating IC without using a program and refer to a value as necessary. .

  In the game stop determination process S1206, when the fraud detection information is a fraud detection value, it is updated to the game stop value and various information for stopping the progress of the game is set. On the other hand, if the fraud detection information is not a fraud detection value or if it is already a game stop value, the game stop determination process S1206 ends without executing each process for stopping the game progress. The fraud detection information is set to a fraud detection value when occurrence of various frauds is detected in the fraud detection processing S1211. In the determination process S1207, whether or not the game is stopped is determined based on whether or not the fraud detection information is a game stop value.

  In the control signal output process S1208, based on the control data stored in the output buffer, the special symbol display device 471 related to the first special symbol, the special symbol display device 472 related to the second special symbol, and the normal symbol related A signal for controlling various notification devices such as the normal symbol display device 473 is output. Based on the control data stored in the output buffer, various actuators such as a ball feed solenoid 332, a firing solenoid 334, a right entry restriction solenoid 462, a lower entry restriction solenoid 463, an upper entry restriction solenoid 464, and a switching solenoid 465 are provided. A control signal is output.

  In the switch reading process S1209, the middle start winning switch 441A, 441B, the right starting winning switch 442, the lower large winning switch 443, the upper large winning switch 444, the combination operation switch 445, the starting switch 446, the non-specific passage switch 447, the specific The signal state from each of the passage switch 448 and the general winning switches 449A and 449B is read, and a change in the detection state of the game ball by various switches is detected.

  Specifically, in the switch reading process S1209, signal states from various switches are read into the input buffer (part of the RAM) twice at predetermined time intervals, and signals from the various switches are read. Each time, the signal state read for the first time (hereinafter abbreviated as “first signal state”) and the signal state read for the second time (hereinafter abbreviated as “second signal state”) Based on the detection state detected by the previous timer interrupt (hereinafter abbreviated as “previous detection state”), changes in the detection state of various switches are detected. For each switch, when the previous detection state is the off state, the first signal state is the on state, and when the second signal state is the on state, it is determined that the switch is on. Thus, a detection flag (a partial area of the RAM) corresponding to the type of switch is set. As described in the power failure monitoring process S1202, even if the power supply is stopped, each process of the timer interrupt is executed twice, so that the various switches are turned on immediately after the power supply is stopped. Even when it is started, detection flags of various switches can be set accurately.

  In the timer update process S1210, various timers (predetermined areas of the RAM) used for special symbol and normal symbol variation display, control of each gaming state, fraud monitoring, and the like are updated.

  In the fraud detection process S1211, an illegal act such as forcibly entering a game ball into various winning devices or forcibly operating various winning devices is detected. Specifically, the right start winning device 432, the lower grand prize winning device 433, and the upper grand prize winning device 434 are forced to move into the allowable approaching posture, and the game ball is guided to a specific passage of the lower major prize winning device 433 by vibration. , The right start winning device 432 by radio waves, the lower winning device 433 and the upper winning device 434 are forcibly triggered, the game balls are guided to various winning devices by magnetic attraction, the left middle starting winning device 431A, Occurrence of a situation where there is a high possibility that an illegal act such as guiding a game ball at an abnormal timing to the right middle start winning device 431B, the right start winning device 432, the lower large winning device 433, and the upper large winning device 434 occurs. Is detected.

  In the winning detection response process S1212, control based on detection of a game ball by various switches provided in the game board 400 is executed. Specifically, when the middle start winning switch detection flag is set based on the detection of the game ball by the left middle starting winning switch 441A (see FIG. 10) and the right middle start winning switch 441B (see FIG. 10). The middle start winning counter (a predetermined area in the RAM) and the first payout counter (a predetermined area in the RAM) are updated. Further, when the right start winning switch detection flag is set based on the detection of the game ball by the right start winning switch 442 (see FIG. 10), the first payout counter is updated. Further, when the lower prize winning switch detection flag is set based on the detection of the game ball by the lower prize winning switch 443 (see FIG. 10), or when the game ball is detected by the upper prize winning switch 444 (see FIG. 10). If the upper prize winning switch detection flag is set on the basis, the big prize counter (predetermined area of the RAM) and the second payout counter (predetermined area of the RAM) are updated.

  In the launch control process S1213, launch related information for controlling the launch of the game ball by the launch device 330 is updated. Specifically, the operation flag of the ball feed solenoid 332 that drives the ball feed mechanism 331 and the operation flag of the firing solenoid 334 that drives the firing mechanism 333 are updated.

  In the input signal monitoring process S1214, based on the output state of the signal from the open / close detection switch 108 (see FIG. 10) via the payout control board 930, an intermediate block is provided for the outer frame 101 (see FIGS. 1 and 2). It is detected whether 103 (refer FIG.1 and FIG.2) is closed. Further, based on the output state of the signal from the open / close detection switch 109 via the payout control board 930 (see FIG. 10), the front block 102 (see FIGS. 2 and 3) with respect to the intermediate block 103 (see FIGS. 2 and 3). 3) is detected.

  In the payout state monitoring process S1215, information indicating the payout control state output from the payout control board 930 is monitored, and various payout state commands corresponding to the payout control state are set as necessary. The sub-control board 940 that has received the payout state command causes the decorative symbol display device 479, the upper left acoustic device 281 and the upper right acoustic device 282 to perform notification according to the type of the payout state command.

  In the payout signal output process S1216, various prize ball commands are set based on the values of the first payout counter and the second payout counter as necessary, and output to the payout control board 930. The first payout counter and the second payout counter are updated according to the setting of the prize ball command. For example, the first payout counter is incremented by 1 each time a game ball corresponding to one winning is detected, and decremented by 1 each time a winning ball command based on the winning is set. Each time the payout control board 930 executes control for paying out the number of game balls (for example, 3) corresponding to the winning (specifically, shortly before the payout is completed), the main control board 920 is awarded. In a situation where a ball command is requested and the payout of a prize ball is continuing, a further prize ball command is output from the main control board 920. The second payout counter is a counter that is updated in response to a winning (for example, 13) that has a different number of prize balls than the first payout counter, and outputs a prize ball command based on the value of the second payout counter. When the 930 is received, the payout control board 930 executes control for paying out a number of game balls corresponding to the prize ball command.

  In the special symbol-related process S1217, control for holding the right of the unit game related to the first special symbol and control of the unit game related to the first special symbol are executed. Specifically, operation control of the special symbol hold display device 476 related to the first special symbol is executed in the hold control of the unit game right related to the first special symbol. In addition, in the control of the unit game related to the first special symbol, the operation control of the special symbol display device 471 related to the first special symbol is executed, and if the big win is won in the first special symbol lottery, Operation control of 433 and the top prize winning device 434 is further executed.

  Further, in the unit game related to the first special symbol, each piece of information for causing the decorative symbol display device 479 to display the decorative symbol variation display and the fixed display is selected. For example, in the unit game related to the first special symbol, the variation pattern of the variation display of the decoration symbol executed by the decoration symbol display device 479 is the current game state, lottery result, stop pattern random number value, various variation pattern random number The value is selected based on the number of times the unit game right related to the first special symbol is reserved.

  Further, in the special symbol related process S1217, the unit game right holding control related to the second special symbol and the unit game control related to the second special symbol are executed. Specifically, the operation control of the special symbol hold display device 477 related to the second special symbol is executed in the hold control of the right of the unit game related to the second special symbol. In addition, in the control of the unit game related to the second special symbol, the operation control of the special symbol display device 472 related to the second special symbol is executed, and when the big win is won in the second special symbol lottery, Operation control of 433 and the top prize winning device 434 is further executed.

  Further, in the unit game related to the second special symbol, each piece of information for causing the decorative symbol display device 479 to display the decorative symbol variation display and the fixed display is selected. For example, in the unit game related to the second special symbol, the variation pattern of the variation display of the decoration symbol executed by the decoration symbol display device 479 is the current gaming state, lottery result, stop pattern random number value, various variation pattern random number It is selected based on the value and the number of holdings of the unit game right related to the second special symbol.

  In the normal symbol related process S1218, the unit game right holding control related to the normal symbol and the unit game control related to the normal symbol are executed. Specifically, the operation control of the normal symbol hold display device 478 is executed in the hold control of the right of the unit game related to the normal symbol. Further, in the control of the unit game related to the normal symbol, the operation control of the normal symbol display device 473 related to the normal symbol is executed, and when the normal symbol lottery is won, the operation control of the right start winning device 432 is further executed. .

  In the display control processing S1219, the special symbol display device 471 related to the first special symbol, the special symbol display device 472 related to the second special symbol, the special symbol hold display device 476 related to the first special symbol in the special symbol related processing S1217, and Based on various information updated to control the operation of the special symbol hold display device 477 related to the second special symbol, output data for specifically operating these devices is synthesized. The synthesized output data is output to each device in the control signal output process S1208 based on the next timer interrupt.

  Also, in the display control process S1219, various commands corresponding to information for displaying on the decorative symbol display device 479 the decorative symbol variable display and final display selected in the special symbol related processing S1217 are set. For example, a variation pattern command corresponding to the variation pattern selected in the special symbol related process S1217 is set. The set command is output to the sub control board 940 in the control signal output process S1208 based on the next timer interrupt. The sub control board 940 controls the decorative symbol display device 479 based on the command received from the main control board 920.

  In the motor control process S1220, operation control of various motors is executed. In the external information output process S1221, output data to be output to an external device such as a data display device (not shown) or a management device (not shown) electrically connected to the pachinko machine 100 is set.

<Suggested effects appearing in the decorative display of decorative patterns>
In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the decorative symbol variation display in the decorative symbol display device 479 corresponding to the special symbol variation display in the special symbol display device 471 or the special symbol display device 472 is a predetermined reach display (for example, In the case of a mode that includes (super reach), it is configured such that a predetermined suggestive effect can be displayed by pressing the pressing operation device 261.

  With reference to FIG. 13 to FIG. 16, the suggestive effect that appears in the decorative symbol variation display will be described. FIG. 13 is a time chart for explaining the time when the suggestive effect appears in the decorative symbol variation display. FIG. 13 illustrates a variable display including a super reach with a variable display time of 90 seconds as an example of a variable display in which a suggestive effect can appear. 14 to 16 are schematic diagrams showing screen transitions of the decorative symbol display device 479 along the time chart of FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 13, at the time ts, when the variation display of the decoration symbol synchronized with the variation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is started in the decoration symbol display device 479, each symbol constituting the decoration symbol is displayed. Scrolling starts. The display data constituting the decorative symbol variation display is prepared in association with each variation pattern command that the sub control board 940 can receive from the main control board 920 in the ROM (not shown) of the sub control board 940. Has been.

  In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the decorative symbols are a left column symbol (hereinafter also referred to as “left symbol”), a right column symbol (hereinafter also referred to as “right symbol”), and a left symbol. It consists of three rows of symbols with symbols between the right symbols (hereinafter also referred to as “middle symbols”). In the example shown in FIG. 13, it is assumed that the decorative display of the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol that have stopped at “6”, “5”, and “3”, respectively, has started.

  After a predetermined time (for example, 4 seconds) after the decorative symbol variation display is started at time ts, the first operable period is started (time t1). The first operable period started at time t1 ends after a predetermined time (for example, after 3 seconds) from the start (time t2). The first operable period from time t1 to time t2 is a period during which the player can perform a pressing operation on the pressing operation device 261. Note that the time t2 is not necessarily a predetermined time after the start of the first operable period, and the first operable period ends at the timing when the player performs a pressing operation on the pressing operation device 261. You may make it display corresponding to the operation, and also in other operation possible periods explained below, it ends each operation possible period at the timing of pushing operation, and displays the production corresponding to the operation. You may start.

  When the first operable period starts at time t1, as shown in FIG. 14, the decorative symbol display device 479 that displays the decorative symbols in a variable manner can be pushed into the pressing operation device 261 by the player. An image 601 to be recalled, and a character 602 “Enemy has come!” Are displayed as a comment on the effect urging the pressing operation to the pressing operation device 261.

  Each display data related to the display of the image 601 and the characters 602 is prepared in a ROM (not shown) of the sub-control board 940, and the start time (that is, time) of the first operable period is controlled by the control of the sub-control board 940. It is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479 at t1) and erased at the end time of the period (ie, time t2).

When the player does not perform the pressing operation on the pressing operation device 261 in the first operable period, as shown in FIG. 13, a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) after the decorative symbol variation display is started at the time ts. At the timing of (after), the left symbol of the decorative symbols being displayed in a variable manner stops (time t4).
On the other hand, when the player performs a pressing operation on the pressing operation device 261 in the first operable period, when the first operable period ends at time t2, the first special effect that is one of the suggested effects is started. . As the first special effect, as shown in FIG. 14, three types of pattern 1A, pattern 1B, and pattern 1C are prepared, and the first of one pattern selected from these three types is prepared. The special effect is started at time t2 by the control of the sub control board 940.

  The pattern 1A is a pattern including a character 611A “XX army has come!” And a red frame (red frame) 612A that surrounds the screen of the decorative symbol display device 479. The pattern 1B is a pattern including a character 611B “The bandit has come!” And a yellow frame (yellow frame) 612B surrounding the periphery of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 479. The pattern 1 </ b> C is a pattern including a character 611 </ b> C “cat came!” And a blue frame (blue frame) 612 </ b> C surrounding the decorative design display device 479. Each display data related to the display of the pattern 1A, the pattern 1B, and the pattern 1C is prepared in a ROM (not shown) of the sub-control board 940. The combination of the character and the frame need not be set to be the same every time, and the character and the frame may be selected by lottery.

  The lottery for selecting which of the pattern 1A, the pattern 1B, or the pattern 1C is selected as the first special effect (hereinafter also referred to as “first special effect lottery”) is performed by the control of the sub-control board 940. Specifically, in the first special effect lottery, the sub control board 940 acquires the value of the first special effect selection counter (part of the RAM) provided on the sub control board 940, and the first special effect lottery is obtained. The value of the selection counter is determined by referring to the first special effect selection table prepared in the ROM of the sub control board 940.

  The first special effect selection counter is updated every predetermined time (for example, every 4 ms (milliseconds)), and the value of the counter is different from the specified maximum value (for example, “99”) at the update timing. In this case, the current value is changed to a value that is larger by “1”, and when the value of the counter is the specified maximum value, the value is changed to the specified minimum value (“0”).

  The timing at which the sub control board 940 selects the pattern of the first special effect by the first special effect lottery is received from the main control board 920, the variation pattern command corresponding to the variation display of the decorative symbol currently being executed by the sub control substrate 940. The timing may be the timing at which the first operable period starts or ends.

  The first special effect selection table includes a first winning hour table that is referred to when a big win is won in the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery corresponding to the currently displayed decorative symbol variation display. A first off-time table that is referred to when a big win is not won in the lottery is prepared.

  The selection probability of each pattern (pattern 1A, pattern 1B, pattern 1C) in the first hit time table and the first off time table is the winning probability in each special symbol lottery, or the variation display of the decorative symbol currently being executed (that is, Fluctuation display including reach display) is set in consideration of the probability of being selected when each special symbol lottery is not a lottery.

  Specifically, when the pattern 1A appears, after the decorative symbol currently displayed in a variable display is confirmed and displayed (that is, the first special symbol or the second special symbol corresponding to the decorative symbol currently displayed in a variable display is displayed. When it is set to have the highest possibility of transitioning to the special gaming state after the final display), and when the pattern 1C appears, the transition to the special gaming state is made after the decorative pattern currently being displayed in the variable display is finalized. Is set to be the least likely to do.

  Therefore, when the first special effect appears, the player recognizes the expectation for the special gaming state by looking at the characters included in each pattern. In other words, when the player sees the character 611A “XXX army has come!” Included in the pattern 1A, the player has the highest expectation for the special gaming state, while the “cat” included in the pattern 1C. When the character 611C saying “I came!” Is seen, the expectation degree for the special gaming state is made the lowest.

  Similarly, when the first special effect appears, the player recognizes the degree of expectation for the special gaming state by looking at the frame portion of each pattern. That is, when the player sees the pattern 1A in which the frame 612A is red, the player has the highest expectation for the special gaming state, while the player sees the pattern 1C in which the frame 612C is blue. The lowest expectation for.

  In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the first hit table has the highest selection probability of the pattern 1A (for example, 60%), the second selection probability of the pattern 1B (for example, 20%), and the pattern 1C. Is set to be the lowest (for example, 10%). On the other hand, in the first off-time table, the selection probability of the pattern 1C is the highest (for example, 60%), the selection probability of the pattern 1B is the second highest (for example, 20%), and the selection probability of the pattern 1A is the lowest. (For example, 10%) is set.

  As shown in FIG. 13, the first special effect ends after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) after the first special effect is started (time t3). Note that the first special effect (pattern 1A, pattern 1B, pattern 1C) is displayed on the layer ahead of the currently displayed decorative symbol variation display, so that the execution is performed when the first special effect ends at time t3. The change display of the decorative pattern inside appears again. Thereafter, the left symbol stops at time t4.

  After a predetermined time (for example, after 5 seconds) after the left symbol stops at time t4, the second operable period starts during low-speed fluctuation (scrolling) before the right symbol stops (time t5). The first operable period started at time t5 ends after a predetermined time (for example, after 3 seconds) from the start (time t6). The second operable period from time t5 to time t6 is a period during which the player can perform a pressing operation on the pressing operation device 261.

  When the second operable period starts at time t5, as shown in FIG. 15, the decorative symbol display device 479 has an image 603 that reminds the player that the pressing operation to the pressing operation device 261 is possible. Is displayed. Display data relating to the display of the image 603 is prepared in a ROM (not shown) of the sub-control board 940, and is controlled at the start time of the second operable period (ie, time t5) under the control of the sub-control board 940. It is displayed on the symbol display device 479 and erased at the end time of the period (ie, time t6).

  If the player does not perform a pressing operation on the pressing operation device 261 in the second operable period, as shown in FIG. 13, a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) after the decorative symbol variation display is started at time ts. At the later timing, the right symbol that is scrolled at low speed (low speed fluctuation) is stopped so as to reach display (time t7). For example, in the configuration in which the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are fixedly stopped at the same symbol when a big win is won in the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery, as shown in FIG. In the case of stopping at “7”, reach display occurs when the right symbol stops at “7” at time t7.

  On the other hand, when the player performs a pressing operation on the pressing operation device 261 in the second operable period, when the second operable period ends at time t6, the second special effect, which is one of the suggested effects, is displayed on the sub-control board. It is started by the control of 940. As the second special effect, as shown in FIG. 15, four types of pattern 2A, pattern 2B, pattern 2C, and pattern 2D are prepared, and one of these four types is selected. The second special effect of the pattern is started at time t6.

  The pattern 2D is a pattern in which the right symbol that scrolls at a low speed is stopped so as to display reach as in the case where the player does not perform the pressing operation on the pressing operation device 261 in the second operable period.

  As shown in FIG. 15, pattern 2C starts moving again after temporarily stopping so that the right symbol that scrolls at low speed becomes reach display (display Q1), and shifts by one from “7” where the right symbol becomes reach display. It stops at “8” (display Q2), and the medium symbol is short and temporarily stops (display Q3). When a series of displays Q consisting of these displays Q1 to Q3 is displayed, the three rows of symbols in the left and right are scrolled again. The symbols in each column to be re-scrolled are stopped so that the left symbol is stopped at the same symbol as the symbol stopped at time t4, and then the right symbol is subjected to reach display through low-speed scrolling. That is, the pattern 2C is a pattern configured as a continuous effect as if the variable display is performed pseudo two times.

  The pattern 2B is the same as the pattern 2C up to the portion where the right symbol is scrolled at low speed in the re-scrolled three columns of symbols. In the pattern 2B, after a series of display Q is performed again, the symbols in the left and right three columns start the second re-scrolling. The symbols in each column for which the second re-scrolling is started are stopped so that the left symbol is stopped at the same symbol as the symbol stopped at time t4, and then the right symbol is subjected to reach display through low-speed scrolling. That is, the pattern 2B is a pattern configured as a continuous effect as if the variable display is performed pseudo three times.

  The pattern 2A is the same as the pattern 2B up to the portion where the right symbol scrolls at low speed in the second re-scrolling. In the pattern 2A, after a series of display Q is performed again thereafter, the three right and left middle three symbols start the third re-scrolling. The symbols in each column for which the third re-scrolling is started are stopped so that the left symbol is stopped at the same symbol as the symbol stopped at time t4, and then the right symbol is subjected to reach display through low-speed scrolling. That is, the pattern 2A is a pattern configured as a continuous effect as if the variable display is pseudo four times.

  Further, among the second special effects, for the patterns (pattern 2A, pattern 2B, pattern 2C) that perform the continuous effects, frames of each color that surround the screen of the decorative symbol display device 479 appear during the effects. For example, in the pattern 2C, as shown in FIG. 15, a blue frame 613C appears on the display Q3 constituting the series of displays Q (that is, a display in which the middle symbols are short and temporarily stopped).

  On the other hand, in the pattern 2B, a blue frame 613B1 appears in the display Q3 constituting the series of displays Q performed for the first time, and a yellow frame appears in the display Q3 constituting the series of displays Q performed for the second time. To do. That is, different color frames appear in the series of displays Q performed for the first time and the series of displays Q performed for the second time.

  In the pattern 2A, a blue frame 613A1 appears on the display Q3 constituting the series of displays Q performed for the first time, and a yellow frame appears on the display Q3 constituting the series of displays Q performed for the second time. A red frame appears in the display Q3 constituting a series of displays Q performed for the third time. That is, different color frames appear in the series of display Q performed for the first time, the series of display Q performed for the second time, and the series of display Q performed for the third time. In pattern 2A, a rainbow (rainbow) frame may appear before the right symbol stops after the third re-scrolling. In this case, the variation display is a big win. Correspondingly, it is set to always transit to the special game state after the change display.

  Each display data related to the above-described pattern 2A, pattern 2B, and pattern 2C display is prepared in a ROM (not shown) of the sub-control board 940. For the pattern 2D, the display data constituting the variable display of the decorative pattern being executed is used.

  The lottery for selecting which of the pattern 2A, the pattern 2B, the pattern 2C, or the pattern 2D is selected as the second special effect (hereinafter also referred to as “second special effect lottery”) is performed by the control by the sub-control board 940. Specifically, in the second special effect lottery, the sub control board 940 acquires the value of the second special effect selection counter (part of the RAM) provided in the sub control board 940, and the second special effect lottery. The value of the selection counter is determined by referring to the second special effect selection table prepared in the ROM of the sub control board 940.

  The second special effect selection counter is updated every predetermined time (for example, every 4 milliseconds), and the value of the counter is different from a specified maximum value (for example, “99”) at the update timing. Is changed to a value that is larger by “1” than the current value, and when the value of the counter is a specified maximum value, it is changed to a specified minimum value (“0”). In addition, it is good also as a structure which uses the counter common with the 1st special production | presentation selection counter mentioned above as a 2nd special production selection counter.

  The timing at which the sub control board 940 selects the pattern of the second special effect by the second special effect lottery is received from the main control board 920, the variation pattern command corresponding to the variation display of the decorative symbol currently being executed by the sub control substrate 940. The timing may be the timing at which the second operable period starts or ends.

  The second special effect selection table includes a second winning hour table that is referred to when a big win is won in the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery corresponding to the currently displayed decorative symbol variation display. A second off-time table to be referred to when a big win is not won in the lottery is prepared.

  The selection probability of each pattern (Pattern 2A, Pattern 2B, Pattern 2C, Pattern 2D) in the second hit time table and the second off time table is the winning probability in each special symbol lottery or the variation display of the decorative symbol currently being executed. (That is, the variable display including the reach display) is set in consideration of the probability of being selected when the special symbol lottery is not a lottery.

  Specifically, when the pattern 2A appears, after the decorative symbol currently displayed in a variable display is confirmed and displayed (that is, the first special symbol or the second special symbol corresponding to the decorative symbol currently displayed in a variable display is displayed. When it is set to have the highest possibility of transitioning to the special gaming state after the final display), and when the pattern 2D appears, the transition to the special gaming state is made after the decorative pattern currently being displayed is finalized. Is set to be the least likely to do. Further, the pattern 2B and the pattern 2C are set so that the possibility becomes the second and third highest, respectively.

  Thus, as the second special effect, when the pattern 2A that performs the continuous effect as if the variable display is pseudo four times appears, the player has the highest expectation for the special gaming state. When the pattern 2D that reaches the reach without appearing in spite of the operation of the pressing operation device 261 appears, the player has the lowest expectation.

  Among the second special effects, in the patterns 2A, 2B, and 2C that perform the continuous effects, frames of each color (frame 613C, frame 613B1, frame 613A1, etc.) surrounding the screen of the decorative symbol display device 479 are included. ) Appears. The number of times the color of the frame changes in each pattern is 4 times in pattern 2A, 2 times in pattern 2B, and 1 time in pattern 2C. Improve expectations for special gaming status.

  Furthermore, the change in the color of the frame in the pattern 2A, the pattern 2B, and the pattern 2C may be changed to the special game state in the same manner as each pattern (pattern 1A, pattern 1B, pattern 1C) constituting the first special effect. It is configured to change in the order of blue → yellow → red as the height increases. In other words, in the second special effect, the regularity between the change order of the color of the frame in each pattern (pattern 2A, pattern 2B, pattern 2C) for performing the continuous effect is likely to change to the special game state. Is configured to be. Therefore, the player synergistically amplifies the degree of expectation for the special gaming state as the color of the frame sequentially changes along the regularity.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the second hit time table has the highest selection probability of the pattern 2A (for example, 60%), the second selection probability of the pattern 2B (for example, 30%), and the pattern 2C. Is set to be the third highest (for example, 8%) and the pattern 2D has the lowest selection probability (for example, 2%). On the other hand, in the second off-time table, the selection probability of the pattern 2D is the highest (for example, 70%), the selection probability of the pattern 2C is the second highest (for example, 18%), and the selection probability of the pattern 2B is the third. It is set to be high (for example, 10%) and the selection probability of the pattern 2A is the lowest (for example, 2%).

  As shown in FIG. 13, the second special effect is ended by stopping the right symbol to reach display after a predetermined time from the start of the second special effect (time t10). In FIG. 13, only one time is shown as time t10, which is the end time of the second special effect, but the execution time of the second special effect is shown for each pattern (pattern 2A, pattern 2B, pattern 2C, pattern 2D), four times corresponding to each pattern of the second special effect can be time t10.

  For example, in the pattern 2D, the time t7 that is the stop timing of the right symbol when the player does not perform the pressing operation on the pressing operation device 261 in the second operable period is the time t10. On the other hand, in the pattern 2A, for example, the timing 60 seconds after the decorative symbol variation display is started at time ts is time t10. Further, in the pattern 2B and the pattern 2C, for example, timings after 40 seconds and 50 seconds after the decorative symbol variation display is started at time ts are time t10.

  Note that the execution time of the second special effect may correspond to a preselected variable display time, for example, re-scrolling corresponding to each pattern (pattern 2A, pattern 2B, pattern 2C, pattern 2D). As the number of times increases, the variable display with the longer variable display time is selected, and the variable display time is determined by the main control board 920 so that the number of re-scrolls is determined and the pattern is determined. . Also, the length of the effect (battle effect) that is executed after the right symbol is stopped is different, the timing of the right symbol stop in the first and second and subsequent times is the same in each pattern, and the length is different for each pattern. It is good also as a structure which performs the effect.

  When the right symbol stops with reach display at time t7 or time t10 after the end of the second special effect, the third operable period is started. The third operable period ends after a predetermined time (for example, after 3 seconds) from the start (time t8 or time t11). The third operable period is a period during which the player can perform a pressing operation on the pressing operation device 261.

  When the third operable period starts when the right symbol is stopped by the reach display, the decorative symbol display device 479 has a push operation with respect to the pressing operation device 261 as shown in FIG. An image 605 reminiscent of the user and a character 606 of “recruitment of helper!” Are displayed as a comment on the effect that prompts the pressing operation to the pressing operation device 261.

  Each display data related to the display of the image 605 and the characters 606 is prepared in a ROM (not shown) of the sub-control board 940, and the decorative design is displayed at the start time of the third operable period under the control of the sub-control board 940. Displayed on device 479 and erased at the end of the period.

  As shown in FIG. 13, when the third operable period started at time t7 ends at time t8, regardless of whether or not the player has pressed the pressing operation device 261 during the third operable period. A battle effect that is one of the suggestion effects is started by the control of the sub-control board 940. Similarly, when the third operable period started at time t10 ends at time t11, whether or not the player presses the pressing operation device 261 during the third operable period, similarly. A battle effect is started by the control of the sub control board 940.

  The battle effect is a video effect that represents the situation until the final stop of the middle symbol, and the character that is regarded as an enemy such as XX army, bandits, cats, and the like. As a battle effect, as shown in FIG. 16, four types of patterns 4A, 4B, 4C, and 4D are prepared, and one pattern selected from these four types is prepared. The battle effect is started at time t8 or time t11.

  The pattern 4A is a pattern that represents a situation where the enemy is fighting in an overwhelming priority situation. Pattern 4B is a pattern representing a situation where the player is fighting in a priority situation against the enemy. Pattern 4C is a pattern showing a situation where the player is fighting in an inferior situation against the enemy. The pattern 4D is a pattern that represents a situation in which the battle is overwhelmingly inferior to the enemy.

  Each display data related to the display of the pattern 4A, the pattern 4B, the pattern 4C, and the pattern 4D is prepared in a ROM (not shown) of the sub-control board 940. Each of these patterns 4A, 4B, 4C, and 4D may have a configuration in which only display data corresponding to video effects indicating the status of each battle is prepared, or can appear in the first special effect. The display data corresponding to a plurality of types of video effects indicating the battle situation may be prepared for each type of enemy.

  Each pattern 4A, 4B, 4C is a pattern of a long production time used when the right symbol stops at time t7 (that is, when the pressing operation device 261 is not pressed at the second operation time). A short effect time pattern used when the operation stops at time t10 after the second special effect ends (that is, when the pressing operation device 261 is pressed at the second operation time) is prepared. On the other hand, for the pattern 4D, the time at which the right symbol stops is the same regardless of whether or not the second special effect has been performed (that is, whether or not the pressing operation device 261 has been pressed at the second operation time). Therefore, there is prepared one production time pattern that is shared between the case where the pressing operation device 261 is pressed and not performed at the second operation time.

  The lottery for selecting which of the pattern 4A, the pattern 4B, the pattern 4C, or the pattern 4D is selected as the battle effect (hereinafter also referred to as “battle effect lottery”) is performed by the control of the sub-control board 940. Specifically, in the battle effect lottery, the sub control board 940 obtains the value of the battle effect selection counter (part of the RAM) provided on the sub control board 940, and with respect to the value of the battle effect selection counter. This is done by referring to the battle effect selection table prepared in the ROM of the sub control board 940.

  The battle effect selection counter is updated every predetermined time (for example, every 4 milliseconds), and when the value of the counter is different from a specified maximum value (for example, “99”) at the update timing, When the counter value is a specified maximum value, the value is changed to a specified minimum value (“0”). Note that a counter common to at least one of the first special effect selection counter or the second special effect selection counter described above may be used as the battle effect selection counter.

  The timing at which the sub-control board 940 selects the battle effect pattern by the battle effect lottery is the timing at which the sub-control board 940 receives from the main control board 920 a variation pattern command corresponding to the variation display of the decorative symbol currently being executed. It may be the timing when the third operable period starts or ends.

  The battle effect selection table includes a fourth winning hour table that is referred to when a big win is won in the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery corresponding to the currently displayed decorative symbol variation display, A fourth off-time table that is referred to when a big win is not won in the lottery is prepared.

  The selection probability of each pattern (pattern 4A, pattern 4B, pattern 4C, pattern 4D) in the fourth hit time table and the fourth off time table is the winning probability in each special symbol lottery or the variation display of the decorative symbol currently being executed. (That is, the variable display including the reach display) is set in consideration of the probability of being selected when the special symbol lottery is not a lottery.

  Specifically, when the pattern 4A appears, after the decorative symbol currently displayed in a variable display is confirmed and displayed (that is, the first special symbol or the second special symbol corresponding to the decorative symbol currently displayed in a variable display is displayed. If the pattern 4D appears to be most likely to transition to the special gaming state after the final display is confirmed), then the transition to the special gaming state will be made after the decorative pattern currently being displayed is confirmed and displayed. Is set to be the least likely to do. Further, the pattern 4B and the pattern 4C are set so that the possibility becomes the second and third highest, respectively.

  Therefore, when the pattern 4A that performs the video production showing the situation where the battle is overwhelmingly preferential to the enemy appears as the battle production, the player has the highest expectation for the special game state. Thus, when a pattern 4D for performing video production showing a situation in which the battle is overwhelmingly inferior to the enemy appears, the player has the lowest expectation.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the fourth hitting table has the highest selection probability of the pattern 4A (for example, 80%), the second highest selection probability of the pattern 4B (for example, 15%), and the pattern 4C. Is selected to be the third highest (for example, 5%) and the pattern 4D has the lowest selection probability (for example, 0%). On the other hand, in the fourth off-time table, the selection probability of the pattern 4D is the highest (for example, 80%), the selection probability of the pattern 4C is the second highest (for example, 15%), and the selection probability of the pattern 4B is the third. It is set to be high (for example, 4%) and have the lowest selection probability for the pattern 4A (for example, 1%).

  As shown in FIG. 13, the battle effect started at the time t8 or the time t11 is a timing after a predetermined time (90 seconds in the example shown in FIG. 13) after the decorative symbol variation display is started at the time ts. Thus, the middle symbol is finally stopped at the symbol corresponding to the lottery result of the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery (that is, the decorative symbol is finalized and displayed) (time te).

  In the configuration where the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are fixed and stopped at the same symbol when the big win is won in the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery, both the left symbol and the right symbol stop at "7" In this case, if the first or second special symbol lottery is won, the middle symbol finally stops at “7” at time te. On the other hand, if the first or second special symbol lottery is not won, the middle symbol finally stops at a symbol other than “7” (for example, “8”) at time te. Immediately before or simultaneously with the stop, the result of the battle effect is also displayed. If the first or second special symbol lottery is won, the image of the ally character winning is displayed. An image is displayed in which the enemy character wins and the teammate loses.

  As shown in FIG. 13, when the player performs a pushing operation on the pressing operation device 261 in the third operable period started at time t7, when the third operable period ends at time t8, the suggestion effect 1 The third special effect is started under the control of the sub-control board 940. Similarly, when the player performs a pushing operation on the pressing operation device 261 in the third operable period started at time t10, the third special effect is started when the third operable period ends at time t11. The

  As the third special effect, as shown in FIG. 16, three types of pattern 3A, pattern 3B, and pattern 3C are prepared, and the third of one pattern selected from these three types is prepared. The special effect starts at time t8. As described above, at time t8 or time t11, the battle effect is also started, but the third special effect is displayed on the layer ahead of the battle effect, so that the player can play the third special effect. In the meantime, the third special effect is seen on the screen of the decorative symbol display device 479.

  The pattern 3A is a pattern including a character 614A “XXX man came!” And a red frame 615A surrounding the periphery of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 479. The pattern 3 </ b> B is a pattern including a character 614 </ b> B that says “A fighter has come!” And a yellow frame 615 </ b> B that surrounds the screen of the decorative symbol display device 479. The pattern 3 </ b> C is a pattern including a character 614 </ b> C “Dog came!” And a blue frame 615 </ b> C that surrounds the screen of the decorative symbol display device 479. Each display data related to the display of the pattern 3A, the pattern 3B, and the pattern 3C is prepared in a ROM (not shown) of the sub-control board 940.

  The lottery for selecting which of the pattern 3A, the pattern 3B, or the pattern 3C is selected as the first special effect (hereinafter, also referred to as “third special effect lottery”) is performed under the control of the sub-control board 940. Specifically, in the third special effect lottery, the sub control board 940 obtains the value of the third special effect selection counter (part of the RAM) provided in the sub control board 940, and the third special effect lot. The selection counter value is determined by referring to the third special effect selection table prepared in the ROM of the sub-control board 940.

  The third special effect selection counter is updated every predetermined time (for example, every 4 milliseconds), and the value of the counter is different from a specified maximum value (for example, “99”) at the update timing. Is changed to a value that is larger by “1” than the current value, and when the value of the counter is a specified maximum value, it is changed to a specified minimum value (“0”). Note that a counter common to at least one of the first special effect selection counter, the second special effect selection counter, or the battle effect selection counter described above may be used as the third special effect selection counter.

  The timing at which the sub control board 940 selects the pattern of the third special effect by the third special effect lottery is received from the main control board 920 as a change pattern command corresponding to the change display of the decorative symbol currently being executed by the sub control board 940. May be the timing at which the third operable period starts or ends.

  The third special effect selection table is a third winning hour table that is referred to when a big win is won in the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery corresponding to the currently displayed decorative symbol variation display. A third off-time table to be referred to when a big win is not won in the lottery is prepared.

  The selection probability of each pattern (pattern 3A, pattern 3B, pattern 3C) in the third hit time table and the third off time table is the winning probability in each special symbol lottery, or the variation display of the decorative symbol currently being executed (that is, Fluctuation display including reach display) is set in consideration of the probability of being selected when each special symbol lottery is not a lottery.

  Specifically, when the pattern 3A appears, after the decorative symbol currently displayed in a variable display is confirmed and displayed (that is, the first special symbol or the second special symbol corresponding to the decorative symbol currently displayed in a variable display is displayed. When the pattern 3C is set to be most likely to transition to the special gaming state after the final display), the transition to the special gaming state is made after the decorative symbol currently being displayed is confirmed and displayed. Is set to be the least likely to do.

  Therefore, when the third special effect appears, the player recognizes the expectation for the special gaming state by looking at the characters included in each pattern. That is, when the player sees the character 614A “XXX Man came!” Included in the pattern 3A, the player has the highest expectation for the special gaming state, while the pattern 3C includes “ When the character 614C “Dog came!” Is seen, the expectation for the special gaming state is made the lowest.

  Similarly, when the third special effect appears, the player recognizes the expectation for the special gaming state by looking at the frame portion of each pattern. That is, when the player sees the pattern 3A in which the frame 615A is red, the player has the highest expectation for the special game state, while when the player sees the pattern 3C in which the frame 615C is blue, the special game state The lowest expectation for.

  In particular, the correlation between the color of the frame of each pattern (pattern 3A, pattern 3B, pattern 3C) constituting the third special effect and the possibility of transition to the special game state is the pattern ( Since the pattern 1A, the pattern 1B, and the pattern 1C) are configured in the same manner, the player sensuously determines the degree of expectation for the special game state for the frame color in the third special effect from the regularity of the frame color. it can.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the third hit time table has the highest selection probability of the pattern 3A (for example, 70%), the second selection probability of the pattern 3B (for example, 25%), and the pattern 3C. Is set to be the lowest (for example, 5%). On the other hand, in the third outlier table, the selection probability of the pattern 3C is the highest (for example, 80%), the selection probability of the pattern 3B is the second highest (for example, 18%), and the selection probability of the pattern 3A is the lowest. (For example, 2%) is set.

  As shown in FIG. 13, the third special effect started at time t8 or t11 ends after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) after the start (time t9 or time t12). Note that the third special effect (pattern 3A, pattern 3B, pattern 3C) is displayed on the layer ahead of the battle effect, so that the player has completed the third special effect at time t9 or time t12. The battle effect is seen on the screen of the decorative symbol display device 479.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, when the decorative symbol variation display in the decorative symbol display device 479 is a mode including a predetermined reach display, the pressing operation device 261 is pressed to perform a predetermined operation. Suggestion production can be revealed.

  In the example shown in FIG. 13, there are three operation possible periods during which the pressing operation device 261 can be pushed in during one decorative symbol variation display (that is, the first operable period and the second operable period). , And a third operable period), and the player performs a push operation on the pressing operation device 261 in each operable period, thereby suggesting effects (that is, first special effects, 2 special effects and 3rd special effects) can appear (display) on the decorative symbol display device 479.

  Therefore, in the variation display of the decorative pattern in the example shown in FIG. 13, three operation possible periods are provided while one variation display is performed, and thus the pressing operation device 261 in each operation possible period is provided. Depending on the presence / absence of an operation, suggested effects can be displayed in various patterns (more specifically, eight patterns).

  First, the first pattern causes the first special effect to appear at time t2 by performing a pressing operation on the pressing operation device 261 in the first operable period that starts at time t1, and starts at time t5. By performing a pressing operation on the pressing operation device 261 in the second operable period, the second special effect appears at time t6, and the pressing operation on the pressing operation apparatus 261 is performed in the third operable period started at time t10. This is a pattern in which the third special effect and the battle effect appear at time t11.

  The second pattern causes the first special effect to appear at time t2 by performing a pressing operation on the pressing operation device 261 in the first operable period that starts at time t1, and the second pattern that starts at time t5. By performing the pushing operation on the pressing operation device 261 in the operable period, the second special effect is caused to appear at time t6, and the pushing operation on the pressing operation device 261 is not performed in the third operable period started at time t10. Thus, it is a pattern in which only the battle effect appears without causing the third special effect to appear at time t11.

  In the third pattern, the first special effect appears at time t2 by performing a pressing operation on the pressing operation device 261 in the first operable period that starts at time t1, and the second pattern that starts at time t5. By not performing the pressing operation on the pressing operation device 261 in the operable period, the second special effect is not displayed, and by performing the pressing operation on the pressing operation device 261 in the third operable period started at time t7, It is a pattern that causes the third special effect and the battle effect to appear at time t8.

  In the fourth pattern, the first special effect appears at time t2 by performing a pressing operation on the pressing operation device 261 in the first operable period that starts at time t1, and the second pattern that starts at time t5. By not performing the pushing operation on the pressing operation device 261 during the operable period, the second special effect is not displayed, and the pushing operation on the pressing operation device 261 is not performed during the third operable period started at time t7. In this pattern, only the battle effect appears without causing the third special effect to appear at time t8.

  The fifth pattern allows the second operation to be started at time t5 without causing the second special effect to appear by not performing the pressing operation on the pressing operation device 261 in the first operable period that starts at time t1. By performing the pushing operation on the pressing operation device 261 in the period, the second special effect appears at the time t6, and by performing the pushing operation on the pressing operation device 261 in the third operable period started at the time t10. It is a pattern that causes the third special effect and the battle effect to appear at time t11.

  In the sixth pattern, the second special effect can be started without starting the second special effect by not performing the pressing operation on the pressing operation device 261 in the first operable period that starts at the time t1, and can be started at the time t5. By performing the pushing operation on the pressing operation device 261 in the period, the second special effect appears at the time t6, and the pushing operation on the pressing operation device 261 is not performed in the third operable period started at the time t10. In this pattern, only the battle effect appears without causing the third special effect to appear at time t11.

  In the seventh pattern, the second special operation is started at time t5 without causing the second special effect to appear by not performing the pressing operation on the pressing operation device 261 in the first operable period that starts at time t1. By not performing the pressing operation on the pressing operation device 261 in the period, the second special effect is not displayed, and by performing the pressing operation on the pressing operation device 261 in the third operable period started at time t7, the time t8 Is a pattern that makes the third special effect and the battle effect appear.

  In the eighth pattern, the second special effect is not displayed by not performing the pressing operation on the pressing operation device 261 in the first operable period that starts at time t1, and the second operation that can be started at time t5. By not performing the pushing operation on the pressing operation device 261 in the period, the second special effect is not displayed, and the pushing operation on the pressing operation device 261 is not performed in the third operable period that starts at time t7. This is a pattern in which only the battle effect appears without causing the third special effect to appear at t8.

  As described above, when the operable period provided a plurality of times is provided during one variation display, a plurality of patterns are formed depending on whether or not the pressing operation device 261 is operated in each operable period. The suggestive effect can be revealed with one of the patterns.

  As described above, the variable display including the super reach having the variable display time of 90 seconds has been illustrated as an example of the variable display provided with a plurality of operable periods. However, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the variable display time is In the variable display including the super reach having a length other than 90 seconds, a plurality of operable periods are similarly provided. It should be noted that, regardless of the type of reach display included, a configuration in which a plurality of operable periods may be provided for a variable display with a variable display time longer than a predetermined time (a variable display including a reach display). . The number of operable periods provided may be different depending on the length of the variable display time. Also, the number of operable periods provided for one variation display may be one.

  Although details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, after a variable display capable of displaying a plurality of suggestive effects, such as a variable display including a super reach shown in FIG. 13, is performed. When the gaming state transitions to the special gaming state, the variation display of the decoration symbol that was performed in the decoration symbol display device 479 before the transition to the special gaming state is included, including the suggestive effect that can appear during the variation display. And can be restored.

  In order to realize such a configuration, the sub control board 940 executes a variable display capable of displaying a plurality of suggestive effects, such as a variable display including a super reach shown in FIG. 13, and supports the variable display. When the lottery result of the special symbol lottery (the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery) is a big hit, the stop symbol of each column immediately before the decorative symbol variation display is started (for example, the example of FIG. 13 "653"), the lottery result of the first special effect lottery, the lottery result of the second special effect lottery, the lottery result of the third special effect lottery, the lottery result of the battle effect lottery, and the confirmation display of the decorative design The stop symbols (for example, “777” in the example of FIG. 13) in each column are stored in predetermined areas of the RAM.

  These pieces of information (that is, the stop symbol before the decorative symbol fluctuation display, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol confirmation display, and the lottery result of each effect lottery) are configured to store all these pieces of information at a predetermined timing. Alternatively, one or a plurality of information may be stored at each timing at a plurality of timings. The timing for storing the information may be the timing at which the variable display ends (that is, the timing at which the fixed display is displayed), the timing at which the variable display starts, or each effect lottery is performed. It may be the timing to be called.

<Restoration of suggestion effects in special gaming state>
In a configuration in which a plurality of suggestion effects appear during one fluctuation display, the suggestion effect that appears later is less likely to transition to the special game state than the suggestion effect that appears earlier In such a case, there is a possibility that the player loses the expectation of transition from the currently displayed variation display to the special game state and is disappointed with the game. In order to prevent such disappointment, the player can select not to operate the pressing operation device 261 during the operable period.

  However, in some cases, such as when the final display of the decorative symbol is a display indicating that the winning symbol has been won in the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery, the player does not make his / her own intention. You might want to know later what happened if you had a suggestive production.

  For such a case, in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, during the period of the special gaming state, the decorative symbol change display that was performed in the decorative symbol display device 479 before the transition to the special gaming state, It is configured so that it can be restored, including suggested effects that can appear during variable display.

  Hereinafter, the configuration will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17A is a screen diagram showing an example of a screen on which the player can select whether or not to restore the decorative symbol variation display performed before the transition to the special game state in the special game state. It is. FIG. 17B is a screen diagram illustrating an example of a screen displayed when the decorative symbol variation display is restored in the special gaming state.

  In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the game state transitions to the special game state after the variable display capable of producing a plurality of suggested effects such as the variable display including the super reach shown in FIG. 13 is performed. If a predetermined round (for example, the third round) of a plurality of rounds (for example, 16 rounds) executed in the special gaming state is started, before the transition to the special gaming state, As a screen on which the player can select whether or not to restore the decorative display of the decorative pattern that has been performed (hereinafter, also referred to as “restoration selection screen”), a screen as shown in FIG. Displayed on device 479.

  As shown in FIG. 17A, the restoration selection screen includes a character 621 that informs the player that the decorative display of the decorative symbol that was displayed before the transition to the special gaming state can be restored, and a decoration. An image 622 reminding the player that the pressing operation on the pressing operation device 261 is possible in order to restore the symbol variation display, and a round number display 631 that informs the player of the current round number in the special gaming state. It is comprised as a screen displayed on the special game state screen including.

  The characters 621 and the image 622 are displayed on the special game state screen at a timing when a predetermined round (for example, the third round) is started in the special game state, and a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) after the display is started. Later). That is, the restoration selection screen is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479 over a period from when a predetermined round is started in the special gaming state until a predetermined time such as 5 seconds elapses. Each display data relating to the display of the characters 621 and the image 622 is prepared in a ROM (not shown) of the sub control board 940, and display and erasure control is performed by the sub control board 940.

  When the player performs a push operation on the push operation device 261 during the period in which the restoration selection screen is displayed, the sub control board 940 displays the variation display of the decorative symbol that was performed before the transition to the special game state being executed. On the basis of each piece of information stored in a predetermined area of the RAM (that is, the stop symbol before the decorative symbol change display, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol confirmation display, and the lottery result of each effect lottery) , Including the suggested effects that can appear during the change display.

  That is, in the example of FIG. 13 described above, when the display of the decorative symbols stopped at “653” is started and the first operable period comes, an image 601 is displayed as shown in FIG. And a character 602 are displayed. Thereafter, when the pressing operation device 261 is operated during the first operable period, the first special effect corresponding to the stored lottery result of the first special effect lottery is executed.

  When the second operable period comes after the left symbol stops at “7”, an image 603 is displayed. Thereafter, when the pressing operation device 261 is operated during the second operable period, the second special effect corresponding to the stored lottery result of the second special effect lottery is executed.

  When the third operable period comes after the right symbol stops at “7” so as to reach reach, an image 605 and characters 606 are displayed. Thereafter, when the pressing operation device 261 is operated during the third operable period, the third special effect corresponding to the stored lottery result of the third special effect lottery and the lottery result of the stored battle effect lottery are determined. The battle effect is displayed, and at the timing when the variation display time of the variation display being executed (for example, 90 seconds in the example of FIG. 13) has elapsed, the middle symbol finally stops at “7”. That is, the decorative symbol is confirmed and displayed as “777”.

  On the other hand, when the pressing operation device 261 is not operated during the third operable period, a battle effect corresponding to the stored lottery result of the battle effect lottery is displayed and executed in the same manner as when the pressing operation device 261 is operated. At the timing when the fluctuation display time of the middle fluctuation display has elapsed, the middle symbol finally stops at “7”.

  Therefore, when the decorative symbol change display that was performed before the transition to the special game state being executed is restored as described above, the player can perform the operation available period (first operation available period) provided three times. , Second operation possible period, and third operation possible period), by pressing the pressing operation device 261 during all operation possible periods or a part of operation possible periods, the first special effect and the second special effect Or, among the third special effects, it is possible to see a special effect that one wants to see.

  In other words, in the restored display of the decorative symbol, the operable period corresponding to the operable period in which the operation of the pressing operation device 261 is performed during the decorative symbol variation display performed before the special gaming state. When the player operates the pressing operation device 261, the player can also view the special display seen during the decorative display of the decorative symbol that was performed before the special gaming state even in the display of the recovered decorative symbol. You can see the production again.

  On the other hand, in the restored display of the decorative symbol, the operation corresponding to the operable period in which the operation of the pressing operation device 261 is not performed during the decorative symbol variation display performed before the special gaming state is possible. When the player operates the pressing operation device 261 for the period, the player can restore the special effect that was not seen during the variable display of the decorative symbols performed before the special game state. It can be seen in the variable display of decorative patterns.

  Therefore, for example, in the decorative display variation display of the example shown in FIG. 13, as described above, the suggestion effects (first special effect, second special effect, and third pattern) are provided in eight patterns from the first to the eighth. Special effects and battle effects) can be displayed, but the restored decorative symbol variation display is the same as the pattern that appeared in the decorative symbol variation display performed before the special gaming state. Suggestion effects can appear in patterns, and suggestion effects can appear in different patterns.

  Here, it is not always necessary to restore the entire display period from the start to the end of the variable display, and it is possible to restore a part of the variable display or to generate a start prize. Then, it is possible to restore a period in which a plurality of fluctuation displays are executed until the fluctuation display corresponding to the big win is executed, or it is possible to select a time when the player restores.

  Note that the restoration selection screen may be displayed a plurality of times during the special gaming state, for example, the restoration selection screen is displayed in the third round and the seventh round in the special gaming state. That is, the configuration may be such that the decorative symbol variation display can be restored a plurality of times during the special gaming state. By adopting a configuration in which the decorative display of the decorative symbol can be restored multiple times, the player can suggest multiple types of patterns different from the patterns that appeared in the decorative symbol variable display that was performed before the special gaming state. Can be made to appear.

  When the decorative symbol change display performed before the transition to the special game state being executed is restored to the decorative symbol display device 479, the restoration is performed as shown in FIG. 17B. A round number display 641 indicating the current number of rounds is displayed in a predetermined area (for example, the lower right portion of the screen) so that the player can recognize the current number of rounds. The display of the round number display 641 is controlled by the sub control board 940. Instead of displaying the round number display 641, a reduced screen of the special game state screen may be displayed in a predetermined area.

<Reservation full tank production>
In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the number of unit game rights held for the first special symbol and the number of unit game rights held for the second special symbol are both the maximum number, that is, for both special symbols. When the total number of holds reaches eight, a predetermined effect (hereinafter, this effect is also referred to as “pending full tank effect”) appears on the decorative symbol display device 479 under predetermined conditions.

  The hold full tank effect may be an effect that is immediately executed when the total number of hold reaches eight, or a variable display is performed for a certain period (for example, a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times)). Until a predetermined time (for example, a period until 5 minutes elapses) is started, and the start of the special period changes the background color of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 479. Or an effect suggested to the player by displaying a specific color on the peripheral portion of the display screen. On the other hand, the reserved full tank effect is produced when a specific sound effect is output at the timing when the number of holding reaches eight, a specific character that does not appear outside the special period during the variable display appears, Expectation for the lottery result of the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) for the hold every time the floating display makes a specific movement (for example, high speed movement) or the hold display color is 1 The color indicating the degree (for example, the color of the display portion indicating the hold is displayed in blue, yellow, red, and rainbow colors, and the order of the colors is the same as the color indicating the other degree of expectation. It is an effect such as being displayed in a preferable manner.), And it is an effect with a special feeling that is not seen at all in other situations such as other than a special period, or is not easily seen.

  In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the number of times that the unit game right related to the first special symbol is reserved and the number of times that the unit game right related to the second special symbol is reserved are both the maximum number (the upper limit of the number of times reserved). The probability of the appearance of a full-filled production depending on whether the special symbol lottery (the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery) is included in all of these holds. Are configured differently.

  More specifically, if the maximum number of holds includes a hold that is won in the special symbol lottery, it will be held with a higher probability than if the special symbol lottery does not include a hold that has been won. It is configured to produce a full tank production. For example, as shown in FIG. 18, when the maximum number of holds includes a hold that has been won in the special symbol lottery, the hold full tank effect is displayed with a probability of 80%. If the symbol lottery does not include the winning hold, the reserved full tank effect will only appear with a probability of 10%.

  The lottery for determining whether or not to display the reserved full tank effect (hereinafter also referred to as “pending full tank effect lottery”) is performed under the control of the sub-control board 940. Specifically, the hold full tank effect lottery is a hold provided on the sub-control board 940 when the sub-control board 940 has reached the maximum number of times for each hold for the first special symbol and the second special symbol. By obtaining the value of the full tank effect counter (part of the RAM) and referring to the reserved full tank effect selection table prepared in the ROM of the sub control board 940 for the value of the reserved full tank effect counter Done.

  The main control board 920 notifies the sub-control board 940 of information related to the number of times of suspension at a predetermined timing each time the number of times of suspension for each special symbol varies. Based on the information notified from the main control board 920, the sub-control board 940 can determine whether or not each of the number of holding times for the first special symbol and the second special symbol has reached the maximum number.

  Note that the main control board 920, for example, at a timing when the number of suspensions for the special symbol increases due to the start winning of each special symbol, a predetermined command including information on the number of suspensions of each special symbol (in the following, , This command is also referred to as “hold command”) to the sub-control board 940 to notify the sub-control board 940 of information regarding the number of times of hold. In addition, the main control board 920 sends, for example, a change pattern command including information related to the number of hold times to the sub-control board at a timing when the main control board 920 transmits a change pattern command (that is, a timing at which the number of hold times for a special symbol decreases). By transmitting to 940, the sub-control board 940 is notified of information relating to the number of suspensions.

  The hold command includes information related to the number of times each special symbol is held, and information related to the lottery result of each special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery or second special symbol lottery). When the sub-control board 940 receives the hold command from the main control board 920, the sub-control board 940 associates the information related to the lottery result of the special symbol lottery with the reception order of the hold command (that is, the order in which the start winnings are generated). Is stored in the predetermined area, and thereafter, when the corresponding hold is exhausted (that is, the held unit game is executed), the information is deleted. Based on the information stored in the RAM, the sub-control board 940 can determine whether the hold for the special symbol lottery is included in the hold for the first special symbol and the second special symbol. .

  The pending full tank effect counter is updated every predetermined time (for example, every 4 ms (milliseconds)), and the value of the counter is different from a specified maximum value (for example, “99”) at the update timing. Is changed to a value that is larger by “1” than the current value, and when the value of the counter is a specified maximum value, it is changed to a specified minimum value (“0”).

  As the reserved full tank effect selection table, the first table to be referred to when the special symbol lottery is included in the maximum number of holds, and the special symbol lottery in the maximum number of holds. A second table to be referred to when the winning hold is not included is prepared. The first table is set so that the appearance of the reserved full tank effect is selected with a predetermined probability (for example, a probability of 80% as in the example shown in FIG. 18). The second table is also set such that the appearance of the reserved full tank effect is selected with a predetermined probability (for example, a probability of 10% as in the example shown in FIG. 18).

  The sub-control board 940 executes the reserved full tank effect when the appearance of the reserved full tank effect is selected in the reserved full tank effect lottery.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the sub-control board 940 performs a reserved full tank effect lottery when the number of times of each hold for the first special symbol and the second special symbol has reached the maximum number. However, when the main control board 920 reaches the maximum number of times of holding each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the reserved full tank similar to the reserved full tank effect lottery performed by the sub control board 940 is performed. It is good also as a structure which performs an effect lottery. In such a configuration, when the appearance of the reserved full tank effect is selected in the reserved full tank effect lottery, the main control board 920 notifies the sub control board 940 of information to that effect, and the sub control board 940. Performs a reserved full effect when the information is received from the main control board 920.

  Next, the operation and effect of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment described above will be described.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, during the period of the special game state, the decorative symbol display that was performed on the decorative symbol display device 479 before the transition to the special game state is pressed during the variable display. It is configured such that it can be restored including the suggested effects (first special effect, second special effect, and third special effect) that can be made to appear by operating the operation device 261.

  Therefore, even when the player does not intentionally operate the pressing operation device 261 during the operable period provided for the suggestion effect to appear during the decorative symbol variation display period, The player can later restore and view the suggestive effect that was not seen because the operation of the pressing operation device 261 was not performed.

  As a result, players may have negative feelings in the game, such as regretting that they did not see the suggestive effects that they were able to see during the decorative display period. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in games.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when the number of times of the unit game rights related to the first special symbol and the number of times of the unit game rights related to the second special symbol both reach the maximum number of times. The reserved full tank effect appears on the decorative symbol display device 479 under predetermined conditions. Therefore, since the player has the purpose of increasing the number of times of holding for each special symbol, the game motivation is improved.

  In particular, if the maximum number of holds includes a hold that has been won in a special symbol lottery, the hold will be filled with a higher probability than if a special symbol lottery has not been held. Is configured to appear. In other words, in the case where the hold that is won in the special symbol lottery is included in the hold, the hold full tank effect is more likely to appear than in the case where the hold that is won in the special symbol lottery is not included The situation where the player is expected to generate a special gaming state can be created by the appearance of the reserved full tank effect. Therefore, since it is possible to add a feeling of feeling to the progress of the game, the interest of the game can be improved.

  Here, the lottery result of the reserved full tank effect may be suggested to the player by a variation display different from the variation display related to the first special symbol and the second special symbol for the player, for example, At the timing when the number of holdings that triggers the lottery of the reserved full tank effect reaches the upper limit, a part of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 479 (for example, the upper right corner) has a circular shape in a front view in the circumferential direction. A roulette with fan-shaped areas with “Win” and “Loose” indications arranged in order is displayed, and a fluctuating display is performed with a roulette effect in which each area is lit brightly in sequence. Corresponding to the lottery result of the full tank effect, finally, an effect that the lighting part stops in the “win” or “losing” area may be executed, and then the reserved full tank effect may be executed. . Accordingly, it is possible to easily show the player that there is a possibility that the reserved full tank effect will be executed.

Second Embodiment
Next, a second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the pachinko machine 100 of the second embodiment, the player can cancel the execution of the second and subsequent suggestion effects among the plurality of suggestion effects that can appear during one fluctuation display (hereinafter, This function is also referred to as a “suggested effect cancellation function”). In the following description, the same components as those in the first embodiment described above are denoted by the same reference numerals and description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 19 is a time chart for explaining the suggestion effect canceling function. FIG. 19 illustrates a case where the player cancels the suggested effect in the variable display including the super reach with the variable display time of 90 seconds shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 19, when the player operates the pressing operation device 261 in the first operable period from time t1 to time t2, and the first special effect is performed in the period from time t2 to time t3. After the first special effect ends at time t3, the first cancelable period starts at time ta1 (for example, one second after the first special effect ends). The first cancelable period ends at time ta2 after a predetermined time (for example, after 3 seconds) from time ta1.

  It should be noted that the first cancelable period may be provided in a period until the second operable period is started. Thus, for example, the first cancelable period may start at time t3 when the first special effect ends, or the first cancel period ends at time t4 when the left symbol stops. Also good.

  In the first cancellation period, the control of the sub-control board 940 informs the player that the display of the subsequent suggestive effects can be canceled based on the display data prepared in the ROM (not shown) of the sub-control board 940. Characters and images are displayed. For example, a character indicating a comment that informs the player that the display of the subsequent suggestive effect can be canceled is displayed, or the player is reminded that the pressing operation to the pressing operation device 261 is possible. An image is displayed.

  When the player performs a pressing operation on the pressing operation device 261 in the first cancellation period, the second operation possible period and the third operation possible period do not occur, and when the right symbol is stopped to reach reach at time t7, A non-battle effect is started by the control of the sub control board 940.

  The non-battle effect is an effect that does not recall the degree of ease of transition to the special game state after the decorative symbols are displayed in a definite manner, unlike suggested effects such as the first special effect and the battle effect. The non-battle effect is, for example, an introduction video of a character appearing in a suggestive effect such as a first special effect that can appear in the variable display, and display data thereof is prepared in the ROM of the sub-control board 940.

  As shown in FIG. 19, the second operable period is started at time t5 on condition that the player does not operate the pressing operation device 261 in the first cancellation period. When the player operates the pressing operation device 261 in the second operable period from time t5 to time t6, and the second special effect is performed in the period from time t6 to time t10, the second special effect is performed. The second cancelable period starts at time ta3 (for example, 5 seconds before the end of the second special effect) within the execution period of the effect. The second cancelable period ends at time ta4 after a predetermined time (for example, after 3 seconds) from time ta3.

  In addition, the 2nd cancellation possible period should just be provided in the period before the 3rd operation possible period is started. Therefore, for example, the configuration may be such that the second cancelable period starts at time t6 when the second special effect starts, or the time t10 when the right symbol stops (or the second special effect ends). Alternatively, the second cancellation period may end.

  In the second cancellation period, similarly to the first cancellation period described above, the display of the subsequent suggestive effects to the player based on the display data prepared in the ROM of the sub control board 940 is canceled by the control of the sub control board 940. Characters and images that can be reported are displayed.

  If the player performs a pushing operation on the pressing device 261 during the second cancellation period, the third operable period does not occur, and if the right symbol is stopped at time t10 so as to reach the reach display, the game is performed during the first cancellation period. A non-battle effect similar to the case where the person performs a pressing operation on the pressing operation device 261 is started by the control of the sub-control board 940.

  It should be noted that the non-battle effect production time that starts at time t10 when the player operates the pressing operation device 261 in the second cancellation period is the first cancel unless the second special effect is the pattern 2D. It is shorter than the battle effect started at time t7 because the player operated the pressing operation device 261 in the period.

  The display data of the battle effect that starts at time t10 when the player operates the pressing operation device 261 during the second cancellation period is also the time t7 when the player operates the pressing operation device 261 during the first cancellation period. Is prepared in the ROM of the sub-control board 940 in the same manner as the display data of the battle effect started at.

  Although not shown in FIG. 19, in the third operable period, the player does not operate the pressing operation device 261 in the first cancellation period, and the player does not operate the pressing operation device 261 in the second cancellation period. Starting at time t7. Note that, when the third operable period occurs, at least a battle effect appears as an suggested effect regardless of whether or not the player operates the pressing operation device 261 in the third operable period.

  Next, the operation and effect of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment described above will be described.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, among a plurality of suggestion effects (first special effect, second special effect, third special effect, battle effect) that can appear during one fluctuation display, Since the player can cancel the execution of the second and subsequent suggestion effects (second special effect, third special effect, and battle effect), the suggestion effect that appears later, It is possible to suppress a situation indicating that the possibility of transitioning to the special game state is lower than the suggestion effect that appears first. Therefore, the player loses the expectation for the occurrence of the special game state due to the content of the suggestion effect that appears later, and thereby, it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest in the game.

<Third Embodiment>
Next, a third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the pachinko machine 100 according to the third embodiment, when the pressing operation device 261 is operated during an operable period that occurs during the variation display of the decoration symbol, the decoration design of the pachinko machine 100 that is a predetermined suggestive effect is the own machine. While displayed on the display device 479, when the selection operation device 263 is operated during the operable period, a predetermined suggestive effect is configured to be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479 of the other pachinko machine 100. . In the following description, the same components as those in the first embodiment described above are denoted by the same reference numerals and description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 20 shows a pachinko machine 100 according to the third embodiment (hereinafter, this pachinko machine is also referred to as a “pachinko machine 100A” for convenience) and another pachinko machine that is communicably connected to the pachinko machine 100. It is a schematic diagram showing a machine 100 (hereinafter, this pachinko machine is also referred to as “pachinko machine 100B” for convenience).

  As shown in FIG. 20, the pachinko machine 100A is communicably connected to the pachinko machine 100B via the LAN 651. Note that the connection between the pachinko machine 100A and the pachinko machine 100B is not limited to the LAN 651, and may be a direct connection using a cable or the like, or a wireless connection based on various standards such as Bluetooth (registered trademark).

  Further, the pachinko machine 100B that is a communication partner of the pachinko machine 100A may be a pachinko machine 100 installed at a specific position with respect to the pachinko machine 100A, such as right next to the pachinko machine 100A, or a game hall ( Among the plurality of pachinko machines 100 installed in the hall), a predetermined pachinko machine 100 designated from the pachinko machine 100A may be used. Note that one or a plurality of pachinko machines 100B as communication partners of the pachinko machine 100A may be used.

  In the pachinko machine 100A, when an operable period (for example, the first operable period in the first embodiment) occurs during the decorative symbol variation display, the player pushes the pressing operation device 261 during the operable period. In this case, the suggestion effect (for example, the first special effect in the first embodiment) corresponding to the operable period is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479 of the pachinko machine 100A that is the own device.

  On the other hand, when the player performs a direction operation in a predetermined direction (for example, the right direction) on the selection operation device 263 during the operable period generated in the pachinko machine 100A, the suggestion effect corresponding to the operable period is related. Information is transmitted via the LAN 651 to the pachinko machine 100B that is predetermined as a communication partner.

  The information (information relating to the suggestion effect corresponding to the operable period) transmitted from the pachinko machine 100A to the pachinko machine 100B is selected by the pattern selected as the suggestion effect (for example, the first special effect lottery in the first embodiment). Information indicating the pattern of the first special effect). Transmission of information to the pachinko machine 100B is performed under the control of the sub-control board 940 of the pachinko machine 100A.

  When the pachinko machine 100B receives the information from the pachinko machine 100A, the pachinko machine 100B performs the suggestion effect of the pattern selected by the pachinko machine 100A based on the received information, that is, the player pushes the pressing operation device 261 in the operable period. In this case, the suggestion effect (for example, the first special effect in the first embodiment) displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479 of the pachinko machine 100A is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479 of the pachinko machine 100B. The display control in the pachinko machine 100B is performed by the control of the sub control board 940 of the pachinko machine 100B.

  That is, in the pachinko machine 100A according to the present embodiment, when the player pushes the pressing operation device 261 during the operable period that occurs during the decorative symbol variation display, the suggested effect corresponding to the operable period is included. Can be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479 of the pachinko machine 100A that is the player's own device, and when the player performs a predetermined direction operation on the selection operation device 263 during the operable period, The suggestive effect corresponding to the possible period can be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479 of the pachinko machine 100B which is another pachinko machine.

  When the pachinko machine 100B displays the suggestion effect on the decorative symbol display device 479 of the pachinko machine 100B based on the information received from the pachinko machine 100A, the pachinko machine 100B controls the sub control board 940 of the pachinko machine 100B. A reduced screen of a screen (for example, a screen on which variable display is performed) displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479 of the pachinko machine 100B based on the game is displayed on a predetermined area (for example, a screen) of the decorative symbol display device 479. Displayed in the lower right part of).

  Next, the operation and effect of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment described above will be described.

  In the pachinko machine 100A of the present embodiment, when the pressing operation device 261 is operated during an operable period that occurs during the decorative symbol variation display, a suggestion effect is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479 of the pachinko machine 100A that is the own machine. On the other hand, when the selection operation device 263 is operated during the operable period, the suggestion effect is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479 of the other pachinko machine 100B.

  As described above, since the display position of the suggestion effect can be changed depending on whether the pressing operation device 261 or the selection operation device 263 is operated during the operable period, the suggestion effect is displayed according to the player's operation. Diversity can be given to the game, and the interest can be improved.

  In particular, when the selection operation device 263 is operated during the operable period, the suggestion effect is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479 of the other pachinko machine 100B, so that the suggestion effect is played on the other pachinko machine 100B. It can be viewed together with the player, and can provide an interest that is different from when playing alone.

<Fourth embodiment>
Next, a fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the pachinko machine 100 according to the fourth embodiment, when the selection operation device 263 is operated instead of the pressing operation device 261 during the operable period that occurs during the decorative symbol variation display, a predetermined suggestion effect is displayed on the decoration symbol display device. It is configured to be displayed in a different area from the area where the decorative symbol variation display in 479 is displayed. In the following description, the same components as those in the first embodiment described above are denoted by the same reference numerals and description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 21 is a screen diagram illustrating an example of display contents of the decorative symbol display device 479 when the selection operation device 263 is operated during an operable period that occurs during the decorative symbol variation display. In the pachinko machine 100, when a manipulatable period (for example, the first manipulatable period in the first embodiment) occurs during the decorative symbol variation display, the player pushes the pressing operation device 261 during the manipulatable period. In this case, the suggestion effect (for example, the first special effect in the first embodiment) corresponding to the operable period is displayed on the entire screen of the decorative symbol display device 479.

  On the other hand, when the player performs a direction operation in a predetermined direction (for example, the right direction) on the selection operation device 263 during the operable period generated in the pachinko machine 100, the operation can be performed as shown in FIG. The suggestive effect corresponding to the period is displayed in the right region 479A of the decorative symbol display device 479.

  In contrast to the right area 479A in which the suggestive effect is displayed, the left area 479B has a display content when the player does not operate the pressing operation device 261 in the operable period (for example, the first area in the first embodiment). The change display after one operation possible period) is displayed.

  When the suggestion effect displayed in the right region 479A is completed, the continuation of the decorative symbol display is displayed on the entire screen of the decorative symbol display device 479. Alternatively, the continuation display of the decorative symbols may be displayed in the left region 479B and nothing may be displayed in the right region 479A, and the decorative symbol variation display may be continued in the left and right regions 479A and 479B. May be displayed.

  Note that all the controls related to the display in the present embodiment are performed by the sub-control board 940.

  Next, the operation and effect of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment described above will be described.

  In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, when the selection operation device 263 is operated instead of the pressing operation device 261 in the operable period that occurs during the variation display of the decoration symbol, the suggestion effect is displayed on the decoration symbol on the decoration symbol display device 479. It is displayed in a different area from the area where the variable display is displayed.

  As described above, since the display position of the suggestion effect can be changed depending on whether the pressing operation device 261 or the selection operation device 263 is operated during the operable period, the suggestion effect is displayed according to the player's operation. Diversity can be given to the game, and the interest can be improved.

  In addition, the player provides a suggestion effect displayed by operating the selection operation device 263 and contents displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479 when neither the pressing operation device 261 nor the selection operation device 263 is operated. Can be watched at the same time, so that the interest in the game is preferably improved.

<Fifth Embodiment>
Next, a fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the pachinko machine 100 according to the first embodiment, when the number of times that the right of each unit game related to the first special symbol and the second special symbol is held reaches the maximum number (the upper limit of the number of times of holding), The appearance probability of the reserved full tank effect is different depending on whether or not the holding is included in the special symbol lottery (the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery).

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 100 of the fifth embodiment, when the number of hold times of the right of each unit game related to the first special symbol and the second special symbol has reached the maximum number (the upper limit of the hold number). The appearance probability of the reserved full tank effect differs depending on how many times the arrival is within a predetermined period. In the following description, the same components as those in the first embodiment described above are denoted by the same reference numerals and description thereof is omitted.

  Specifically, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the appearance probability of the reserved full tank effect increases as the number of times each of the number of holdings for the first special symbol and the second special symbol reaches the maximum number in a predetermined period. It is configured so that there is a portion where the height becomes high. Hereinafter, the “predetermined period” is also referred to as a “pending count monitoring period”.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 22, when the number of holdings for each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol has reached the maximum number of times for the first time during a predetermined period, If it is the second time, it will appear with a probability of 70%. If it is the second time, it will appear with a probability of 70%. If it is the third time, it will appear with a probability of 80%. If it is the fourth time or later, the reserved full tank effect will appear with a probability of 95%.

  Here, when the number of holdings for the first special symbol and the second special symbol reaches the upper limit for a plurality of times during a predetermined period, not only the appearance probability of the reserved full tank effect but also the contents of the effect are different. It is good also as a structure to allow. A privilege may be given to the player when the appearance of the reserved full tank effect is selected over a predetermined period of time over a predetermined number of times. Only when the appearance of the reserved full tank effect is selected, the reserved full tank effect may be executed by an effect using a different character for each number of times, or the reserved full tank effect may be performed multiple times during a predetermined period. If the appearance of the tongue effect is selected, the display of the variable display of the decorative pattern described above can be restored during the special game state thereafter, and the number of times the appearance of the reserved full tank effect is selected during the predetermined period. The greater the number, the greater the number of times that restoration is possible. Thereby, even if the appearance of the reserved full tank effect is selected once and the reserved full tank effect is executed, the game is continued for the player so that the number of times of the hold reaches the upper limit again during the predetermined period. It is possible to suppress the situation in which the game machine is interrupted and the operation of the gaming machine is reduced because the player sees the reserved full tank effect.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the number-of-holds monitoring period starts from the point in time when the number of times of each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol reaches the maximum number at a certain time. The period until digested (that is, until the unit game relating to the first or second special symbol is performed the maximum number of times).

  The period from the start point until the unit game related to the first or second special symbol is played a predetermined number of times more or less than the maximum number may be set as the holding number monitoring period. The period until the given time elapses may be set as the suspension count monitoring period. Further, the starting point of the holding number monitoring period is not limited to the time when each holding number for the first special symbol and the second special symbol has reached the maximum number, but a predetermined time (for example, 0 minutes per hour). It may be the time when the player gives an instruction by a predetermined method.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the reserved full tank effect lottery is the same as the pachinko machine 100 of the first embodiment, in which the sub-control board 940 has the maximum number of each hold for the first special symbol and the second special symbol. When the number of times is reached, the value of the reserved full tank effect counter (part of the RAM) provided on the sub control board 940 is acquired, and the value of the reserved full tank effect counter is set to the value of the sub control board 940. This is done by referring to the reserved full tank effect selection table prepared in the ROM.

  As the reserved full tank effect selection table of the present embodiment, it is referred to when each of the number of holding times for the first special symbol and the second special symbol has reached the maximum number in the first time in the holding number monitoring period. A first table, a second table to be referred to when it is the second time, a third table to be referred to when it is the third time, and a fourth table to be referred to when it is the fourth time and thereafter are prepared.

  The first table is set so that the appearance of the reserved full tank effect is selected with a predetermined probability (for example, 50% probability as in the example shown in FIG. 22), and the second table is also predetermined. It is set so that the appearance of the reserved full production effect is selected with the given probability (for example, the probability of 70% as in the example shown in FIG. 22). Similarly, the third table and the fourth table are set such that the appearance of the reserved full tank effect is selected with a predetermined probability.

  The sub-control board 940 has a period flag (partial area of the RAM) that is set when it is in the hold count monitoring period, and the number of hold times for the first special symbol and the second special symbol during the hold count monitoring period. Each includes an arrival counter (a part of the RAM) that counts the number of times the maximum number of times has been reached, and a remaining period counter (a part of the RAM) that counts the remaining period of the suspension count monitoring period. The initial values of the arrival counter and the remaining period counter are “0”.

  The sub control board 940 sets the period flag and sets the arrival counter to 1 when the number of holding times for each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol reaches the maximum number in a state where the period flag is not set. The sum of the upper limit values of the number of holding times for the first special symbol and the second special symbol (“8” in this embodiment) is set in the remaining period counter. Then, the sub control board 940 performs the reserved full tank effect lottery with reference to the first table, and executes the reserved full tank effect when the appearance of the reserved full tank effect is selected.

  When the period flag is set, the sub control board 940 adds 1 to the arrival counter when each of the number of holding times for the first special symbol and the second special symbol reaches the maximum number, and from the remaining period counter 1 is subtracted. Then, the sub control board 940 performs a reserved full tank effect lottery with reference to a table corresponding to the value of the arrival counter in the reserved full tank effect selection table, and when the appearance of the reserved full tank effect is selected. Execute the hold full tank production.

  Further, when the value of the remaining period counter becomes “0” due to the update of the remaining period counter, the sub control board 940 cancels the setting of the period flag and determines that the arrival counter Is set to “0” which is an initial value.

  In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the sub control board 940 performs the reserved full tank effect lottery, but the main control board 920 holds the same as the reserved full tank effect lottery performed by the sub control board 940. It is good also as a structure which performs a full tank production lottery. In such a configuration, when the appearance of the reserved full tank effect is selected in the reserved full tank effect lottery, the main control board 920 notifies the sub control board 940 of information to that effect, and the sub control board 940. Performs a reserved full effect when the information is received from the main control board 920.

  Next, the operation and effect of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment described above will be described.

  In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, when the number of reserved times of the right of each unit game related to the first special symbol and the second special symbol has reached the maximum number (the upper limit of the number of reserved times), the arrival is predetermined. Depending on the number of times of arrival in the period, the appearance probability of the reserved full tank effect is configured to be different.

  Therefore, within the predetermined period, if the number of holds for each special symbol reaches the upper limit again, it is easier for the suggested effect to appear than if the number of times the hold has reached the upper limit before that. With the purpose of increasing the number of holdings for each special symbol, the player can face a game in which a game ball is launched aiming to enter the starting device related to each special symbol. Thereby, a player's willingness to play can be improved.

<Sixth Embodiment>
Next, a sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The pachinko machine 100 according to the sixth embodiment is configured to easily increase the number of times that the unit game rights related to the first special symbol and the second special symbol are reserved (to easily store the reserve). In the following description, the same components as those in the first embodiment described above are denoted by the same reference numerals and description thereof is omitted.

  In the special game state, the number of times that the unit game related to the special symbol is likely to reach the upper limit tends to reach the upper limit by the game ball launched during the special game state, so when the reach display appears in the decorative symbol variation display, The player who sees it stops firing the game ball so as not to increase the number of holdings before the occurrence of the special game state (that is, during the fluctuation display) in consideration of the occurrence of the special game state thereafter. There are many cases. That is, the appearance of the reach display in the decorative symbol variation display can be one of the reasons that the number of unit games related to the special symbol is difficult to increase.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, when the variable display including the reach display is selected as the decorative symbol variable display executed by the decorative symbol display device 479 (that is, the sub control board 940 is the main control board 940). When a variation pattern command corresponding to a variation display including a reach display is received from the control board 920), when there is a hold that is won in the special symbol lottery in the hold for the first special symbol or the second special symbol Is configured to execute a variation display including a variation display that does not include a reach display (that is, a complete loss variation display) for a plurality of times with a predetermined probability and the same variation display time (variation time) as the selected variation display. Is done.

  For example, FIG. 23A is a time chart showing an example of a variable display including a reach display. In this example, the variable display time of the variable display is 60 seconds. When the right symbol is stopped and the reach display is generated in the variable display including the reach display, the player tends to stop the game ball from being fired for a relatively long period until the middle symbol stops thereafter.

  On the other hand, FIG. 23B is a time chart showing an example of complete loss variation display. The variation display time of the variation display including the reach display is configured to be longer than the variation display time of the complete loss variation display. In this example, the variable display time of the variable display is 20 seconds.

  FIG. 23 (c) is a time chart showing a variation display with a variation display time of 60 seconds, which is composed of a complete loss variation display with a variation display time of 20 seconds. As shown in FIG. 23 (c), by repeating the complete loss variation display shown in FIG. 23 (b) three times, the same variable display time as the variable display including the reach display shown in FIG. Second) fluctuation display.

  In addition, for each of the variable displays including the reach display prepared in advance in the ROM of the sub-control board 940, the complete loss change display is selected to constitute the variable display of the same variable display time as the variable display including the reach display. Information defining how to combine them is prepared in the ROM of the sub-control board 940 in advance. Based on the information, the sub-control board 940 configures the variable display by combining the complete loss variation display as a target so that the variation display time is the same as the variation display including the reach display.

  On the other hand, when the variable display including the reach display is selected as the variable display of the decorative symbol executed in the decorative symbol display device 479, the special symbol lottery is won during the hold for the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Even if there is no hold currently held, as well as when there is a hold that has been won in the special symbol lottery, a complete loss change display with the same change display time as the selected change display is displayed multiple times with a predetermined probability. A variable display including is configured to be executed.

  However, in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the probability that a variation display including a complete loss variation display for a plurality of times is executed by winning the special symbol lottery during the hold for the first special symbol or the second special symbol. The case where there is a hold that is present is higher than the case where there is no hold that is won in the special symbol lottery among the hold for the first special symbol or the second special symbol.

  A lottery (hereinafter, also referred to as “non-reach mode lottery”) as to whether or not to execute a variation display including a plurality of complete loss variation displays is performed under the control of the sub-control board 940. Specifically, in the non-reach mode lottery, when the sub-control board 940 receives a change pattern command corresponding to a change display including a reach display from the main control board 920, a selection counter provided on the sub-control board 940 ( This is performed by obtaining the value of a part of the RAM) and referring to the selection table prepared in the ROM of the sub-control board 940 for the value of the selection counter.

  The selection counter is updated every predetermined time (for example, every 4 ms (milliseconds)), and when the value of the counter is different from a specified maximum value (for example, “99”) at the update timing, When the counter value is a specified maximum value, the value is changed to a specified minimum value (“0”).

  As the selection table, there is a first table to be referred to when there is a special symbol lottery in the hold for the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and a hold for the first special symbol or the second special symbol. And a second table to be referred to when there is no holding for winning the special symbol lottery. The first table has a predetermined probability (for example, a probability of 80%), and execution of variation display including a plurality of complete loss variation displays for the same variation display time as the variation display indicated by the received variation pattern command is selected. To be set. The second table is also capable of executing a variation display including a complete loss variation display for a plurality of times with a predetermined probability (for example, a probability of 10%) and the same variation display time as the variation display indicated by the received variation pattern command. Set to be selected.

  In the non-reach mode lottery, the sub-control board 940, when the execution of the variation display including a plurality of complete loss variation displays for the same variation display time as the variation display indicated by the received variation pattern command is selected, the complete loss variation Executes variable display including multiple displays.

  When the variation display indicated by the reach variation pattern received from the main control board 920 generates a special game state (that is, the special symbol lottery is won), the sub control board 940 displays the complete loss variation display. Control is performed so that the stop symbol (determined display) in the variable display composed of the combination of the above becomes a big hit symbol.

  FIG. 23 illustrates the case where the variation display time of the variable display including the reach display is an integral multiple of the variation display time of the complete loss variation display. However, the variation display time of the variable display including the reach display is the complete loss of time. If the variable display time is not an integral multiple of the variable display time of the variable display, the sub control board 940 extends or shortens each variable display time of one or a plurality of complete loss variable displays, so that the overall variable display time is Control is performed so that the variation display time (variation display including reach display) corresponding to the reach variation pattern received from the control board 920 is reached.

  Next, the operation and effect of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment described above will be described.

  In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, when the variable display including the reach display is selected as the decorative symbol variable display, the special symbol lottery is won during the hold for the first special symbol or the second special symbol. If there is a pending display, a fluctuation display that includes the fluctuation display that does not include the reach display (that is, the complete loss fluctuation display) of the same fluctuation display time as the selected fluctuation display is performed at a predetermined probability. Configured to

  Thus, by making it difficult to execute the variable display including the reach display, it is possible to suppress an event that the player stops the launch of the game ball when the reach display appears. In addition, it is possible to easily increase the number of times that the right of each unit game related to the second special symbol is held (to easily store the hold). Therefore, in the configuration in which the above-described reserved full tank effect is performed, the reserved full tank effect can be easily generated because the reservation for each special symbol is easily accumulated, so that the player cannot see the reserved full tank effect. This makes it difficult to hold dissatisfaction and suppresses the decline of interest in games.

  Instead of a variable display that includes a reach display, a variable display that does not include a reach display is displayed in place of a variable display that includes a reach display only if the special symbol lottery is held among the special symbols. Therefore, when there is a holding that is won in the special symbol lottery among the holdings for each special symbol, the holding is easier to accumulate than when there is no holding that is won in the special symbol lottery. Therefore, if there is a special symbol lottery hold among the special symbol lots, it will be easier to produce a full hold effect than when there is no special symbol lottery hold. The situation where the player is expected to generate a special gaming state can be created by the appearance of the reserved full tank effect. As a result, it is possible to add a sense of feeling to the progress of the game, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

  In addition, since a variable display that includes multiple variable displays that do not include a reach display appears instead of a variable display that includes a reach display, the variable display time corresponding to the variable display including the reach display is not included. It is not necessary to have dedicated display data for variable display, and display data for variable display that does not include reach display and that has a shorter display time than variable display that includes reach display can be used. Thereby, the consumption of the storage capacity in the pachinko machine 100 is suitably suppressed.

<Seventh embodiment>
Next, a seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the pachinko machine 100 according to the first embodiment, the decoration symbols are displayed (variation display, stop display) on the screen of the decoration symbol display device 479. However, in the pachinko machine 100 according to the seventh embodiment, Cylindrical reels 711L, 711M, and 711R having decorative symbols drawn on the outer peripheral surface are provided side by side, and these reels 711L, 711M, and 711R are rotated to display the decorative symbols in a variable manner. In the following description, the same components as those in the first to sixth embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof is omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 24 and FIG. 25, the structural configuration in the game board 400X of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 24 is a front view of the game board 400X in the pachinko machine 100 according to the seventh embodiment, FIG. 25 (a) is a front view of the reel device 710, and FIG. 25 (b) is a middle reel. It is a front view of 711M.

  Similarly to the game board 400, the game board 400 </ b> X also includes a game area formed in a substantially circular shape on the front side of the base body 401 by the outer rail 402 and the inner rail 403, and a game ball launched from the launcher 330. When the game ball enters the game area beyond the return ball prevention mechanism 404, the game ball moves (flows down) while falling in the game area due to its own weight.

  As shown in FIG. 24, the game board 400 </ b> X is provided with a flow changing member such as a nail 411 and a windmill 412, a central structure 420 disposed substantially at the center of the base body 401, and the like. At the same time, the upper start winning device 1431 disposed below the central structure 420, the lower start winning device 1432 disposed below the upper start winning device 1431, and the lower start winning device 1432. A large winning device 1434 arranged on the lower side and starting devices 1436A, 1436B arranged on the left and right sides of the central structure 420 are provided. Here, like the middle start winning device 431, the upper start winning device 1431 is a winning device in which two winning devices (specifically, the left starting winning device 1431A and the right starting winning device 1431B) are integrated.

  The game board 400X includes a switch (detection means) for detecting the passage of a game ball corresponding to the left and right start winning devices 1431A and 1431B, the lower start winning device 1432, and the left and right starting devices 1436A and 1436B, respectively. (Not shown) are provided, and the entry of a game ball into a predetermined area corresponding to each switch can be detected.

  Specifically, a left start winning switch that detects a game ball that has entered the left start winning device 1431A, a right start winning switch that detects a game ball that has entered the right start winning device 1431B, and a game that has entered the lower start winning device 1432 The lower start winning switch for detecting the ball, the big winning switch for detecting the game ball that has entered the big winning device 1434, the left start switch for detecting the game ball that has entered the left starting device 1436A, and the right starting device 1436B. A right start switch for detecting a game ball is installed on the game board 400. Each of these switches is connected to the main control board 920 in the same manner as the general winning switches 449A and 449B (see FIG. 10) for detecting the game balls that have entered the general winning devices 439A and 439B, respectively.

  In the following, for the sake of convenience, the above left start winning switch, right start winning switch, lower start winning switch, large winning switch, left start switch, and right start switch are referred to as “left start winning switch 1441A”, “ They are also referred to as “right start winning switch 1441B”, “lower start winning switch 1442”, “large winning switch 1444”, “left start switch 1446A”, and “right start switch 1446B”.

  The entrance portions of the game balls in the left start winning device 1431A, the right start winning device 1431B, the lower start winning device 1432, and the large winning device 1434 constitute a winning opening, and the gaming balls that have entered each winning opening are formed on the base body 401. It is guided to a recovery / discharge passage (not shown) formed on the back side of the base body 401 through the formed through hole. On the other hand, game balls that have not entered each winning device are guided to the collection / discharge passage through the discharge port 401A. When a game ball enters one of the winning devices, a predetermined number of gaming balls corresponding to the type of the winning device are paid out from the payout device 540 (see FIGS. 8 and 9). For each of the above winning devices, the entrance portions of the game balls in the left starter 1436A and the right starter 1436B constitute a entrance, and the game balls that have entered each entrance are released into the game area.

  The left start winning device 1431A is a start device related to the first special symbol, similarly to the left middle start winning device 431A, and the right start winning device 1431B is the start related to the second special symbol like the right middle start winning device 431B. Device. That is, the upper start winning device 1431 is a winning device having two functions as a starting device related to the first special symbol and a starting device related to the second special symbol.

  The upper start winning device 1431 includes a distribution unit (not shown in FIG. 24) that distributes the game balls that have entered from the entrance 1611 to either the left start winning device 1431A or the right start winning device 1431B. The distribution unit is provided on the back side of the base body 401, and the game balls that have entered from the entrance 1611 are guided to the back side of the base body 401 through a passage (not shown) and used for sorting by the distribution unit. .

  As with the allocating unit 620, the allocating unit of the upper start winning device 1431 is configured such that each time a game ball enters from the entrance 1611, the award devices 1431A and 1431B that are the game ball distribution destinations are alternately switched. . Thereby, the game balls that have entered the upper start winning device 1431 basically enter the left start winning device 1431A or the right start winning device 1431B alternately.

  The upper start winning device 1431 is configured so that the probability of entering the entrance 1611 does not change. On the other hand, the upper start winning device 1431 does not allow a part of the game ball that has entered from the entrance 1611 to enter the start winning devices 1431A and 1431B on the left and right sides. It has a function of discharging from the outlet to a recovery discharge passage (not shown). That is, part of the game balls that have entered the upper start winning device 1431 through the entrance 1611 are discharged into the collection / discharge passage without entering any of the left and right start winning devices 1431A and 1431B. In addition, the probability that the game ball that has entered from the entrance 1611 is discharged into the collection and discharge passage without entering the start winning devices 1431A and 1431B is, for example, about 1/100, and preferably about 1/1000. It may be.

  The lower start winning device 1432 is a starting device according to the second special symbol, like the right start winning device 432. Similar to the right start winning device 432, the lower start winning device 1432 has a mechanism for changing the entrance probability of the game ball therein. Note that the mechanism for changing the entrance probability of the game ball need not be provided only in the lower start prize-winning device 1432; instead of or in addition to that, one of other prize-winning devices such as the upper start prize-winning device 1431 or A plurality of them may be provided. In addition, the mechanism for changing the entrance probability of the game ball may be constituted by a drive means such as an electrically driven solenoid, and is represented by a mechanism that operates by the weight of the game ball that has entered the predetermined area. You may comprise by the mechanism which operate | moves mechanically.

  Similar to the right start winning device 432, the lower start winning device 1432 includes an entry restriction mechanism 1452 that changes the probability of entering a game ball into the inside by a transition between an allowed entry posture and an entry prohibited posture, and an entry restriction. And an entry restriction solenoid (not shown) for driving the mechanism 1452. The entry restriction solenoid that drives the entry restriction mechanism 1452 is connected to the main control board 920 in the same manner as the right entry restriction solenoid 462 (see FIG. 10). Hereinafter, the entry restriction solenoid that drives the entry restriction mechanism 1452 is also referred to as an “entry restriction solenoid 1462” for convenience.

  The entry restriction mechanism 1452 includes two movable pieces driven by the entry restriction solenoid 1462. When the entry restriction mechanism 1452 is in the entry prohibition posture, the two movable pieces constrict the entrance (winning port). The game ball cannot enter the lower starting prize-winning device 1432 by taking (or closing) the arrangement, but when the entry restricting mechanism 1452 is in the entry permitting posture, the two movable pieces are spaced apart from each other at their tip portions. The game ball can enter the lower start prize-winning device 1432 by taking such an arrangement that is expanded.

  When the entry restricting mechanism 1452 wins in a lottery (hereinafter also referred to as “normal symbol lottery”) based on detection of a game ball that has entered the left and right starting devices 1436A, 1436B related to the normal symbol by the start switch 1446. In response to the drive by the entry restriction solenoid 1462, the posture is allowed to enter the predetermined number of times and for a predetermined time.

  Like the top prize winning device 434, the grand prize winning device 1434 includes an entry restriction mechanism 1454 for restricting the entry of a game ball into the inside by a transition between an approach allowance posture and an entry prohibition posture, and an entrance restriction mechanism 1454. And an entry restriction solenoid (not shown) for changing the posture. Note that the entry restriction solenoid that changes the posture of the entry restriction mechanism 1454 is connected to the main control board 920 in the same manner as the upper entry restriction solenoid 464 (see FIG. 10). Hereinafter, the entry restriction solenoid that changes the attitude of the entry restriction mechanism 1454 is also referred to as an “entry restriction solenoid 1464” for convenience.

  The entry restriction mechanism 1454 includes a plate-like movable piece that is disposed on the front side of the big prize device 1434 and is driven by the entry restriction solenoid 1464. When the entry restriction mechanism 1454 is in the entry prohibition posture, When the movable piece closes the entrance (winning port), the game ball cannot enter the big prize device 1434. However, when the entry restricting mechanism 1454 is in the allowed entry posture, the movable piece moves forward with the lower side as an axis. The game ball can enter the big prize device 1434 by being pushed down and opening the entrance.

  The big winning device 1434 allows a game ball to enter when winning the lottery. Specifically, if the game ball that has entered the left starting prize winning device 1431A related to the first special symbol is won by a lottery based on detection by the left starting prize winning switch 1441A (that is, the first special symbol lottery), or The lottery based on the fact that the game ball that has entered the right start winning device 1431B or the lower start winning device 1432 according to the second special symbol is detected by the right start winning switch 1441B or the lower start winning switch 1442 (ie, the second special winning symbol) When the special symbol lottery is won, the entry restriction solenoid 1464 of the big prize device 1434 is activated. As a result of this operation, the entry restriction mechanism 1454 takes the entry allowable posture for a predetermined time over a predetermined number of times.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 24, a reel device 710 is provided in the opening of the central structure 420 on the game board 400 as a device for displaying decorative symbols instead of the decorative symbol display device 479 (variable display, stop display). Is provided. The reel device 710 is attached to a plate-like base 701 disposed on the back side of the game board 400.

  As shown in FIG. 25A, the reel device 710 includes three rotating bodies arranged side by side in the left-right direction, that is, a left reel 711L, a middle reel 711M, and a right reel (right symbol row) formed in a cylindrical shape. 711R. The left reel 711L constitutes the left symbol row, the middle reel 711M constitutes the middle symbol row, and the right reel 711R constitutes the right symbol row.

  Each of the reels 711L, 711M, 711R is rotatably supported so that the central axis thereof is the rotation axis of the reels 711L, 711M, 711R. The rotation axes of the reels 711L, 711M, and 711R are arranged on the same axis extending in a substantially horizontal direction.

  Each of these reels 711L, 711M, and 711R is connected to a reel drive motor (not shown) made of a stepping motor, and is rotated by the drive of each reel drive motor. In the following, for convenience, the reel drive motors connected to the left reel 711L, middle reel 711M, and right reel 711R are referred to as “reel drive motor 721L”, “reel drive motor 721M”, and “reel drive motor 721M”, respectively. Also referred to as “reel drive motor 721R”.

  The reel drive motors 721L, 721M, and 721R are all connected to the sub-control board 940, and are driven independently under the control of the sub-control board 940. Thereby, each reel 711L, 711M, and 711R can be rotated individually, ie, each independently.

  In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the decorative symbols are drawn on the outer peripheral surfaces of the reels 711L, 711M, and 711R, and the reels 711L, 711M, and 711R are individually rotated to rotate the decorative symbols. Fluctuation display is realized. The decorative symbol is composed of a main symbol 712 and a sub symbol 713 formed smaller than the main symbol 712.

  The main symbol 712 is a symbol that can constitute a jackpot symbol. The main symbol 712 is configured as a symbol including information (hereinafter, this information is referred to as “numeric information”) that defines individual numerical values such as numbers and characters corresponding to the numbers. In the present embodiment, the main symbol 712 is “1”. To “9”, and the jackpot symbol is composed of a combination of three identical main symbols 712 arranged side by side.

  The main symbols 712 are sequentially arranged so that the numbers “1” to “9” circulate around the reels 711L, 711M, and 711R. More specifically, in the left reel 711L and the right reel 711R, the main symbols 712 to which numbers other than a part (specifically, “4”) from “1” to “9” are attached are: The reels 711L and 711R are arranged so as to change in descending order when the reels 711L and 711R are rotated clockwise as viewed from the left side when viewed from the front. On the other hand, in the middle reel 711M, each main symbol 712 with numbers “1” to “9” changes in ascending order when the middle reel 711M rotates clockwise as viewed from the left side when viewed from the front. Are arranged as follows. In addition, although the example corresponding to the structure in which the sub-symbol 713 is arranged at the location corresponding to “4”, the main symbol 712 with the number “4” is included in each reel 711L, 711M, 711R. Also good.

  The sub-symbol 713 is a symbol that cannot constitute a jackpot symbol. In the present embodiment, the sub symbol 713 is configured as a symbol having a predetermined pattern that does not include numeric information. The sub symbol 713 includes a first sub symbol 713A provided on each of the reels 711L, 711M, and 711R, and a second sub symbol 713B provided on the middle reel 711M as shown in FIG. 25B. .

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the second sub-design 713B is arranged between the main symbol 712 with the number “3” and the main symbol 712 with the number “5” on the middle reel 711M. Is done. The second sub symbol 713B is provided in place of the symbol “4” in the main symbol 712, and is a large symbol so that the player can easily recognize it compared to the first sub symbol 713A as the other sub symbol 713. It is constituted by.

  In addition, the first sub-design 713A includes the reels 711L, 711M, and 711R except for the portion between the main design 712 with the number “3” and the main design 712 with the number “5” on the middle reel 711M. It arrange | positions between each main symbol 712 arrange | positioned.

  Each reel 711L, 711M, 711R is arranged with its front side protruding forward from the front surface of the base body 701, and has a substantially semicircular cross section when viewed from the left side when viewed from the front. Covered with a resin cover. The resin cover is configured as a light guide plate in which a predetermined decorative design (for example, a school of fish) is formed by fine irregularities on one side (for example, the back side), and at least one side (for example, upper, lower, left, and right) of the resin cover (for example, By irradiating light from light emitting units (not shown) provided on both the upper side and the lower side, the image of the predetermined decorative design can be displayed so as to be visible from the front.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 24, the game board 400 has a holding lamp 720 for displaying the number of holdings of the unit game related to the special symbol (the first special symbol and the second special symbol) in the opening of the central structure 420. In this case, the reel device 710 is provided at a lower position. The holding lamp 720 is configured by a number (8 in the present embodiment) capable of emitting light corresponding to the total of the upper limit values of the number of holding times for the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Specifically, a light emitting means such as an LED is provided on the back side of each holding lamp 720, and the sub-control board 940 controls the light emitting means, and the holding lamp 720 emits light having a light-transmitting property overlapping the front side of the light emitting means. The unit is configured to be turned on or off. The hold lamp 720 is connected to the sub-control board 940, and each lamp is individually turned on or off according to the increase / decrease of the number of times the unit game related to the special symbol is controlled by the sub-control board 940.

  Further, the game board 400 is provided with a lottery result display device 730 in the opening of the central structure 420 on the right side with respect to the holding lamp 720. The lottery result display device 730 is a device that suggests the lottery result of the reserved full tank effect to the player by a variable display different from the variable display related to the special symbol (the first special symbol and the second special symbol). (In the present embodiment, four lamps). The lottery result display device 730 is connected to the sub-control board 940, and each lamp is individually turned on or off under the control of the sub-control board 940.

  Here, the operation of the lottery result display device 730 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 26 is a front view for explaining the operation of the lottery result display device 730. In FIG. 26, the reel device 710 and the hold lamp 720 are displayed together.

  As shown in FIG. 26, the lottery result display device 730 includes four lamps 730A to 730D. The first lamp 730A is the smallest lamp among the lamps 730A to 730D and is disposed on the leftmost side. The second lamp 730B is the second smallest lamp and is disposed on the right side of the first lamp 730A. The third lamp 730C is the second largest lamp and is disposed on the right side of the second lamp 730B. The fourth lamp 730D is the largest lamp and is disposed on the right side of the third lamp 730C.

  During the decorative symbol variation display by the reel device 710, that is, while the reels 711L, 711M, and 711R are rotating, the number of reserved unit games related to the special symbols (the first special symbol and the second special symbol) reaches the upper limit. Then, in the lottery result display device 730, as shown in FIG. 26A, one of the lamps 730A to 730D is like a roulette one by one in the right direction (arrow Q direction) from the first lamp 730A. After the fourth lamp 730D is lit up so as to move sequentially, the display returns to the first lamp 730A again and the pattern of moving and turning on sequentially from the first lamp 730A is repeated. The display is also referred to as “ramp fluctuation display”).

  In the lamp fluctuation display by the lottery result display device 730, after the high-speed fluctuation in which the moving speed of the lighting lamps (lamp lighting intervals) in the lamps 730A to 730D is fast, the moving speed is gradually slowed down. At the timing when a predetermined variable display time has elapsed from the start of display, the lamp corresponding to the lottery result of the reserved full tank effect is turned on among the lamps 730A to 730D, and finally stopped (stopped display).

  More specifically, when the appearance of the reserved full tank effect is selected in the reserved full tank effect lottery, as shown in FIG. 26 (b), the lottery result display device 730 uses the lamps 730A to 730D. After the variable display is performed, the display is stopped when the fourth lamp 730D is turned on. On the other hand, when the appearance of the reserved full tank effect is not selected in the reserved full tank effect lottery, the lottery result display device 730 displays a lamp other than the fourth lamp 730D, that is, the first lamp 730A and the second lamp 730B. Or the third lamp 730 </ b> C.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the timing at which the stop display is performed in the lottery result display device 730 is confirmed after the reach display appears in the decorative symbol variation display performed in the reel device 710. The variation display time of the variation display (lamp variation display) by the lottery result display device 730 is adjusted so as to be out of the above period (hereinafter, this period is also referred to as “reach effect period”).

  Specifically, when the ramp fluctuation display by the lottery result display device 730 is started because the number of holdings of the unit game related to the special symbol (the first special symbol and the second special symbol) has reached the upper limit, the lamp fluctuation display is displayed. On the other hand, the elapse timing of a basic variation display time (for example, 3 seconds) determined in advance (that is, the timing at which stop display is performed in the lottery result display device 730) is reached in the variation display of decorative symbols performed in the reel device 710. In the production period, the fluctuation display time of the lamp fluctuation display is extended.

  The sub-control board 940 is being executed when the ramp fluctuation display by the lottery result display device 730 is started because the number of unit games held for the special symbol (the first special symbol and the second special symbol) has reached the upper limit. It is determined whether or not the decorative display of the decorative pattern is a variable display including a reach display.

  Next, the sub-control board 940 determines that the variation display of the decorative pattern being executed is the variation display including the reach display in the above determination, and the lamp variation display is performed for the basic variation display time. Then, it is determined whether it is time to stop display on the lottery result display device 730 during the reach effect period in the variation display of the decorative pattern being executed.

  Furthermore, if the sub-control board 940 determines in the above determination that the timing for stopping display in the lottery result display device 730 during the reach effect period in the variation display of the decorative symbol being executed, the lottery result display device 730 The variation display time of the lamp variation display is extended so that the stop display timing comes after the reach effect period in the variation display of the decorative pattern being executed ends (that is, after the final display is performed).

  For example, the lamp fluctuation display is performed so that the timing for stopping display in the lottery result display device 730 comes after a predetermined time (for example, after 3 seconds) from the timing at which the fixed display is displayed in the variation display of the decorative symbol being executed. Extend the variable display time. In addition, the variation display time of the lamp variation display may be extended so that the timing for the stop display of the lottery result display device 730 arrives at the timing when the confirmation display is displayed in the variation display of the decorative symbol being executed.

  Alternatively, a period from the timing when the lottery display is performed on the lottery result display device 730 when the ramp variation display is performed for the basic variation display time to the timing when the final display is displayed in the variation display of the decorative pattern being executed ( In the following, this period is also referred to as “reach effect remaining period”), and the fluctuation display time of the lamp fluctuation display may be extended by a uniform time. In this case, for example, if the remaining reach production period is 5 seconds or less, the fluctuation display time of the lamp fluctuation display is extended by 6 seconds, and if the remaining reach production period is 5 seconds or more and 10 seconds or less, the lamp fluctuation display is displayed. The variable display time may be extended by 11 seconds.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 27 to FIG. 29, a pre-reading effect executed by the pachinko machine 100 according to the seventh embodiment will be described. The “prefetching effect” is a kind of suggestion effect, and when the right of the unit game related to the special symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol) is suspended, the special symbol for the suspension is drawn. Based on the result, it is an effect of notifying about a specific gaming state (for example, a special gaming state) that occurs after the end of the unit game performed by digesting the suspension.

  Here, the pre-reading effect for notifying the specific game state that occurs after the end of the unit game may be an effect that always transitions to the specific game state when the effect occurs. An effect that may be executed even if the game state may transition to a specific gaming state but does not transition to a specific gaming state, and causes the player to expect a transition to a specific gaming state including. Further, the pre-reading effect is not limited to the effect of notifying the specific game state that occurs immediately after the end of the unit game in which the effect is executed, but the specific game state that occurs after one or more variable displays are executed. It may be an effect of giving a notice.

  FIG. 27 and FIG. 28 are schematic diagrams showing the transition of display by the reel device 710 when the second sub-sign warning is performed, and FIG. 29 is the transition of display by the reel device 710 when the countdown notification is performed. It is a schematic diagram which shows.

  The second sub-sign warning and countdown warning are both types of pre-reading effects. The sub-control board 940 determines whether or not to execute the pre-reading effect based on the predetermined effect target information received from the main control board 920, and what kind of pre-reading effect is executed when the pre-reading effect is executed. decide.

  Specifically, when a special design (first special symbol or second special design) winning prize is generated, the main control board 920 receives the starting prize based on the random number value acquired based on the occurrence of the starting prize. The corresponding special symbol lottery is performed, and the variation display time of the special symbol corresponding to the start winning is determined. This determination is performed before the variable display executed based on the start winning is started. The main control board 920 includes information corresponding to whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol lottery has been won (hereinafter also referred to as “win / failure correspondence information”), and the variable display time determined or to be determined. Information corresponding to (hereinafter also referred to as “variable display time correspondence information”) is set as production target information, and a command including the production target information is output to the sub-control board 940.

  Here, the production target information may be information selected or determined based on the value of the random number acquired by the main control board 920 based on the occurrence of the start winning, for example, information indicating whether or not the winning is changed Information indicating the display time may be used as the production target information. For example, information indicating the rough display time such as whether the display is variable including reach display is output as the variable display time correspondence information. Also good. Further, the obtained random number value itself is used as the production target information, and the random number value itself obtained by the main control board 920 is output to the sub control board 940, and the same selection is made on both the main control board 920 and the sub control board 940. It is good also as a structure including the control which determines the lottery result and fluctuation | variation display time of a special symbol lottery by the method.

  The command including the production target information may be a hold command or a command dedicated to output the production target information. Further, the production target information may include only the success / failure information without including the variable display time correspondence information. When the sub control board 940 receives the production target information from the main control board 920, the sub control board 940 receives the unit game corresponding to the production target information based on the production target information and the number of times the unit game rights related to the special symbol are reserved. It is determined whether or not to execute a pre-reading effect for notifying the gaming state that occurs after the end. If the sub-control board 940 determines the execution of the pre-reading effect, the sub-control board 940 determines the type of the pre-reading effect to be executed. When execution of the pre-reading effect is determined, the special symbol unit game for the effect target information corresponding to the pre-reading effect is also referred to as “pre-reading target variation display”.

  First, the second sub-sign warning will be described with reference to FIGS. 27 and 28. In the second sub-sign warning, the lost symbol including the second sub-design 713B of the middle reel 711M is displayed as a stop symbol on the middle line L2, which is one of the active lines, and then the pre-reading variation display is executed. This is a pre-reading effect that keeps the middle reel 711M stopped without changing (turning). The control of the second sub-sign warning is performed by the sub-control board 940, and the reels 711L, 711M, and 711R described below are controlled by the sub-control board 940.

  The “effective line” is a line that transitions to a special gaming state when a big hit symbol is displayed as a stop symbol on the line. In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 27, the uppermost upper line L1, the lowermost lower line L3, and the middle line L2 between the upper line L1 and the lower line L3. An active line is set. Note that the number of effective lines is not limited to the above-described form, and may be further increased to five effective lines including two effective lines that are inclined upward and downward to the right, or only limited to the middle line L2. May be.

  For example, when the start winning of the special symbol to be prefetched occurs in the state where the number of suspensions of the unit game of the special symbol is 2, as shown in FIG. 27, the display of the variation immediately before the prefetch target is started. Thereafter, the change display ends when the lost symbol including the second sub symbol 713B of the middle reel 711M is stopped and displayed on the middle line L2 which is one of the active lines as a stopped symbol.

  More specifically, the reels 711L, 711M, and 711R that fluctuate in the two-previous variation display to be prefetched first stop with the middle reel 711M displaying the second sub-pattern 713B on the middle line L2. To control. Since the second sub symbol 713B is a symbol that does not constitute a big hit symbol, the second sub symbol 713B is displayed on the middle line L2, so that the big hit symbol is not stopped and displayed on the middle line L2. It is indicated to the player that the lost symbol has already been stopped and displayed as the stopped symbol that is stopped and displayed at L2.

  When the middle reel 711M stops, the left reel 711M is then controlled to stop with the main symbol 712 displayed on the middle stage line L2. In each of the reels 711L, 711M, and 711R, the main symbol 712 and the sub symbol 713 (713A and 713B) are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction, so that the second sub symbol 713B of the middle reel 711M is stopped and displayed on the middle stage line L2. In this state, the main symbol 712 of the left reel 711R is stopped and displayed on the middle line L2, so that the symbol of the left reel 711L and the middle reel 711R are displayed on any of the upper line L1, the middle line L2, and the lower line L3. The reach display is not formed with the symbol of, and it is indicated to the player that the losing symbol has already been stopped on all the active lines L1 to L3.

  Control is performed so that the right reel 711R stops after the left reel 711L stops. The right reel 711R performs control so that the stop symbol that is stopped and displayed on the middle line L2 differs depending on whether the display is a variation display of the prefetch target or a variation display performed before the prefetch target. In the case of the variable display performed before the pre-reading object, control is performed so that the main symbol 712 or the sub symbol 713 that does not become reach display is stopped in combination with the main symbol 712 of the left reel 711L stopped on the middle line L2. To do. Therefore, in the variation display two times before the prefetch target, the player is informed that the reach display is not formed by the left and right reels 711L and 711R on any of the active lines, and the variation display is stopped with the lost symbol. indicate.

  After the end of the two-previous variation display for the pre-read target, the variable display (the first variation display for the pre-read target) is started in the unit game of the special symbol that is held next. In the variation display, the left and right reels 711L, 711L, 711L, 711L, and the The change of 711R is started.

  Note that “the state in which the middle reel 711M is stopped without being fluctuated (rotated)” is not limited to the complete stop of the middle reel 711M, and the second sub-pattern 713B is within a predetermined range including the middle line L2. For example, the second sub-pattern 713B is stopped while moving up and down within a range overlapping the virtual straight line as the middle stage line L2 in front view. Alternatively, this state may be a state where the middle reel 711M is stopped without changing (turning).

  The left and right reels 711L and 711R that fluctuate in the fluctuating display immediately before the prefetch target are controlled so that the left reel 711L stops in a state where any main symbol 712 is displayed on the middle line L2. Therefore, in the variation display, similarly to the above-described variation display two times before the look-ahead object, it is possible that the lost symbols have already been stopped and displayed on all the active lines in the situation where the right reel 711R is variably displayed. As shown in the figure, it is suppressed that the reach display is formed by the symbol of the left reel 711L and the symbol of the middle reel 711R.

  Here, in the pre-reading effect in the present embodiment, only the left reel 711L and the right reel 711R are changed, and the reach display is formed or not formed by these two reels 711L and 711R. In order to allow the player to pay attention to whether the main symbol 712 is formed, a change display that does not change the middle reel 711M is set. In this case, if a combination of the big hit symbols is stopped and displayed by the symbol of the left reel 711L and the symbol of the middle reel 711M, the player recognizes that the effect is to draw attention to the left reel 711L and the right reel 711R. There is a possibility that a reach display is formed by the left reel 711L and the right reel 711R, and it is expected to develop a special effect. Therefore, during execution of the pre-reading effect, when the left reel 711L stops, control is performed so that the reach display is not formed depending on the symbol of the left reel 711L and the symbol of the middle reel 711R.

  Note that the pre-reading effect is controlled by varying the probability (expected degree) of transition to the special gaming state depending on how many times the pre-reading effect is started from the pre-reading change display. It is preferable that control is performed such that the probability (expected degree) of transition to the special gaming state is set higher as the number of times the variable display is continuously executed is increased, and the main symbol 712 as a jackpot symbol is set. The number of award balls (for example, the number of rounds) that a player can acquire in the special game state is set differently according to the type of game, or the game state that transitions after the special game state is the main symbol 712 as a jackpot symbol Setting differently depending on the type is preferable because it is possible to draw attention to the type of the main symbol 712 constituting the reach display that is stopped and displayed on the left reel 711L and the right reel 711R in the pre-reading effect. Arbitrariness.

  After the stop of the left reel 711L, the main symbol 712 or the sub symbol which does not become reach display in combination with the main symbol 712 of the left reel 711L stopped on the middle line L2, similarly to the variation display before the variation display being executed. Control is performed so that the right reel 711R stops so that 713 is stopped. As a result, also in the variation display immediately before the prefetch target, reach is achieved by the left and right reels 711L and 711R on each of the effective lines L1, L2, and L3, similarly to the above-described variation display two times before the prefetch target. The player is shown in a state where no display is formed, and the variable display is stopped and displayed with a lost symbol.

  Here, as a stop control of the right reel 711R during the pre-reading effect, so that the player can pay attention to whether or not the reach display is combined with the main symbol 712 of the left reel 711L over time, The main symbol 712 of the right reel 711R (in this embodiment, the same main symbol 712) that can form a reach display in combination with the main symbol 712 of the left reel 711L is slightly above the middle line L2 on the upper side. Then, the movement is slowed down, and control is performed so that the speed is further lowered so as to stop at the position where it overlaps the middle stage line L2. In the variation display before the prefetch target, the main symbol 712 moves from the state where it seems to stop where it overlaps the middle line L2, the main symbol 712 stops at the lower line L3, and the middle line L2 The sub-symbol 713 may be controlled to stop.

  After the display of the variation immediately before the prefetch target is completed, the variation display of the prefetch target is started. Also in the variation display of the prefetch target, the left and right reels 711L and 711R are varied in a state where the middle reel 711M is stopped without being fluctuated, as in the above-described variation display two times before the prefetch target.

  As shown in FIG. 28, the left and right reels 711L and 711R that change in the pre-read target change display are controlled to form a reach display on the middle line L2 and stop display. For example, in the variable display of the prefetch target, the main symbol 712 that is the same as the main symbol 712 stopped on the left reel 711L is likely to stop when it overlaps the middle line L2, similarly to the above-described variable display before the prefetch target. The control may be performed so that the speed is further reduced, and then the main symbol 712 may be stopped at the middle line L2 from a state where it is likely to stop at the position where it overlaps the middle line L2.

  After the left and right reels 711L and 711R are stopped and displayed while forming the reach display in the change display of the prefetch target, the change of the middle reel 711M is started, and then the middle reel 711M is stopped, thereby changing the change of the prefetch target. The display ends. When the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the middle line L2 due to the stop of the middle reel 711M, the gaming state transitions to the special gaming state after the stopping display (that is, after the end of the pre-reading variation display). . On the other hand, when the lost symbol is stopped and displayed on the middle stage line L2 due to the stop of the middle reel 711M, after the stop display, the gaming state is changed to the normal gaming state without changing to the special gaming state.

  As for the second sub-sign warning, the case where the special design start winning for the pre-read target occurs in the state where the number of reserved games of the special symbol unit is 2 is described above. If a special design starting prize is received when the number of games held is 1, and a special design starting prize is received when the number of special games held is 3 or more. In the case where it occurs, the second sub-sign warning may be similarly performed.

  Next, the countdown notice will be described with reference to FIG. The countdown notice is a look-ahead effect that counts down the number of change displays executed until the change display for the pre-read object is executed in the change display before the change display for the pre-read object using the numbers included in the main symbol 712. . The countdown notice control is performed by the sub control board 940.

  For example, when the start winning of the special symbol to be prefetched occurs in the state where the number of holdings of the unit game of the special symbol is 3, as shown in FIG. 29, the change display three times before the prefetch target is started. Thereafter, the change display is stopped after the main symbol 712 with the number “3” attached to the middle reel 711M is positioned on the middle line L2, and then the left and right reels 711L, 711R are moved to the respective effective lines L1, L2. , L3 is terminated when the stop symbol is stopped to become a lost symbol.

  After the end of the three-previous variation display for the prefetch target, the variation display in the unit game of the special symbol that has been put on hold next (the second variation display for the prefetch target) is started. The change display is stopped after the main symbol 712 with the number “2” attached to the middle reel 711M is positioned on the middle line L2, and then the left and right reels 711L, 711R are activated by the respective effective lines L1, L2, L3. When the stop symbol is stopped so as to become a lost symbol in FIG.

  After the end of the previous two-variable display of the pre-reading object, the first display of the pre-reading object is displayed. After stopping in the state positioned at L2, the left and right reels 711L and 711R are stopped by stopping the stop symbols in each of the effective lines L1, L2 and L3 so as to become a lost symbol.

  After the display of the variation immediately before the pre-reading object is finished, the display of the pre-reading object is started, and the jackpot symbol or the lost symbol is stopped as a stop symbol. In the variation display of the prefetch target, the left reel 711L, the right reel 711R, and the middle reel 711M are stopped in this order.

  As for the countdown notice, in the above description, the case where the start winning of the special symbol to be prefetched occurs in the state where the number of the special symbol unit game is 3 is illustrated. When a special design start winning is received with a special symbol subject to prefetching when the number is 2, or when a special design start winning with a special symbol subject to prefetching occurs while the number of units of the special symbol held is 4 or more Similarly, it may be configured to make a countdown notice. Alternatively, a countdown advance notice may be provided when a special winning symbol for prefetching occurs in a state where the number of reserved special unit games is two.

  Next, the operation and effect of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment described above will be described.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when the number of special symbols held reaches the upper limit, the lottery result display device 730 displays lamp fluctuations over a predetermined fluctuation display time, and then the lamps 730A to 730D. Among them, the lottery result of the reserved full tank effect lottery is notified by the position of the lamp that is stopped and displayed, so that the expectation for the execution of the reserved full tank effect can be suitably amplified during the period when the ramp fluctuation display is executed. .

  In particular, the position of the lamp that is stopped and displayed differs between the case where the appearance of the reserved full tank effect is selected and the case where the appearance of the reserved full tank effect is not selected in the lottery of the reserved full tank effect. It is easy for a person to sensuously judge whether or not the appearance of the reserved full tank effect has been selected from the position of the stopped lamp. In addition, the stop display for reporting the lottery result of the reserved full tank effect lottery is performed within the range of the lamps 730A to 730D constituting the lottery result display device 730, so that the player's line of sight is displayed when viewing the stop display. It is difficult for the player to grasp the position of the stop display.

  In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the reserved full tank effect lottery is displayed on the lottery result display device 730, stop display (that is, display of the lottery result of the reserved full tank effect lottery) is performed. The timing is configured to deviate from the reach production period. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the stop display in the lottery result display device 730 during the effect that the player wants to pay attention to, such as the suggestion effect executed during the reach effect period. As a result, the player's interest can be concentrated on the effect such as the suggestion effect that is executed during the reach effect period, and thus the player's expectation that the player can have with respect to the variable display during the execution is improved. Can be made. In addition, since the display time of the stop display in the lottery result display device 730 does not overlap with the display time of the suggestion effect, the player misses the lottery result of the pending full tank effect lottery displayed by the lottery result display device 730. Can be suppressed.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, as the second sub-sign warning, the lost symbol including the second sub-design 713B of the middle reel 711M is stopped and displayed on the middle line L2, and then before the change display of the pre-read target. In the variation display executed at the same time and the variation display of the pre-reading target, the variation display of the left and right reels 711L and 711R is performed while the middle reel 711M is stopped. By starting the display, it is possible to amplify the expectation of the lottery result for the pre-read target variable display that comes after that.

  In particular, the middle reel 711M that has been stopped from the fluctuation display before the fluctuation display of the prefetch target starts to change in synchronization with the reach display formed on the middle line L2 by the left and right reels 711L and 711R. Impressively impressed that the end time of the pre-reading target variable display (that is, the display of the lottery result for the pre-reading target variable display) is approaching, thereby further increasing the expectation of the lottery result for the pre-reading target variable display. be able to.

  In the second sub-sign warning, the middle reel 711M stopped prior to the left and right reels 711L and 711R is synchronized with the reach display formed on the middle line L2 by the left and right reels 711L and 711R. Since it is kept stopped until it is fluctuated, it is easy to attract the player's attention to the middle reel 711M that fluctuates in the variation display of the prefetch target, and it is possible to suitably increase the expectation of the lottery result for the variation display of the prefetch target. .

  Further, in the second sub-sign warning, the second sub-design 713B that is stopped and displayed on the middle line L2 in the middle reel 711M that has been stopped from the fluctuation display prior to the pre-read target fluctuation display constitutes a big hit symbol Since it is a symbol that is not displayed, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the middle line L2 in the variation display executed before the variation display of the prefetch target, that is, before the variation display of the prefetch target is performed. .

  In the second sub-sign warning, a part of the symbol that does not constitute the jackpot symbol, such as the second sub-symbol 713B, is displayed in the middle symbol line ( Since the player continues to display on the middle reel 711M) for the entire period of the variation display, the player recognizes that the jackpot symbol is not displayed on the middle line L2 in the variation display prior to the variation display of the pre-read target. It is possible to further amplify the expectation for the change display of the look-ahead target that comes.

  In particular, in the second sub-sign warning, the symbol that is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol row (medium reel 711M) of the middle line L2 is the second sub-design 713B that is provided only on the middle reel 711M of the sub-design 713. Therefore, it is easy to attract the player's attention, and it is easy for the player to recognize that the second sub-sign warning has started. In the second sub-sign warning in this embodiment, the second sub-design 713B is the middle symbol row (middle reel 711M) of the middle stage line L2 located in the middle of the plurality of effective lines L1, L2, and L3. In this respect, it is easy to attract the player's attention, and it is easy for the player to recognize that the second sub-sign warning has started.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, as the countdown notice, the number of variable displays executed until the pre-read target variable display is executed in the variable display before the pre-read target variable display is set to the middle reel 711M. Since the player counts down according to the numbers included in the main symbol 712, the player can visually recognize the main symbol 712 of the middle reel 711M in the variation display during execution until the variation display of the pre-read target is executed thereafter. The number of variable displays to be executed can be grasped. Since the number of times is counted down every time the variable display is performed, it is possible to amplify a sense of expectation for the lottery result with respect to the variable display of the prefetch target that is gradually approaching.

  In addition, in the countdown notice, the countdown of the number of variable displays executed until the variable display of the prefetch target is executed is performed by changing the main symbol 712 of the reel that displays the decorative symbols (main symbol 712 and sub symbol 713) in a variable manner. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the countdown.

  In addition, in the countdown notice, the middle reel 711M that counts down the number of times of variation display executed until the variation display of the prefetch target is performed is stopped prior to the left and right reels 711L and 711R. Since the reel to be performed (the middle reel 711M) is easily distinguished from the other reels (the left and right reels 711L and 711R), it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the countdown.

<Eighth Embodiment>
Next, an eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 30 to 32. In the pachinko machine 100 according to the eighth embodiment, the base 401 of the game board 400X is configured as a flat member having light permeability (translucency), and the characteristics of the base 401 are used to enhance the game. The idea which raises is given. In the following description, the same components as those in the first to seventh embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof is omitted.

  First, referring to FIG. 30 and FIG. 31, the display area of the reel device 710 is exceeded by the display area in which the reel device 710 can be viewed in front view and its outer portion using the light-transmitting substrate 401. A school of fish as an example of a light-emitting display for presentation displayed will be described. FIG. 30 (a) is an enlarged front view of the vicinity of the reel device 710 in the game board 400X, and FIG. 30 (b) is a simplified diagram of the main configuration of the game board 400X along the line AA in FIG. 30 (a). FIG. FIG. 31A is a simplified cross-sectional view of the main configuration including the reel device 710 taken along line BB in FIG. 30A, and FIG. 31B exceeds the display area of the reel device 710. It is a front view for demonstrating the school of fish displayed.

  In FIG. 30A, FIG. 30B, and FIG. 31B, the central structure 420 is not shown. In FIG. 30B, for reference, a part of a nail 411 provided on the base body 401 is illustrated, and the outer shape of the resin cover 715 of the reel device 710 is illustrated by a two-dot chain line. 223 is illustrated by a one-dot chain line. Further, in FIG. 31A, the rear plate 223 is shown by a one-dot chain line for reference. In FIG. 30B and FIG. 31A, cross-sectional hatching is omitted.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the base body 401 of the game board 400X is configured as a flat member having light transmittance. As shown in FIG. 30A, the base 401 is formed with an opening 401 </ b> D that constitutes an opening to which the central structure 420 is attached. The central structure 420 is made of a translucent resin material so that a part of the school of fish displayed on the back side can be visually recognized by being fitted into the opening 401D from the front. In FIG. 30, the illustration is omitted.

  On the front surface of the base body 401, fish patterns 741 constituting a part of a school of fish (fish group) continuous in the left direction on the left side and the right side with respect to the reel device 710 are drawn in various sizes. It is drawn by printing a colored paint having light properties. The fish pattern 741 drawn on the base 401 includes a pattern that is partially cut off by the periphery (edge) of the opening 401D, as in the pattern 741A.

  Similarly to the base body 401, the base body 701 disposed on the back side of the game board 400 is also configured as a flat plate member having light transmittance. As shown in FIG. 30 (a), on the front surface of the base body 701, a part of a school of fish that faces left with the fish drawn by the picture 741 on the left side and the right side with respect to the reel device 710 inside the opening 401D. The fish pattern 742 that constitutes is drawn in various sizes.

  The fish pattern 742 drawn on the base body 701 is paired with a pattern 741 (for example, the pattern 741A) which is only a part of the fish itself, but is partially cut off by the periphery of the opening 401D, like the pattern 742A. It also includes a pattern that makes up one fish when viewed from the front.

  In addition, the fish pattern 742 drawn on the base 701 includes a pattern that is partially interrupted by the boundary with the resin cover 715 of the reel device 710, such as the patterns 742B, 742C, and 742D. Note that the pattern 742B drawn on the left side of the resin cover 715 and the pattern 742D drawn on the right side of the resin cover 715 may be one side and the other side of the pattern in which one fish is divided into left and right, Thereby, it can be easily displayed to the player that the picture represents the school of fish as an integrated object continuously in the left-right direction.

  As shown in FIG. 30B, a board surface light emitting device 490 </ b> A that is a part of the board surface light emitting device 490 is provided on the back side of the base body 401. The panel light emitting device 490A is arranged such that light emitting means E1 such as an LED can emit light toward the front where the base body 401 is located. Therefore, by turning on (emitting) the light emitting means E1 disposed on the back side of the region where the fish pattern 741 is drawn on the base body 401, it is possible to display the pattern 741 floating in the light.

  On the other hand, a board surface light emitting device 490B, which is a part of the board surface light emitting device 490, is provided on the back side of the base body 701. The panel light emitting device 490B includes a light emitting means E2 such as an LED directed to the base body 701 and a light emitting means E4 (see FIG. 31A). Therefore, by turning on the light emitting means E2 disposed on the back side of the region where the fish pattern 742 is drawn on the base body 701, the pattern 742 that appears in the light can be displayed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 30B, a light-transmitting plate-like shape extending in the front-rear direction substantially perpendicular to the base bodies 401 and 701 is provided between the opening 401D of the base body 401 and the peripheral edge of the base body 701. Side wall portion 702 is provided. On the surface of the side wall part 702 (the surface facing the opening 401D), a pattern 741 (for example, the pattern 741A) partially cut off by the periphery of the opening 401D and a pattern 742 (for example, the pattern 742A) paired with the pattern 741. ) Are drawn (not shown). Thereby, it can suppress that the fish comprised by the combination of the pattern 741 and the pattern 742 looks divided by the level | step difference of the base | substrate 401 and the base | substrate 701.

  A panel surface light emitting device 490C, which is a part of the panel surface light emitting device 490, is provided on the back side of the side wall portion 702 (outside the opening 401D). The panel light emitting device 490C includes a light emitting means E3 such as an LED provided so as to be able to irradiate light toward the side wall portion 702. Therefore, by turning on the light emitting means E3 disposed on the back side of the region on the side wall portion 702 where the pattern is drawn, the pattern that appears in the light can be displayed.

  The resin cover 715 of the reel device 710 is a cover having light transmissivity (translucency) covering the front side of each reel 711L, 711M, 711R. As shown in FIG. 31A, the resin cover 715 of the present embodiment is configured in an arc shape whose side section is curved along the section of each reel such as the middle reel 711M. The resin cover 715 includes a translucent outer cover 715A integrated with the base body 701, and a light guide plate 715B disposed on the rear side of the outer cover 715A.

  In the light guide plate 715B, a fish pattern 743 constituting a part of a school of fish that faces the left direction is formed on one surface side (for example, the back surface side) of a light-transmitting resin plate with fine irregularities. The light emitting means E4 such as LED provided in the panel light emitting device 490B is arranged along the upper end on the upper side with respect to the upper end of the light guide plate 715B, and along the lower end on the lower side with respect to the lower end of the light guide plate 715B. It is arranged.

  When the light-emitting means E4 is not turned on, the light guide plate 715B is visible from the front side to the rear side, and the player can see the resin cover 715 (the outer cover 715A and the light guide plate 715B) as shown in FIG. The reels 711L, 711M, and 711R can be visually recognized through the. On the other hand, when the light emitting means E4 is turned on, the light emitted from the light emitting means E4 is incident on the upper and lower ends of the light guide plate 715B, whereby the light guide plate 715B (resin cover 715) has a structure shown in FIG. As shown to (b), the fish pattern 743 which comprises a part of fish school is displayed.

  The fish pattern 743 displayed on the light guide plate 715B is a pattern in which a part of the fish is drawn by itself, such as the patterns 743B and 743C, but the pattern is partially cut off by the boundary with the resin cover 715. The pattern which comprises one fish when paired with 742 (for example, pattern 742B, 742C) and it sees from the front is also contained.

  A pattern 743 constituting one fish paired with a pattern 742 partially interrupted by the boundary with the resin cover 715, such as the patterns 743B and 743C, is a predetermined lower side than the top portion of the resin cover 715 located at the forefront. It is formed so as to be displayed within the range of the regions R1 and R2.

  The “predetermined region” is, for example, 2/5 from the top side in the height difference (height in the front-rear direction) between the top of the resin cover 715 (the top of the outer cover 715A) and the upper and lower ends of the outer cover 715A. The lower region is preferably a region lower than 1/2 from the top side in the height difference, and may be a region lower than 3/5 from the top side in the height difference. The end of the “predetermined region” on the base 701 side may be in contact with the base 701 or may not be in contact with the base 701, but is preferably in contact with the base 701.

  Since the regions R1 and R2 are closer to the surface (front surface) of the base body 701 than near the top of the resin cover 715, the pattern 742 (for example, the pattern 742B, 742C) and a difference in height (height in the front-rear direction) between the pattern 743 (for example, the patterns 743B and 743C) paired with the pattern 742 can be suppressed. Therefore, since distortion when these pairs of the patterns 742 and 743 are viewed from the front can be suppressed, it is possible to make it difficult to produce a sense of incongruity with the fish pattern formed by the pair of the pattern 742 and the pattern 743.

  Here, each of the reels 711L, 711M, and 711R of the reel device 710 has an arcuate shape that bulges forward in a side view, and the light guide plate 715B (resin cover 715) also has each reel 711L, 711M, and 711R. It is comprised in the shape which bulged in the arc shape at the front side in the form along the surface shape of this. For this reason, each reel 711L, 711M, so as to be located between the base body 401 forming the game area where the game balls flow down and the transparent plate (rear plate 223) located on the front side or in front of the base plate. Even when the front ends of 711R and the light guide plate 715B (resin cover 715) are arranged, the upper and lower ends of the display area visible in the front view of the reel device 710 are located behind the front surface of the base body 401. It will be. The base body 701 is arranged in a planar shape so as to be in substantially the same front and back positions as the upper and lower end portions of the display area visible in the front view in the reel device 710, and thereby the fish displayed on the light guide plate 715B. A sense of unity between the pattern 743 and the pattern 742 displayed on the base 701 can be expressed, and the symbols of the reels 711L, 711M, and 711R located inside the base 701 when viewed from the player side are displayed on the base 701. The displayed pattern 742 can be emphasized and displayed, and the result of the success or failure can be easily displayed to the player.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment, in addition to lighting the light emitting means E4 and displaying the fish pattern 743 on the light guide plate 715B, by turning on the light emitting means E1 to E3, It is possible to display in a wide area from the right side of the base body 401 to the left side of the base body 401 with the reel device 710 (resin cover 715) interposed therebetween. At this time, by controlling the lighting timing of the light emitting means E1 to E4, it is possible to produce an effect that the school of fish moves from right to left in a wide area sandwiching the reel device 710.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 32, a description will be given of a configuration in which the player can visually recognize the flow path of the game ball that has entered the upper starting prize-winning device 1431 from the entrance 1611.

  FIG. 32A is an enlarged front view of the vicinity of the upper and lower start winning devices 1431 and 1432 in the game board 400X of the pachinko machine 100 according to the eighth embodiment. FIG. 32B is a cross-sectional view of the game board 400X taken along the line CC in FIG. 32A, and FIG. 32C is a top view of FIG. 32A viewed from above. FIG. 32D is a diagram showing how the information display unit 753 is seen when a player who is playing the pachinko machine 100 according to the eighth embodiment obliquely sees the lower left direction.

  In FIG. 32 (a), the distribution unit 1620 is shown in a schematic outline. In FIG. 32 (c), the right side portion of the upper start prize-winning device 1431 is omitted, and the upper surface of the guide passage 1612, the first passages 1613A and 1613B, and the second secondary passage 1614A is omitted.

  32 (b) and 32 (c), the nails 411 are shown except for the nail 411A (a part of the nail 411) arranged in the lower right direction from the upper side of the left information display portion 753 in the front view of the gaming machine. Is omitted, and the lower start winning device 1432 is not shown. In FIG. 32 (b), for reference, one of the nails 411A is illustrated including a portion embedded in the base 401, and the other portion of the nail 411A protruding to the front side of the base 401 is shown. It is illustrated by a two-dot chain line, and the rear plate 223 is illustrated by a one-dot chain line. In FIG. 32C, for reference, a portion of the nail 411A protruding to the front side of the base body 401 is illustrated by a two-dot chain line, and the rear plate 223 is illustrated by a one-dot chain line.

  32 (b) and 32 (c), for reference, a part of a game ball that has entered the upper starting prize-winning device 1431 from the entrance 1611 is illustrated, and a part of the game ball in the upper starting prize-winning device 1431 is shown. The flow path is indicated by arrows.

  As shown in FIGS. 32 (a) to 32 (c), on the back side (rear side) of the base 401 of the game board 400X, the game ball that has entered the upper starting prize-winning device 1431 from the entrance 1611 is directed to the distribution unit 1620. A guide passage 1612 for guiding, left and right first passages 1613A and 1613B through which the game balls distributed by the sorting unit 1620 flow down, and second passages 1614A and 1614B branching from the left and right first passages 1613A and 1613B, respectively. Is provided.

  Each of these passages 1612, 1613A, 1613B, 1614A, and 1614B is formed by a passage forming member 1631 provided on the back side (rear side) of the base 401 as shown in FIGS. 32 (b) and 32 (c). The The passage forming member 1631 is made of a resin having optical transparency.

  As shown in FIGS. 32B and 32C, the guide passage 1612 penetrates the base body 401 so as to guide the game ball (for example, the game ball P1) that has entered from the entrance 1611 to the back side of the base body 401. This is a passage that guides the game ball downward on the upper side of the allocating portion 1620 after being guided from the formed opening 401C to the rear side (rear side) to a position above the allocating portion 1620.

  The game balls that have passed through the guide passage 1612 are used for sorting by the sorting unit 1620. The distribution unit 1620 corresponds to the distribution unit of the upper start winning device 1431 in the pachinko machine 100 according to the seventh embodiment. That is, as with the sorting unit 620, the sorting unit 1620 alternately switches the sorting destination each time a game ball enters from the entrance 1611.

  Specifically, the distribution unit 1620 is configured to display the game ball guided by the guide passage 1612 on the left first passage 1613A located on the left side of the distribution unit 1620 in the front view of the gaming machine or in the front view of the gaming machine. Allocation is alternately performed to the right first passage 1613B located on the right side with respect to the distribution unit 1620.

  The left first passage 1613A, as shown in FIG. 32A, will be described later among the upstream side passage 1613A1 constituting the upstream side passage in the left side first passage 1613A and the game balls passing through the upstream side passage 1613A1. This is composed of a downstream passage 1613A2 through which game balls that have not entered the left second passage 1614A flow down.

  As shown in FIG. 32C, the upstream passage 1613A1 guides the game ball (for example, the game ball P2) distributed to the left side by the distribution unit 1620 to the left side and then moves to the back side (rear side). This is a passage that guides and then guides in a substantially vertical downward direction (perpendicular from the front to the bottom in FIG. 32C).

  As shown in FIGS. 32A and 32C, the downstream passage 1613A2 is a passage provided downstream from the inlet of the left second passage 1614A branched from the upstream passage 1613A1. The downstream-side passage 1613A2 guides the game ball guided in the substantially vertical downward direction by the upstream-side passage 1613A1 to the recovery / discharge passage (not shown) after continuing the guidance in the substantially vertical downward direction.

  As shown in FIGS. 32A to 32C, the left second passage 1614A is a passage formed by branching leftward in a portion extending downward in the upstream passage 1613A1. The left second passage 1614A guides a game ball (for example, a game ball P3) that has entered from the left first passage 1613A (upstream side passage 1613A1) to the left side, and then guides it substantially vertically downward like the game ball P4. Then, it guides to the collection discharge passage.

  The probability that the game ball passing through the upstream passage 1613A1 enters the second left passage 1614A is very low compared to the probability that the game ball enters the downstream passage 1613A2. The probability that a game ball passing through the upstream passage 1613A1 enters the left second passage 1614A is, for example, about 1/200, and preferably about 1/2000.

  As shown in FIG. 32A, the left start winning switch 1441A is provided so as to be able to detect a game ball flowing down the downstream passage 1613A2. Accordingly, when a game ball passing through the left first passage 1613A enters the downstream passage 1613A2 from the upstream passage 1613A1, the game ball is detected by the left start winning switch 1441A.

  Accordingly, the game balls distributed to the left first passage 1613A by the distribution unit 1620 enter the left start winning device 1431A by passing through the downstream passage 1613A2, and are detected by the left start winning switch 1441A and detected by the first special winning switch 1441A. It becomes the start prize of the design.

  On the other hand, when a game ball passing through the left first passage 1613A enters the left second passage 1614A from the upstream passage 1613A1, the game ball is not detected by the left start winning switch 1441A. Therefore, when the game ball passing through the upstream passage 1613A1 enters the left second passage 1614A without entering the downstream passage 1613A2, the start winning of the first special symbol is not achieved.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 32A, the right first passage 1613B is composed of an upstream passage 1613B1 that constitutes an upstream passage in the right first passage 1613B, and a game ball that has passed through the upstream passage 1613B1. A downstream passage 1613B2 through which game balls that have not entered the right second passage 1614B, which will be described later, flows down.

  As shown in FIG. 32 (c), the upstream side passage 1613B1 guides the game balls distributed to the right side by the distributing unit 1620 to the right side, and then moves to the back side (rear side) in the same manner as the upstream side passage 1613A1. And then guides in a substantially vertical downward direction.

  As shown in FIG. 32A, the downstream passage 1613B2 is a passage provided downstream from the inlet of the right second passage 1614B branched from the upstream passage 1613B1. The downstream passage 1613B2 guides the game ball guided in the substantially vertical downward direction by the upstream passage 1613B1 continuously in the substantially vertical downward direction, and then guides it to the recovery / discharge passage.

  As shown in FIG. 32A, the right second passage 1614B is a passage formed by branching rightward at a portion extending downward in the upstream passage 1613B1. The right second passage 1614B guides the game ball that has entered from the right first passage 1613B (upstream passage 1613B1) to the right side, and then guides it to the recovery discharge passage.

  The probability that a game ball that passes through the upstream passage 1613B1 enters the right second passage 1614B is much lower than the probability that the game ball enters the downstream passage 1613B2. The probability that the game ball passing through the upstream passage 1613B1 enters the right second passage 1614B is, for example, about 1/200, and preferably about 1/2000.

  As shown in FIG. 32A, the right start winning switch 1441B is provided so as to be able to detect a game ball flowing down the downstream passage 1613B2. Therefore, when a game ball passing through the first right passage 1613B enters the downstream passage 1613B2 from the upstream passage 1613B1, the game ball is detected by the right start winning switch 1441B.

  Accordingly, the game balls distributed to the right first passage 1613B by the distribution unit 1620 enter the right start winning device 1431B by passing through the downstream passage 1613B2, and are detected by the right start winning switch 1441B and detected by the second special winning switch 1441B. It becomes the start prize of the design.

  On the other hand, when a game ball passing through the right first passage 1613B enters the right second passage 1614B from the upstream passage 1613B1, the game ball is not detected by the right start winning switch 1441B. Therefore, when the game ball passing through the upstream passage 1613B1 enters the right second passage 1614B without entering the downstream passage 1613B2, the start prize of the second special symbol is not obtained.

  The region J in the base body 401 corresponds to the range surrounded by the thick line in FIG. 32A, and the image such as the above-described pattern 741 is not drawn in this range, and the region in which the image or the like is drawn. Compared to the above, it is configured as a region having high visibility when the rear side is viewed from the front side. As shown in FIG. 32A, the region J includes the entire left and right upstream passages 1613A1 and 1613B1, and the front sides of the left and right downstream passages 1613A2 and 1613B2 and the left and right second passages 1614A and 1614B. It is provided in the position which overlaps.

  As described above, the passage forming member 1631 that forms each of the passages 1613A1, 1613B1, 1613A2, 1613B2, 1614A, and 1614B is made of a light-transmitting resin. The flow path of the game ball that has entered 1431 can be visually recognized through the region J of the base body 401.

  Therefore, when the game ball enters the entrance 1611, the player visually recognizes the flow path of the game ball through the region J of the base body 401, so that the game ball is moved to the left or right by the distribution unit 1620. It is possible to know whether it has been assigned to the passage, or whether it has entered the passage (that is, the downstream passages 1613A2 and 1613B2) where a special symbol start winning is generated.

  In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 32A, information display portions 751 to 754 that can inform a player of a characteristic area in the game board 400X are provided.

  The information display unit 751 is provided in the vicinity of the entrance 1611 on the front surface of the upper start winning device 1431. A character string “IN” is displayed on the surface of the information display portion 751. Therefore, the player can recognize that the area where the game ball has entered is the entrance 1611 of the upper start winning device 1431 by looking at the character string “IN”. That is, the character string “IN” displayed on the information display unit 751 allows the player to recognize that the area to which the information display unit 751 is attached (that is, the entrance 1611) is the entrance of the upper start winning device 1431. (Hereinafter, this information is also referred to as “start winning device entrance information”).

  The information display unit 752 is provided on the front surface of the base body 401 so as to overlap with a position close to a branch position with the second passages 1614A and 1614B in the left and right downstream passages 1613A2 and 1613B2. A character string “Lucky” is displayed on the surface of the information display portion 752.

  Therefore, the player sees the character string “Lucky”, and the area where the game ball has entered (that is, the downstream passages 1613A2 and 1613B2) starts a special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol). Recognize that this is a winning area. That is, the character string “Lucky” displayed on the information display portion 752 is displayed when the game ball enters the area to which the information display portion 752 is attached (that is, the downstream passages 1613A2 and 1613B2). It functions as information (hereinafter, this information is also referred to as “start winning area information”) that allows the player to recognize that the area is where a winning occurs.

  The information display part 753 includes a passage wall constituting a passage extending to the left or right of the second passages 1614A and 1614B in the passage formation member 1631 so as to overlap slightly downstream of the inlets of the left and right second passages 1614A and 1614B. It is provided on the back side of the passage wall (for example, the passage wall portion 1631A in FIG. 32C) that is the rear side of the gaming machine. A character string “OUT” is displayed on the surface of the information display portion 753.

  Therefore, the player can recognize that the area where the game ball has entered (that is, the second passages 1614A and 1614B) has entered the area that does not become the start winning of the special symbol by looking at the character string “OUT”. . In other words, the character string “OUT” displayed on the information display unit 753 is a special symbol even if the area where the information display unit 753 is attached (that is, the left and right second passages 1614A and 1614B) enters the game ball. It functions as information that allows the player to recognize that this is an area in which no starting prize is generated (hereinafter, this information is also referred to as “non-starting prize area information”).

  The information display unit 754 is provided on the front surface of the lower start prize-winning device 1432 so as to overlap the opening 1432A for guiding the game ball that has entered the lower start prize-winning device 1432 to the back side (rear side) of the base 401. A character string “GO” is displayed on the surface of the information display unit 754.

  The game ball that has entered the opening 1432A is detected by the lower start winning switch 1442, so that the player sees the character string “GO” so that the area into which the game ball has entered has a start special winning of the second special symbol. Can be recognized. That is, the character string “GO” displayed on the information display unit 754 functions as start winning area information similar to “Lucky” displayed on the information display unit 752.

  Among the information display portions 751 to 754, information that gives the player expectation for the start winning of the special symbol, such as start winning device entrance information and start winning area information, on the surface of the information display portions 751, 752, and 754. It is displayed. Such information display portions 751, 752, and 754 are provided at positions such as the upper and lower start winning devices 1431 and 1432 and the front surface of the base body 401 that are directly visible to the player through the front plate 222 and the rear plate 223.

  Therefore, since the information display portions 751, 752, and 754 are disposed at positions that are relatively easy to visually recognize, a special game player holds when a game ball enters the area corresponding to each information display portion 751, 752, and 754. The expectation with respect to the start winning of the symbol can be suitably amplified.

  As shown in FIG. 32 (a), five nails 411A arranged in a downward-sloping manner are arranged from the upper side to the right side of the left information display unit 753. As shown in FIGS. 32 (b) and 32 (c), the left information display section 753 is located in either the vertical range or the horizontal range in which these five nails 411A are arranged. Is also provided to fit.

  With the nail 411A erected in such an arrangement with respect to the information display portion 753 on the left side, when the player who is positioned in front of the pachinko machine 100 due to the game being viewed diagonally in the lower left direction, To the player, as shown in FIG. 32 (d), the left information display portion 753 appears to overlap the rear side of the five nails 411A.

  Thus, the visibility of the left information display unit 753 when the player who is playing the game obliquely looks in the lower left direction is hindered by the five nails 411A overlapping the front side. On the surface of the information display section 753, information such as a character string “OUT” (that is, non-start winning area information) is displayed that reduces the player's expectation for a special symbol starting winning. Since the visibility of the information display portion 753 is hindered by the book nail 411A, the impression of the character string “OUT” displayed on the information display portion 753 hardly remains for the player.

  Even if the game ball that has entered the upper starting prize-winning device 1431 from the entrance 1611 enters the area corresponding to the information display section 753 (that is, the left and right second passages 1614A and 1614B), the special design starting prize will not be given. It can be suppressed that the information display unit 753 gives a strong impression to the player. Thereby, even if the game ball enters the upper start winning device 1431 from the entrance 1611, it is possible to suppress the disappointment of the player that the start winning winning of the special symbol is not achieved.

  Similarly to the left information display portion 753, the right information display portion 753 also has five nails 411B arranged in a descending left direction from the upper side to the left side of the information display portion 753 (FIG. 32 (a )), And the information display portion 753 is provided so as to be within both the vertical range and the horizontal range in which the five nails 411B are arranged.

  Therefore, when a player whose viewpoint is located in front of the pachinko machine 100 is in the game and sees the lower right direction obliquely, the right information display portion 753 is displayed after the five nails 411B. Since it appears to overlap the side, the visibility of the information display portion 753 is hindered by the five nails 411A overlapping the front side. As a result, as in the case of the information display unit 753 on the left side described above, it is possible to suppress the disappointment of the player for not having a special symbol start winning.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 32 (a), the left and right information display portions 753 both have a nail 411A or a nail 411B whose character string “OUT” displayed on the surface corresponds to each information display portion 753. Are arranged along the arrangement direction. That is, the character string “OUT” displayed on the information display portion 753 on the left side is arranged in the lower right like the arrangement of the nails 411A, and the character string “OUT” displayed on the information display portion 753 on the right side is In the same manner as the arrangement of the nails 411B, the nails 411B are arranged to the left.

  In this manner, by arranging the character strings displayed on the information display unit 753 along the arrangement direction of the nail 411A or the nail 411B, for example, as shown in FIG. Since it is possible to overlap the nail 411A on the rear side, the visibility of the information display portion 753 can be suitably reduced.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 32 (c), the information display unit 753 is provided on the back side (rear side) of the base body 401. Therefore, the visibility of the information display unit 753 viewed through the base body 401 is It is lower than the visibility of the information display portions 751, 752, and 754 that can be viewed without going through the base 401.

  In particular, in front of the information display portion 753, not only the base body 401 but also the passage wall portion 1631A, such as the passage wall portion constituting the passage extending to the left or right of the second passages 1614A and 1614B, front and rear in the game machine front view Therefore, the visibility of the information display unit 753 is further reduced.

  Therefore, since the base 401 and the passage wall 1631A overlap the front side of the information display portion 753, the impression of the character string “OUT” displayed on the information display portion 753 is less likely to remain in the impression. Thereby, even if the game ball enters the upper start winning device 1431 from the entrance 1611, the disappointment of the player when the start winning of the first special symbol is not achieved can be suitably suppressed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 32 (c), the upstream passage 1613A1 is configured as a passage that guides the game ball to the left side and then guides it to the back side, so that the passage wall constituting the left end of the upstream side passage 1613A1 The portion 1631B is configured as a wall surface that is substantially perpendicular to the base body 401 and extends in the vertical direction. In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the passage wall portion 1631B is arranged so as to overlap the front side of the left information display portion 753 in the player's field of view when viewing the lower left direction obliquely, so that the information display portion 753 is visually recognized. Sex is inhibited by the passage wall portion 1631B overlapping the front side. Therefore, in this respect as well, since the impression of the character string “OUT” displayed on the information display portion 753 is less likely to remain for the player, it is more preferable for the player to be discouraged when the special symbol is not started. Can be suppressed.

  Next, the operation and effect of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment described above will be described.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, a school of fish that is directed leftward can be displayed in a wide area from the right side of the base 401 to the left side of the base 401 with the reel device 710 (resin cover 715) interposed therebetween. Therefore, compared to the case where the fish school is displayed using only the light guide plate 715B of the resin cover 715, the effect of displaying the fish school can be improved.

  In particular, since the base 701 is also configured to display a pattern 742 that constitutes a part of a continuous school of fish facing leftward, the opening 401D of the base 401 and the light guide plate as in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment. Even when there is structural separation between the pattern 715B and the pattern 742, a discontinuity between the pattern 743 displayed on the light guide plate 715B and the pattern 741 displayed on the base 401 is caused by the pattern 742. Can be supplemented. Thereby, the production | presentation by the fish school displayed beyond the display area by the light-guide plate 715B is realizable as a suitable production | generation with which the unnatural by discontinuity was suppressed.

  In addition, since one fish is displayed by the pattern 741 and the pattern 742 in the boundary portion of the base 401 in the front view of the gaming machine between the periphery of the opening 401D and the base 701, a series of continuous fish schools facing the left direction. It can suppress that nature becomes unnatural in the said boundary part. Similarly, since one fish is displayed by the pattern 743 and the pattern 742 in the boundary portion of the light guide plate 715B and the base body 701 in the front view of the gaming machine, the continuity of the continuous fish school facing the left direction is Unnaturalness at the boundary can also be suppressed.

  Further, a pattern (not shown) connecting the pattern 741 partially cut off by the periphery of the opening 401D and the pattern 742 paired with the pattern 741 is also displayed on the side wall 702. The discontinuity in the height direction (front-rear direction) due to the height difference between the base 701 and the base body 701 can be compensated by the pattern displayed on the side wall portion 702. Therefore, it is possible to more suitably suppress unnaturalness due to discontinuity in the production by the school of fish that faces leftward.

  In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the visibility of the information display unit 753 when the player who is playing the game obliquely looks at the lower left or lower right direction overlaps with the front side of the information display unit 753. In addition, since it is obstructed by the passage wall portion 1631A and the passage wall portion 1631B, the player in the case where the game ball has entered the upper start prize-winning device 1431 from the entrance 1611 but did not become the start prize of the special symbol Can be suitably suppressed.

  On the other hand, since the information display portion 753 is provided at a position where the nails 411A and 411B do not overlap in the front view of the gaming machine, the characters “OUT” are displayed when the information display portion 753 is viewed from the front side of the gaming machine. It can be made fully visible. Therefore, the information display unit 753 indicates that the area where the information display unit 753 is attached to a player viewed from the front of the gaming machine is an area where a special symbol start winning is not generated even if a game ball enters. Can be reported appropriately.

<Ninth Embodiment>
Next, a ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the pachinko machine 100 according to the ninth embodiment, half mirrors 761A and 761B capable of reflecting light emitted from the pressing operation device 261 and the like are provided on the resin cover 715 of the reel device 710. In the following description, the same reference numerals are given to the same components as those in the first to eighth embodiments, and the description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 33A is a front view of the reel device 710 of the ninth embodiment, and FIG. 33B is a simplified cross-sectional view of the reel device 710 taken along the line D-D in FIG. . FIG. 33 (c) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine 100 cut in the vertical direction at a substantially central position in the left-right direction in the front view of the gaming machine, and FIG. 33 (d) shows the pressing operation device 261 and the wave motion. 7 is a top view of a lamp 771. FIG.

  In FIG. 33B, the light guide plate 715B and the panel light emitting device 490B are not shown. Moreover, in FIG.33 (c), the island 10 in which the pachinko machine 100 was installed is shown in figure. Further, in FIG. 33 (c), for reference, the head of the player X who is playing the game is shown, and the optical path of the light emitted by the upper center frame light emitting device 271 and the pressing operation device 261 is indicated by a two-dot chain line. This is shown in the figure. Also, in FIGS. 33 (b) and 33 (c), cross-sectional hatching is omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 33 (a) and 33 (b), on one side of the resin cover 715 of the reel device 710 (in this embodiment, the front side of the outer cover 715A), among the effective lines arranged in the vertical direction, A half mirror 761A and a half mirror 761B are provided on the upper side and the lower side of the middle line display area, respectively, while leaving the middle line display area. In addition, although the resin cover 715 of this embodiment was set as the structure which has the light-guide plate 715B (not shown in FIG.33 (b)), it may be a mere transparent cover which does not have the light-guide plate 715B.

  The half mirrors 761A and 761B are semi-transmissive mirrors that transmit light from the back side (rear side) of the resin cover 715 forward and reflect light from the front side (front side) of the resin cover 715. Can do. As the half mirrors 761A and 761B, a transparent plate on which aluminum is vapor-deposited can be used as appropriate.

  In the present embodiment, each of the reels 711L, 711M, and 711R is configured as a hollow cylindrical body having a transparent decorative pattern drawn on the outer peripheral surface. Each of the reels 711L, 711M, and 711R has a common internal configuration, and the internal structure of the middle reel 711M will be representatively described below with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 33 (b), the inside of the middle reel 711M includes three light emitting devices 718A to 718C that irradiate light from the inside to a region visible from the resin cover 715 on the outer peripheral surface of the middle reel 711M. Is provided.

  Among the light emitting devices 718A to 718C, the light emitting device 718A disposed on the uppermost side is a light emitting device that irradiates light to the upper line area of the effective line of the pattern on the outer peripheral surface of the middle reel 711M. A light emitting means E6 such as an LED or the like slightly upward is provided. By turning on (emitting) the light emitting means E6, among the symbols drawn on the outer peripheral surface of the middle reel 711M, the symbols positioned on the upper line can be displayed in a light emitting manner.

  On the other hand, the lowermost light-emitting device 718C is a light-emitting device that irradiates light to the area of the lower line of the effective lines, and includes a light-emitting means E8 such as an LED directed slightly forward. Yes. By turning on the light emitting means E8, among the symbols drawn on the outer peripheral surface of the middle reel 711M, the symbols positioned on the lower line can be lit and displayed.

  The light emitting device 718B disposed between the light emitting device 718A and the light emitting device 718B is a light emitting device that irradiates light to the region of the middle line of the effective lines, and emits light such as an LED that is directed substantially horizontally forward. Means E7 is provided. By turning on the light emitting means E7, among the symbols drawn on the outer peripheral surface of the middle reel 711M, the symbols positioned on the middle line can be lit and displayed.

  The lighting (light emission) and extinguishing of these light emitting devices 718A to 718C are independently controlled by the sub control board 940. Therefore, the symbol positioned on the upper line, the symbol positioned on the middle line, and the symbol positioned on the lower line can be independently lit and displayed.

  A partition wall 719A is provided between the light emitting device 718A and the light emitting device 718B. The partition wall 719A prevents light emitted from the light emitting device 718A (light emitting means E6) from entering the middle line area, and light from the light emitting device 718B (light emitting means E7) enters the upper line area. It has a function to prevent this.

  In addition, a partition wall 719B is provided between the light emitting device 718B and the light emitting device 718C. The partition wall 719B prevents the light emitted from the light emitting device 718B (light emitting means E7) from entering the lower line area, and the light from the light emitting device 718C (light emitting means E8) enters the middle line area. It has a function to prevent this.

  When the light emitting device 718A is turned on (emits light), the half mirror 761A provided on the upper side of the display area of the middle line transmits light from the light emitting means E6 forward, whereby the pattern located on the upper line is displayed. Visible from the front. On the other hand, the half mirror 761A at this position becomes a mirror on the front side (front side) because light is no longer irradiated from the back side (rear side) when the light emitting device 718A or the like is turned off. The light from the side is reflected.

  Similarly, when the light emitting device 718C is turned on, the half mirror 761B provided on the lower side of the display area of the middle line transmits the light from the light emitting means E8 forward, and thereby the symbol located on the lower line. Becomes visible from the front. On the other hand, when the light emitting device 718C and the like are turned off, the half mirror 761B at the position is not irradiated with light from the back side (rear side), so that the front side (front side) becomes a mirror, thereby the front side (rear side) The light from the side is reflected.

  As shown in FIG. 33 (c), the resin cover 715 covering the front side of each reel 711L, 711M, 711R protrudes forward from the base body 701 in an arc shape in a side sectional view. Since the half mirrors 761A and 761B are provided along the surface of the resin cover 715 (outer cover 715A) on the upper and lower portions of the resin cover 715, the half mirror 761A provided on the upper side is a light emitting device. When 718A or the like is turned off, it functions as a mirror having a convex surface facing the front upper side in a side sectional view. Further, the half mirror 761B provided on the lower side functions as a mirror having a convex surface facing the front lower side in a side sectional view when the light emitting device 718C and the like are turned off.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the half mirror 761A provided on the upper part of the resin cover 715 is from the upper center frame light emitting device 271 provided on the upper center edge 211A (see FIG. 5) of the front decorative body 210. It is provided at a position where the emitted light is reflected and the reflected light is visible to the player who is playing the game. Thereby, when the upper center frame light-emitting device 271 is turned on, the player can visually recognize the image G1 of the emitted upper center frame light-emitting device 271 reflected on the half mirror 761A as shown in FIG. .

  The pressing operation device 261 of the present embodiment is configured to be turned on (light emission) or turned off under the control of the sub control board 940. In other words, the pressing operation device 261 is configured such that the operation unit pressed by the player is a light-emitting unit having translucency, and a light-emitting unit such as an LED provided on the back side of the light-emitting unit is connected to the sub-control board. It is turned on or off by being controlled by 940.

  In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the half mirror 761B provided in the lower portion of the resin cover 715 reflects the light emitted from the pressing operation device 261, and the player who is playing can visually recognize the reflected light. It is provided at a position. Thereby, when the pressing operation device 261 is turned on, as shown in FIG. 33A, the player can visually recognize the image G2 of the emitted pressing operation device 261 reflected on the half mirror 761B.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 33 (d), wave lamps 771 are provided on the left and right sides of the pressing operation device 261. The wave lamp 771 includes three lamps 771A to 771C arranged outward from the pressing operation device 261 side. Each of the lamps 771A to 771C constituting the wave lamp 771 is provided with light emitting means such as an LED on the back side thereof, and the light emitting means is controlled by the sub-control board 940 so as to overlap the front side of the light emitting means. The light emitting part having translucency is configured to be turned on or off.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the half mirror 761AB provided in the lower part of the resin cover 715 reflects the light emitted from the wave lamp 771 (lamps 771A to 771C), and the reflected light is being played. It is provided at a position where the player can visually recognize it. Thereby, when the wave lamp 771 is turned on, the player can visually recognize the image G3 of the emitted wave lamp 771 reflected on the half mirror 761B as shown in FIG.

  Since the half mirrors 761A and 761B are not arranged in the display area of the middle line in the resin cover 715, the light emitting device 718B and the like are always lit to be positioned at the middle line of the reels 711L, 711M, and 711R. The player can always see the symbol.

  As shown in FIG. 33 (c), the holding lamp 720 is provided on the rear end side (side closer to the base body 701) of the lower half mirror 761B. Since the lower half mirror 761B is formed in a convex surface facing the front lower side in a side sectional view, the light of the holding lamp 720 is easily reflected downward by the half mirror 761B, and is difficult to be seen by the player.

  Therefore, it is possible to suppress the visibility of the image G2 (image of the pressing operation device 261) and the image G3 (image of the wave lamp 771) reflected on the half mirror 761B from being hindered by the image of the holding lamp 720 reflected on the half mirror 761B. .

  In addition, the pressing operation device 261 and the wave lamp 771 are positioned on the lower front side of the resin cover 715, whereas the holding lamp 720 is on the rear end side of the lower half mirror 761B and includes the pressing operation device 261. It is provided at a position closer to the half mirror 761B than the wave lamp 771.

  Therefore, while the image G2 of the pressing operation device 261 and the image G3 of the wave lamp 771 can be visually recognized in the front area of the half mirror 761B (area on the top side of the resin cover 715), the holding lamp 720 that can be visually recognized by the player. This image is limited to the rear end side of the half mirror 761B. Therefore, even when the image of the holding lamp 720 reflected on the half mirror 761B is visually recognized by the player, it is difficult for the image of the holding lamp 720 to hinder the visibility of the images G2 and G3.

  Although not shown in FIG. 33 (c), the lottery result display device 730 is also on the rear end side (side closer to the base 701) of the lower half mirror 761B, like the holding lamp 720. Since it is provided at a position closer to the half mirror 761B than the pressing operation device 261 and the wave lamp 771, the visibility of the image G2 and the image G3 is not easily disturbed by the image of the lottery result display device 730 displayed on the half mirror 761B.

  As shown in FIG. 33 (a), between the left reel 711L and the middle reel 711M, and between the middle reel 711M and the right reel 711R, the reels 711L, 711M, and 711R are approximately along the circumferential direction. A partition portion 717 configured in a circular shape is provided. The partition portion 717 is fixedly provided so as not to rotate independently of the reels 711L, 711M, and 711R, and a reel side lamp 717A is provided in a region on the front side of the partition portion 717 that is behind the half mirror 761B. Is provided.

  The reel side lamp 717A is provided with light emitting means such as LEDs on the back side, and the light emitting means is controlled by the sub-control board 940, so that the reel side lamp 717A has light-transmitting properties and overlaps the front side of the light emitting means. The light emitting unit as the lamp 717A is configured to be turned on or off.

  In the present embodiment, the reel side lamp 717A is, for example, a color corresponding to the light emission color of the pressing operation device 261 or the wave lamp 771 (same color, specific specification) at a timing synchronized with the lighting timing of the pressing operation device 261 or the wave lamp 771. Of the corresponding color). Since the reel side lamp 717A is provided on the back side of the half mirror 761B, when the reel side lamp 717A is turned on, the player can visually recognize the light of the reel side lamp 717A that passes through the half mirror 761B.

  Next, the operation and effect of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment described above will be described.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the upper half mirror 761A, which is a mirror having a convex surface facing the front upper side in a side sectional view, reflects the light emitted from the upper center frame light emitting device 271 and reflects the reflected light. It is provided at a position where a player who is playing the game can see. Therefore, when the upper center frame light-emitting device 271 is turned on, the player visually recognizes the image G1 reflected on the half mirror 761A, so that the upper center frame light-emitting device 271 does not shift his line of sight. It can be recognized that 271 emits light and what color the upper center frame light emitting device 271 emits.

  A frame light-emitting device provided at the upper central edge 211A, such as the upper central frame light-emitting device 271 may emit light as part of a suggestion effect performed during a period in which the decorative symbol is variably displayed. Since the player generally tends to want to pay attention to the variation display during the variation display of the decorative symbol, even if the upper center frame light emitting device 271 is emitted as part of the suggestion effect, The player can recognize the light emission state of the upper center frame light emitting device 271 from the image G1 reflected on the half mirror 761A while observing the variation display of the decorative symbols.

  Also, the lower half mirror 761B, which is a mirror having a convex surface facing the front lower side in a side sectional view, reflects the light emitted from the pressing operation device 261 and the wave lamp 771, and the reflected light is played in the game. It is provided at a position where a person can visually recognize. Therefore, when the pressing operation device 261 or the wave lamp 771 is turned on, the player moves his / her line of sight to the pressing operation device 261 or the wave lamp 771 by visually recognizing the image G2 or the image G3 reflected on the half mirror 761B. In addition, it is possible to recognize that the pressing operation device 261 and the wave lamp 771 emit light and what color the pressing operation device 261 and the wave lamp 771 emit light.

  The pressing operation device 261 may emit light in synchronization with an operable period during which the pressing operation device 261 can be operated or a notification period in which the operable period is reported before the operable period. In addition, as an operation possible period, the period which can operate the press operation apparatus 261 in order to display the special effect which is one of the suggestion effects, the period which can operate the press operation apparatus 261 in order to adjust a volume, A period during which the press operation device 261 can be operated to change the music flowing during the game is included.

  A player generally has a tendency to pay attention to the variation display during the decorative symbol variation display. Therefore, even if the pressing operation device 261 emits light during the decorative symbol variation display, The person can recognize the light emission state of the pressing operation device 261 from the image G2 reflected on the half mirror 761B while watching the variation display of the decorative design. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the player from not knowing the light emission of the pressing operation device 261 and missing the operation timing (operation possible timing) of the pressing operation device 261.

  Similarly to the pressing operation device 261, the wave lamp 771 may emit light in synchronization with the operable period of the pressing operation device 261 and the notification period for the operable period. However, even when the wave lamp 771 is emitted during the decorative symbol variation display, the player recognizes the light emission state of the wave lamp 771 from the image G3 displayed on the half mirror 761B while viewing the variation variation display of the decoration symbol. It becomes possible to do. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from not knowing the light emitted from the wave lamp 771 and miss the operation timing of the pressing operation device 261.

  Even when the pressing operation device 261 or the wave lamp 711 emits light as part of the suggestion effect regardless of the operation timing of the pressing operation device 261, the player can watch the half mirror The suggestive effect can be recognized by visually recognizing the image G2 and the image G3 shown in 761B.

  In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the reel side lamp 717A is a color corresponding to the light emission color of the pressing operation device 261 or the wave lamp 771 at a timing synchronized with the lighting timing of the pressing operation device 261 or the wave lamp 771. It is configured to emit light. Therefore, the notification of the operation time is not only from the reflected light from the half mirror 761B (that is, the images G2 and G3 reflected on the half mirror 761B), but also from the reel side lamp 717A provided between the reels that is easy for the player to notice. Since it is performed by direct light, it is possible to more suitably suppress the player from missing the notification of the operation time.

<Tenth Embodiment>
Next, a tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the pachinko machine 100 according to the tenth embodiment, the display area of each symbol row displayed by each reel 711L, 711M, 711R is variably configured. In the following description, the same components as those in the first to ninth embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 34A is a front view of the reel device 710 when the display area of each symbol row by the reels 711L, 711M, and 711R is a basic display area, and FIG. 34B is the reel 711L. , 711M, 711R is a front view of the reel device 710 when the display area of each symbol row is a reduced display area. FIG. 34 (c) is a top view of the reel device 710 schematically showing a mechanism for changing the display area of the symbol row, and FIG. 34 (d) schematically shows a state where the display region of the symbol row is reduced. It is a top view of the reel device 710 shown. 34 (c) and 34 (d), the gears 781 to 783 are illustrated as circles in which the shape of the tooth portion is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 34A, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, basically, the reels 711L, 711M, and 711R are arranged so that the central axes of these reels are on the same line. Accordingly, the symbol rows of the reels 711L, 711M, and 711R are arranged in a line in the left-right direction without overlapping each other in the basic state. Therefore, in the basic state, the display area of each symbol row by each reel 711L, 711M, 711R is configured to have a width W1 (length in the left-right direction).

  In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, when the player operates a predetermined operation unit (for example, the pressing operation device 261), the reels 711L, 711M, and 711R move, thereby FIG. 34 (b). As shown, the width of the display area of each symbol row by each reel 711L, 711M, 711R becomes the length W2 shorter than the length W1. That is, in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the display area of each symbol row by each reel 711L, 711M, 711R can be reduced by the player operating a predetermined operation unit.

  As shown in FIG. 34 (c), between the left reel 711L and the middle reel 711M and between the middle reel 711M and the right reel 711R, the reels 711L, 711M, and 711R are approximately along the circumferential direction. A partition portion 717 configured in a circular shape is provided. The two partition portions 717 support the rotation shaft of the middle reel 711M so that the middle reel 711M can rotate.

  On the rear side of one of the two partition portions 717 (in the present embodiment, the right partition portion 717), an extending portion 786 is provided that extends in the substantially horizontal direction across the rotation axis of the middle reel 711M. . On the right side surface of the right partition portion 717 and the extending portion 786 (that is, the surface away from the middle reel 711M), a rack gear (not shown) with gear teeth for the gear 781 is provided in a substantially horizontal direction. It is formed linearly.

  The gear 781 is connected to a drive mechanism (not shown) that is driven and controlled by the sub-control board 940 and operates by drive control of the drive mechanism by the sub-control board 940. The gear 781 is provided so as to be meshed with the rack gear formed in the partition portion 717 and the extending portion 786, whereby the rack is formed by the rack gear formed in the partition portion 717 and the extending portion 786 and the gear 781. The middle reel 711M can be moved in the front-rear direction by the and pinion mechanism.

  The left reel 711L is provided with an extending portion 787 extending in the substantially horizontal direction on the left side from the rotation axis of the left reel 711L. On the rear side surface of the extending portion 787, a rack gear (not shown) in which gear teeth for the gear 782 are cut is linearly formed in a substantially horizontal direction.

  The gear 782 is connected to a drive mechanism (not shown) that is driven and controlled by the sub-control board 940 and operates by drive control of the drive mechanism by the sub-control board 940. The gear 782 is provided so as to mesh with a rack gear formed in the extending portion 787, and thereby the left reel 711 </ b> L is formed by a rack and pinion mechanism including the rack gear formed in the extending portion 787 and the gear 782. Can be moved in the left-right direction.

  The right reel 711R is provided with an extending portion 788 extending in the substantially horizontal direction on the right side from the rotation axis of the right reel 711R. A rack gear (not shown) in which gear teeth for the gear 783 are cut is linearly formed on the rear side surface of the extending portion 788 in a substantially horizontal direction.

  The gear 783 is connected to a drive mechanism (not shown) that is driven and controlled by the sub-control board 940 and operates by drive control of the drive mechanism by the sub-control board 940. The gear 783 is provided so as to mesh with a rack gear formed in the extending portion 788, whereby the right reel 711 </ b> R is formed by a rack and pinion mechanism including the rack gear formed in the extending portion 788 and the gear 783. Can be moved in the left-right direction.

  When the player operates a predetermined operation unit (for example, the pressing operation device 261) in the state where the display area of each symbol row by each reel 711L, 711M, 711R is shown in FIG. 34 (a), first, the gear 781 is Accordingly, the middle reel 711M moves rearward (in the direction of the arrow M1) so as to be behind the left reel 711L and the right reel 711R.

  Next, the gear 782 and the gear 783 are operated, whereby the left reel 711L moves in the right direction (arrow M2 direction) and the right reel 711R moves in the left direction (arrow M3 direction). In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, it is assumed that the movement amounts of the left reel 711L and the right reel 711R are substantially the same.

  As a result, as shown in FIG. 34 (b), the left reel 711L moving in the right direction and the right reel 711R moving in the left direction display the middle reel 711M located behind the reels 711L and 711R. The area is reduced within a range where the numerical information of the main symbol can be recognized. Therefore, the display area of each symbol row by each reel 711L, 711M, 711R is reduced in the width direction (left-right direction).

  When the player operates a predetermined operation unit (for example, the pressing operation device 261) with the display area of each symbol row by each reel 711L, 711M, 711R shown in FIG. After the reels 711L and 711R operate to open in the left-right direction, the middle reel 711M moves forward and returns to the state shown in FIG.

  Next, the operation and effect of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment described above will be described.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the display area of each symbol row by each reel 711L, 711M, 711R can be reduced by the player operating a predetermined operation unit (for example, the pressing operation device 261). As a result, it is possible to suppress the player from feeling that it is difficult to see the variation display of the decorative symbol.

  When the display area of each symbol row by each reel 711L, 711M, 711R is reduced, the left symbol row (left reel 711L) and the right symbol row (right reel 711R), which are symbol rows that can constitute reach display, are provided. The reach display is displayed in the same size as that before the reduction of the display area by being positioned in front of the middle symbol row (the middle reel 711M). Therefore, it is possible to suppress the loss of expectation for reach display by reducing the display area of each symbol row.

  When the display area of each symbol row by each reel 711L, 711M, 711R is reduced, the middle reel 711M moves to the rear side (back side), and the left and right reels 711L, 711R are substantially the same in the direction approaching each other. Configured to move by a distance of. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the center of the display area of each symbol row from moving due to reduction. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the player's line of sight when viewing the variable display of decorative symbols due to the reduction of the display area of each symbol row from moving to the left or right due to the reduction.

<Eleventh embodiment>
Next, an eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 35 to 40. In the pachinko machine 100 according to the eleventh embodiment, the light guide plate unit 810 including the light guide plate 715B having a curved portion can be suitably assembled. In the following description, the same components as those in the first to tenth embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals and the description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 35 is an exploded perspective view of the game board 400X viewed from the front side. In FIG. 35, the main control device 370 and the sub control device 390 mounted on the back side of the game board 400X are shown together. Further, in FIG. 35, illustration of a part of the structures disposed on the front side of the base body 401 such as the inner and outer rails 402 and 403 and the nail 411 is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 35, in the game board 400X, a drum base 801 for holding the reel device 710 is disposed on the back side of the base body 401. A reel device 710 including three rows of reels 711L, 711M, and 711R is mounted on the drum base 801 from the rear side (back side) of the drum base 800. The resin cover 715 is attached to the front side of the drum base 801 as a light guide plate unit 810 described later together with the base 701 and the like.

  FIG. 36 is an exploded perspective view of the drum base 801 viewed from the front side, and FIG. 37 is a perspective view of the light guide plate unit 810 viewed from the rear side. As shown in FIG. 35, the drum base 801 is a resin base having an outer shape substantially the same as the outer shape of the base 401. The drum base 801 has an opening 801 </ b> A formed at a position where the reel device 710 is attached. The reel device 710 is mounted on the drum base 801 by inserting the reels 711L, 711M, and 711R from the back side of the opening 801A and fixing them with fixing members (not shown) such as screws.

  On the left side and the right side with respect to the opening 801A, a substrate 803 on which light emitting means 802 such as an LED is mounted is provided. The light emitting means 802 is located behind the area where the fish pattern 741 is drawn on the base body 401 and the area where the fish pattern 742 is drawn on the base body 701, and can emit light toward these areas. Means. That is, the light emitting means 802 in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment corresponds to the light emitting means E1 (see FIG. 30B) and the light emitting means E2 (see FIG. 30B) in the pachinko machine 100 according to the eighth embodiment. . Light emission control of the light emitting means 802 is performed by the sub control board 940.

  The board 803 in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment includes a board surface light emitting device 490A (see FIG. 30B) and a board surface light emitting device 490B (see FIG. 30B) in the pachinko machine 100 according to the eighth embodiment. This corresponds to the left and right parts of the reel device 710. In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, illustration of a substrate corresponding to the panel light emitting device 490C (see FIG. 30B) is omitted.

  A holding unit 809 is provided below the opening 801A. The holding unit 809 includes a substrate (not shown) on which the holding lamp 720, the lottery result display device 730, and the like are mounted, and a light-transmitting cover portion that covers the front surface of the substrate.

  A light guide plate unit 810 is disposed in front of the substrate 803 and the holding unit 809. The light guide plate unit 810 includes an outer cover 715A integrated with the base 701, a light guide plate 715B (see FIG. 36) disposed on the rear side of the outer cover 715A, and a curved portion of the light guide plate 715B. A light source unit 812 including a pressing member 811 (see FIG. 36) that can be pressed on the left and right sides of the portion, a light emitting means (not shown) that irradiates light to the upper end surface of the light guide plate 715B, and the light guide plate 715B And a light source unit 813 including light emitting means 834 for irradiating light to the lower end surface of the light source.

  On both the left and right sides and the upper side of the outer cover 715A of the base body 701, a picture seal 703 and a picture seal 704 on which a fish pattern 742 is printed with a light-transmitting colored paint are attached to the front side. A light emitting means 802 capable of irradiating light toward the pattern seal 703 is located behind the pattern seal 703. Further, on the rear side of the pattern sticker 704, there is a light emitting means 825 such as an LED which is disposed on the front end side on the upper surface of the substrate 822 (see FIG. 36) of the light source unit 812 and can irradiate the pattern sticker 704 with light. positioned.

  By turning on (emitting) the light emitting means 802 located on the rear side of the picture sticker 703 and the light emitting means 825 located on the rear side of the picture sticker 704, the picture 742 that appears in the light can be displayed. . The light emitting means 825 in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment corresponds to the light emitting means E2 (see FIG. 30B) in the pachinko machine 100 of the eighth embodiment. Light emission control of the light emitting means 825 is performed by the sub control board 940.

  A light diffusing process (for example, embossing process) having fine irregularities is applied to a region 701A on the back side of the attachment position of the pattern seal 703 on the base 701. Although not shown in FIG. 37 and FIGS. 39 and 40 to be described later, the region on the back side of the attachment position of the pattern seal 703 on the base 701 is also subjected to the same light diffusion processing as the region 701A. By performing such light diffusion processing, the entire area of the picture sticker 703 or the picture sticker 704 can be illuminated by the irradiation light from the light emitting means 802 or the light emitting means 825.

  As shown in FIG. 35, on the upper front side of the light guide plate unit 810, a light emitting means 804 such as an LED and a substrate 806 on which the light emitting means 805 are mounted are provided. The light emitting unit 804 is a light emitting unit that is positioned behind the upper portion of the central structure 420 and emits light forward. The light emitting unit 805 is a light emitting unit that is positioned behind the central structure 420 in the base body 401 and emits light forward. The light emission control of these light emitting means 804 and 805 is performed by the sub control board 940. On the front side of the substrate 806, a lens 807 for diffusing the light emitted from the light emitting means 804 and 805 is provided.

  Next, the configuration of the light guide plate unit 810 will be described in more detail with reference to FIGS. 38 and 40. FIG. 38 is an exploded perspective view of the light guide plate unit 810 viewed from the front side. 39 and 40 are both exploded perspective views of the light guide plate unit 810 viewed from the rear side. 38 and 40, the screws 871A, 871B, 872A, 872B, 881A, 881B, 882A, 882B, and 896 are not shown.

  As shown in FIGS. 38 and 39, an outer cover 715A integrated with the base body 701 is disposed in front of the light guide plate unit 810. The front surface of the outer cover 715A includes a curved portion 715A1 that curves along the curved surfaces of the reels 711L, 711M, and 711R of the reel device 710, and a side portion 715A2 that is connected between the left and right ends of the curved portion 715A1 and the base body 701. Is provided.

  A region 715A3 (for example, texture processing) that has been subjected to light diffusing processing (for example, embossing) having a fine unevenness is formed on the lower portion of the rear surface (back surface) of the curved portion 715A1 (surface facing the reel device 710). 39) is provided. On the upper side of the curved portion 715A1, similarly to the region 715A3, a belt-like region (not shown) subjected to light diffusion processing having a fine uneven shape is provided on the rear surface.

  Note that an area 715A3 formed on the lower side of the curved portion 715A1 and a band-like area similar to the area 715A3 formed on the upper side are a lower line L3 (see FIG. 27) and an upper line, respectively, in the front view of the gaming machine. L1 (see FIG. 27) is provided so as not to overlap the symbols stopped and displayed. Further, light diffusion processing (for example, embossing) having fine irregularities is also applied to the inner surfaces (surfaces facing the reel device 710) of the left and right side portions 715A2.

  Protruding portions 891 (see FIG. 39) projecting rearward are provided along the left and right edges of the outer cover 715A on the rear side (back side) surface of the base body 701 connected to the outer cover 715A. Yes. A screw hole into which a screw 896 used for fixing the pressing member 811 can be screwed is formed in the approximate center of the protruding portion 891. The screw hole and the screw 896 are arranged so that the longitudinal direction thereof is the front-rear direction. After the pressing member 811 is arranged at a position separated from the rear side of the outer cover 715A, the screw 896 is gradually tightened. It can be integrated so that the relative positions in the front-rear direction are close to each other.

  Protrusions 892 and 893 (see FIG. 39) project rearward from the rear surface of the base 701 on the upper and lower sides of the protrusions 891 provided on the left and right sides of the outer cover 715A. The two protrusions 892 located on the upper side are protrusions inserted through the through holes 843A and 843B (see FIG. 38) of the light source unit 812, respectively. On the other hand, the two protrusions 893 located on the lower side are protrusions inserted through the through holes 853A and 853B of the light source unit 813, respectively.

  A screw hole into which screws 871A and 871B (see FIG. 39) used for fixing the light source unit 812 can be screwed is formed at substantially the center of the protrusion 892. On the other hand, a screw hole into which screws 881A and 881B (see FIG. 39) used when fixing the light source unit 813 can be screwed is formed in the approximate center of the protrusion 893. These screw holes and the screws 871A, 871B, 881A, 881B are arranged such that the longitudinal direction is the front-rear direction, and the light source units 812, 813 are arranged at positions separated from the rear side of the outer cover 715A. , The light source units 812 and 813 and the outer cover 715A are integrated so that there is no separation between the front and the back by fixing operation (temporary fixing) of the screws 871A, 871B, 881A and 881B. Alternatively, the light guide plate 715B described later can be integrated by performing a complete fixing operation while gradually correcting the deformation of the light guide plate 715B.

  Further, a through hole 701B through which a screw (not shown) for fixing the light guide plate unit 810 to the drum base 801 is inserted is formed around the outer cover 715A. After the assembly of the light guide plate unit 810 is completed, the screw inserted from the rear side of the through hole 701B is screwed into a screw hole (not shown) formed at a predetermined position on the back side of the drum base 801, thereby introducing the light. The optical plate unit 810 can be fixed to the drum base 801.

  A light guide plate 715B is disposed on the rear side of the outer cover 715A integrated with the base 701. The light guide plate 715B is positioned along the curved surface of the reels 711L, 711M, and 711R of the reel device 710 and is disposed on the rear side of the curved portion 715A1 of the outer cover 715A, and above the curved portion 715B1. A flat surface portion 715B2 and a flat surface portion 715B3 positioned below the curved portion 715B1 are provided. The fish pattern 743 to be displayed with light emission is formed with fine irregularities on one surface side (for example, the back surface side) of the curved portion 715B1.

  Here, since the light guide plate 715B is provided to be curved along the curved surfaces of the reels 711L, 711M, and 711R of the reel device 710, the light guide plate 715B is entirely disposed on the front side along the curved surfaces of the reels 711L, 711M, and 711R of the reel device 710. A fish pattern 743 that is lit and displayed on the curved portion 715B1 can be arranged at a position separated by a certain distance. For this reason, even if the player's viewpoint position changes due to the player's height, posture, etc., the position at which the fish pattern 743 is displayed in front of the reel device 710 may greatly deviate. In addition, the fish pattern 743 can be displayed at an appropriate position on the front side of the reel 711L, 711M, 711R by a certain distance.

  A light source unit 813 for irradiating light to the lower end surface 715B4 (see FIG. 39) of the light guide plate 715B is disposed below the light guide plate 715B. The light source unit 813 includes a substrate base 831 disposed on the rear side with respect to the lower planar portion 715B3 of the light guide plate 715B, a substrate 832 held on the substrate base 831, and a reflector disposed on the front side with respect to the planar portion 715B3. 833.

  The substrate base 831 includes a recess 831A (see FIG. 38) that is open on the lower side and the front side so that the substrate 832 can be received. The substrate 832 is received and fixed in the recess 831A. In the substrate 832, a plurality of light emitting units 834 are arranged on a surface on the upper side of the substrate 832 along an end in the longitudinal direction on the front side of the substrate 832.

  The light emitting unit 834 is a light emitting unit that irradiates light to the lower end surface 715B4 of the light guide plate 715B, and is configured by a light emitting unit having directivity in the light irradiation direction (output direction) such as an LED. The light emitting means 834 in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment corresponds to the light emitting means E4 (see FIG. 31) in the pachinko machine 100 of the eighth embodiment. Light emission control of the light emitting means 834 is performed by the sub control board 940.

  In the state where the light source unit 813 is fixed to the light guide plate 715B, the light emitting unit 834 directs the light irradiation direction to the lower end surface 715B4 of the light guide plate 715B toward the lower end surface 715B4 (that is, upward). And are arranged along the lower end surface 715B4. Therefore, in the state where the substrate 832 is accommodated in the recess 831A, the plurality of light emitting units 834 protrude forward from the front surface 831B of the substrate base 831 as shown in FIG.

  The reflector 833 has a surface 833B (see FIG. 39) facing the surface 831B of the substrate base 831 with the light guide plate 715B interposed therebetween, and has a light-opaque surface with a mirror finish (for example, chrome plating) on the surface thereof. Configured as Similarly, the surface 831B of the substrate base 831 is also configured as a light-impermeable surface having a mirror-finished surface. Thereby, in a state where the light source unit 813 is fixed to the light guide plate 715B, the light of the light emitting means 834 irradiated from the lower side of the lower end surface 715B4 of the light guide plate 715B toward the lower end surface 715B4 is the surface 831B and The light is guided to the lower end surface 715B4 so as to be appropriately incident on the lower end surface 715B4 of the light guide plate 715B by reflection by the surface 833B.

  A through hole 851A is provided on the left side of the board base 831 when viewed from the front of the gaming machine, and a through hole 852A is provided inside the through hole 851A (on the right side of the through hole 851A when viewed from the front of the gaming machine). Yes. On the other hand, a through hole 851B is provided on the right side of the board base 831 when viewed from the front of the gaming machine, and a through hole 852B is provided inside the through hole 851B (on the left side of the through hole 851B when viewed from the front of the gaming machine). It has been.

  A through hole 853A that communicates with the through hole 851A in a state in which the light source unit 813 is fixed to the light guide plate 715B is provided on the left end side of the reflector 833 in the front view of the gaming machine. On the other hand, a through hole 853B that communicates with the through hole 851B in a state where the light source unit 813 is fixed to the light guide plate 715B is provided on the right end side of the reflector 833 in the front view of the gaming machine.

  In addition, a projection 854A (see FIG. 39) that protrudes rearward from the rear surface 833B (see FIG. 39) is provided on the inner side of the reflector 833 from the through hole 853A (on the right side of the through hole 853A in the front view of the gaming machine). It has been. When the light source unit 813 is attached to the light guide plate 715B, the protrusion 854A is a protrusion inserted through the through hole 862A formed on the lower left side of the light guide plate 715B in the front view of the gaming machine and the through hole 852A of the board base 831. It is.

  On the other hand, a projection 854B that protrudes rearward from the rear surface 833B (see FIG. 39) is provided inside the through hole 853B in the reflector 833 (left side of the through hole 853B in the front view of the gaming machine). When the light source unit 813 is attached to the light guide plate 715B, the protrusion 854B is inserted into the through hole 862B formed on the lower right side of the light guide plate 715B when viewed from the front of the gaming machine and the through hole 852B of the substrate base 831. It is a protrusion.

  A screw hole into which the screw 882A can be screwed is formed substantially at the center of the protrusion 854A, and a screw hole into which the screw 882B can be screwed is formed at the approximate center of the protrusion 854B. Therefore, after the board base 831 and the reflector 833 are combined so that the protrusion 854A is inserted into the through hole 862A and the through hole 852A, and the protrusion 854B is inserted into the through hole 862B and the through hole 852B, the screw 882A is protruded. The light source unit 813 can be fixed (attached) to the light guide plate 715B as shown in FIG. 40 by screwing into the screw hole of the portion 854A and screwing the screw 882B into the screw hole of the protruding portion 854B.

  Here, the screws 882A and 882B are arranged such that the longitudinal direction is the front-rear direction. For this reason, the screws 882A and 882B are fixed (temporarily fixed) so that the substrate base 831 and the reflector 833 are separated from each other before and after, and then the relative position between the light source unit 813 and the light guide plate 715B. In addition, it is possible to perform integration by performing a complete fixing operation while slowly aligning the angles so that excessive deformation does not occur.

  As shown in FIG. 39, the through-hole 862A formed in the light guide plate 715B is such that the displacement of the position of the protrusion 854A inserted into the through-hole 862A with respect to the through-hole 862A is hardly allowed in any of the upper, lower, left, and right directions. The protrusion 854A has a substantially circular shape with a size that matches the outer diameter of the protrusion 854A. Therefore, the protrusion 854A inserted through the through hole 862A is positioned at a substantially constant position by the through hole 862A.

  In contrast, the through hole 862B has the maximum vertical height H3 that is the same as the maximum vertical height of the through hole 862A, but the maximum horizontal width W4 is greater than the maximum horizontal width W3 of the through hole 862A. A large elongated hole shape is formed in the left-right direction with respect to the outer diameter of the large protrusion 854B. Therefore, the protrusion 854B inserted through the through-hole 862B is positioned at a substantially constant position in the vertical direction with respect to the through-hole 862B, like the protrusion 854A inserted into the through-hole 862A, but the through-hole 862B. With respect to the horizontal direction, the allowable positioning range is larger than the vertical direction. Accordingly, the distance between each of the plurality of light emitting means 834 provided in the light source unit 813 and the lower end surface 715B4 (see FIG. 39) of the light guide plate 715B is made substantially constant, and the fish pattern 743 of the light guide plate 715B is made. The light-emitting display can have a good appearance with little variation in the amount of light in the left-right direction.

  When the light source unit 813 is fixed to the light guide plate 715B, the through hole 851A of the substrate base 831 and the through hole 853A of the reflector 833 communicate with each other, and the through hole 851B of the substrate base 831 and the through hole 853B of the reflector 833 communicate with each other. . Screws 881A inserted into the through holes 851A and 853A that communicate with each other and screws 881B inserted into the through holes 851B and 853B that communicate with each other are screwed into a protrusion 893 (see FIG. 39) projecting rearward from the base body 701. Thus, the light source unit 813 fixed to the lower side of the light guide plate 715B can be fixed to the base body 701.

  As shown in FIG. 39, the through-hole 853A of the reflector 833 and the through-hole 851A of the substrate base 831 corresponding to the through-hole 853A have a protrusion whose vertical height H5 is larger than the horizontal width W5. It has a long hole shape that is slightly larger in the vertical direction than the outer diameter of the portion 893. The maximum height H5 is larger than the maximum height H3 in the vertical direction in the through holes 862A and 862B. Similarly, the through-hole 853B of the reflector 833 and the through-hole 851B of the substrate base 831 corresponding to the through-hole 853B have the same shape as the through-hole 853A, that is, slightly in the vertical direction with respect to the outer diameter of the protruding portion 893. It is configured in a large slot shape.

  Accordingly, the through holes 851A and 853A that communicate with each other and the protrusions 893 that are inserted into the through holes 851B and 853B that communicate with each other are displaced in the vertical direction with respect to the through holes 851A and 853A or the through holes 851B and 853B. Allowed compared to displacement. Thereby, the allowable range of positioning of the light source unit 813 with respect to the base 701 is larger in the vertical direction than in the horizontal direction.

  A light source unit 812 that irradiates light to the upper end surface 715B5 (see FIG. 39) of the light guide plate 715B is disposed above the light guide plate 715B. The light source unit 812 includes a substrate base 821 disposed on the rear side with respect to the upper planar portion 715B2 of the light guide plate 715B, a substrate 822 held on the substrate base 821, and a reflector 823 disposed on the front side with respect to the planar portion 715B2. And.

  The substrate base 821 includes a recess 821A whose upper and front sides are open so that the substrate 822 can be received. The substrate 822 is received and fixed in the recess 821A. In the substrate 822, a plurality of light emitting means (not shown) are arranged on the surface on the lower side of the substrate 822 along the longitudinal side edge on the front side of the substrate 822. Hereinafter, for convenience, the light emitting means provided on the lower surface of the substrate 822 is also referred to as “light emitting means 824”.

  The light emitting unit 824 is a light emitting unit that irradiates light to the upper end surface 715B5 of the light guide plate 715B, and is configured by a light emitting unit such as an LED having directivity in the light irradiation direction (output direction), similar to the light emitting unit 834. The The light emitting means 824 in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment corresponds to the light emitting means E4 (see FIG. 31) in the pachinko machine 100 of the eighth embodiment. Light emission control of the light emitting means 824 is performed by the sub control board 940.

  In the state where the light source unit 812 is fixed to the light guide plate 715B, the light emitting unit 834 directs the light irradiation direction toward the upper end surface 715B5 above the upper end surface 715B5 of the light guide plate 715B (ie, downward). ) Provided along the upper end surface 715B5. Therefore, the plurality of light emitting units 824 protrude forward from the front surface 821B of the substrate base 821 in a state where the substrate 822 is accommodated in the recess 821A.

  In addition, the substrate 822 is provided with light emitting means 825 such as an LED that emits light toward the pattern seal 704 (that is, toward the front) on the front end side of the upper surface of the substrate 822.

  In the reflector 823, a surface 823B (see FIG. 39) facing the surface 821B of the substrate base 821 with the light guide plate 715B interposed therebetween is similar to the surface 833B of the reflector 833, and its surface is mirrored. Configured as a face. The surface 821B of the substrate base 821 is also configured as a light-impermeable surface having a mirror-finished surface. Thereby, in the state where the light source unit 812 is fixed to the light guide plate 715B, the light of the light emitting means 824 emitted from the upper side of the upper end surface of the light guide plate 715B toward the upper end surface 715B5 is the surface 821B and the surface 823B. Is guided to the upper end surface 715B5 so as to be appropriately incident on the upper end surface 715B5 of the light guide plate 715B.

  A through hole 841A is provided on the left end of the board base 821 when viewed from the front of the gaming machine, and a through hole 842A is provided inside the through hole 841A (on the right side of the through hole 841A when viewed from the front of the gaming machine). Yes. On the other hand, a through hole 841B is provided on the right end side of the board base 821 when viewed from the front of the gaming machine, and a through hole 842B is provided inside the through hole 841B (on the left side of the through hole 841B when viewed from the front of the gaming machine). It has been.

  A through hole 843A having the same shape as the through hole 841A that communicates with the through hole 841A in a state where the light source unit 812 is fixed to the light guide plate 715B is provided on the left end side of the reflector 823 when viewed from the front of the gaming machine. . On the other hand, a through hole 843B having the same shape as the through hole 841B communicating with the through hole 841B in a state where the light source unit 812 is fixed to the light guide plate 715B is provided on the right end side of the reflector 823 when viewed from the front of the gaming machine. ing.

  Further, a projection 844A that protrudes rearward from the rear surface 823B (see FIG. 39) is provided on the inner side of the reflector 823 from the through hole 843A (on the right side of the through hole 843A in the front view of the gaming machine). When the light source unit 812 is attached to the light guide plate 715B, the protrusion 844A is a protrusion inserted into the through hole 861A formed on the upper left side of the light guide plate 715B when viewed from the front of the gaming machine and the through hole 842A of the board base 821. It is.

  On the other hand, a projection 844B that protrudes rearward from the rear surface 823B (see FIG. 39) is provided inside the through-hole 843B in the reflector 823 (on the left side of the through-hole 843B in the gaming machine front view). When the light source unit 812 is attached to the light guide plate 715B, the protrusion 844B is inserted into the through hole 861B formed in the upper right side of the light guide plate 715B in the front view of the gaming machine and the through hole 842B of the board base 821. It is.

  A screw hole into which the screw 872A can be screwed is formed substantially at the center of the protrusion 844A, and a screw hole into which the screw 872B can be screwed is formed at the approximate center of the protrusion 844B. Therefore, after the board base 821 and the reflector 823 are combined so that the protruding portion 844A is inserted into the through hole 861A and the through hole 842A, and the protruding portion 844B is inserted into the through hole 861B and the through hole 842B, the screw 872A is protruded. The light source unit 812 can be fixed (attached) to the light guide plate 715B as shown in FIG. 40 by screwing into the screw hole of the portion 844A and screwing the screw 872B into the screw hole of the protruding portion 844B.

  Here, the screws 872A and 872B are arranged such that the longitudinal direction is the front-rear direction. For this reason, the screws 872A and 872B are integrated (temporarily fixed) so that the substrate base 821 and the reflector 823 are separated from each other before and after, and then the relative position between the light source unit 812 and the light guide plate 715B. In addition, it is possible to perform integration by performing a complete fixing operation while slowly aligning the angles so that excessive deformation does not occur.

  The through-hole 861A formed in the light guide plate 715B, like the above-described through-hole 862A, is such that the displacement of the position of the protrusion 844A inserted into the through-hole 861A with respect to the through-hole 861A is hardly allowed. The protrusion 844A has a substantially circular shape with a size matching the outer diameter. Therefore, the protrusion 844A inserted through the through hole 861A is positioned at a substantially constant position by the through hole 861A.

  Similarly to the above-described through hole 862B, the through hole 861B has a long hole shape that is slightly larger in the left-right direction than the outer diameter of the protrusion 844B. Therefore, the protrusion 844B inserted through the through-hole 861B is positioned at a substantially constant position in the vertical direction with respect to the through-hole 862B, like the protrusion 844A inserted into the through-hole 861A, but the through-hole 861B. With respect to the horizontal direction, the allowable positioning range is larger than the vertical direction. Thereby, the distance between each of the plurality of light emitting means 824 provided in the light source unit 812 and the upper end surface 715B5 (see FIG. 39) of the light guide plate 715B is made substantially constant, and the fish pattern 743 by the light guide plate 715B is obtained. It can have good appearance with little variation in light quantity in the left-right direction.

  When the light source unit 812 is fixed to the light guide plate 715B, the through hole 841A of the substrate base 821 and the through hole 843A of the reflector 823 communicate with each other, and the through hole 841B of the substrate base 821 and the through hole 843AB of the reflector 823 communicate with each other. . Screws 871A inserted into the communicating through holes 841A and 843A and screws 871B inserted into the communicating through holes 841B and 843B are screwed into a protruding portion 892 (see FIG. 39) projecting rearward from the base body 701. Thus, the light source unit 812 fixed to the upper side of the light guide plate 715B can be fixed to the base 701.

  The through-holes 843A and 843B of the reflector 823 and the through-holes 841A and 841B of the substrate base 821 corresponding to the through-holes 843A and 843B, respectively, are the same as the above-described through-holes 853A, 853B, 841A, and 841B. It has a long hole shape that is slightly larger in the vertical direction than the outer diameter of the portion 892. Therefore, the allowable range of positioning of the light source unit 812 with respect to the base body 701 is larger in the vertical direction than in the horizontal direction as in the case of the light source unit 813 described above.

  On the rear side of the light guide plate 715B, pressing members 811 are arranged on the left and right ends of the light guide plate 715B. The pressing member 811 protrudes from the pressing portion 811A configured in a shape along the curved shape of the bending portion 715A1 of the outer cover 715A and a frame portion connecting both ends of the pressing portion 811A to the right or the left in the front view of the gaming machine. And a mounting portion 811B. The mounting portion 811B is provided at a position corresponding to a protruding portion 891 (see FIG. 39) protruding rearward from the base body 701, and a through hole communicating with the screw hole of the protruding portion 891 is formed. Therefore, the pressing member 811 can be fixed to the base body 701 by screwing the screw 896 inserted through the through hole of the mounting portion 811B into the screw hole of the protruding portion 891.

  In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 40, after the curved portion 715B1 of the light guide plate 715B to which the light source units 812 and 813 are fixed is disposed on the rear side of the curved portion 715A1 of the outer cover 715A, Prior to fixing the light source units 812 and 813 to the base body 701 by 871A, 871B, 881A and 881B, the left and right pressing members 811 are fixed to the base body 701 with screws 896.

  The pressing portion 811A is a portion for pressing the bending portion 715B1 of the light guide plate 715B against the bending portion 715A1 (toward the bending portion 715A1) in a state where the pressing member 811 is fixed to the base 701. The holding portion 811A is configured in a shape having a front end portion along the curved shape of the curved portion 715A1 of the outer cover 715A. For this reason, when the pressing member 811 is fixed (attached) to the base body 701, the curved portion 715B1 of the light guide plate 715B is removed from the predetermined gap between the curved portion 715A1 of the outer cover 715A and the pressing portion 811A. If it has deform | transformed, the holding | suppressing part 811A will press the right and left both ends of curved part 715B1, and, thereby, the shape of curved part 715B1 will be hold | maintained in the state corrected so that the shape of curved part 715A1 might be matched.

  Here, the curved portion 715B1 of the light guide plate 715B is not necessarily in contact with at least one of the curved portion 715A1 of the outer cover 715A and the pressing portion 811A of the pressing member 811, and when a certain amount or more of deformation occurs. It may be set to a design dimension that comes into contact with each other, or may be set to a dimension that always comes into contact with any one.

  Further, when the left and right pressing members 811 are fixed to the base 701 with screws 896, the gaps between the curved portion 715A1 of the outer cover 715A and the pressing portion 811A of the pressing member 811 are the rear side of the screws 871A, 871B, 881A, 881B. The screw 896 is fixed so that the screw 896 narrows as it is fixed. For this reason, the curved portion 715A1 of the outer cover 715A and the pressing portion 811A of the pressing member 811 can gradually correct a certain amount or more of the deformation of the curved portion 715B1 of the light guide plate 715B. Since the force due to tightening of the screw 896 can be used, the operator can easily attach the pressing member 811 while suppressing breakage of the light guide plate 715B and the like.

  The pressing member 811 is formed in a mesh shape having an opening through which light can be transmitted from one surface to the other surface between the pressing portion 811A and the frame portion connecting both ends of the pressing portion 811A. Light emitted from the reel device 710 and the light guide plate 715B inside the member 811 passes outside through the pressing member 811. The side portion 715A2 of the outer cover 715A emits light by the light.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the pressing member 811 is fixed to the base body 701 with the screw 896 before the light source units 812 and 813 are fixed to the base body 701 with the screws 871A, 871B, 881A, 881B. However, after the light source units 812 and 813 are temporarily fixed to the base body 701 with screws 871A, 871B, 881A and 881B, the pressing member 811 is fixed to the base body 701 with screws 896, and then the screws 871A, 871B, The light source units 812 and 813 may be fixed to the base body 701 by 881A and 881B. By temporarily fixing with the screws 871A, 871B, 881A, 881B, the position of the light guide plate 715B with respect to the outer cover 715A can be roughly positioned, so that the light guide plate 701B can be attached with high accuracy.

  In addition, screws 872A for integrating the light source units 812, 813 and the light guide plate 715B within a range where the fixing positions for fixing the light source units 812, 813 to the base body 701 by the screws 871A, 871B, 881A, 881B are four corners. Fixed positions at which 872B, 882A, and 882B are arranged are provided. Specifically, the light source unit 812 is fixed to the base body 701 in the vicinity of the two screws 872A and 872B for integrating the light source unit 812 and the light guide plate 715B and on both outer sides of the screws 872A and 872B. Fixing positions (screws 871A, 871B) are provided. Further, in the vicinity of each of the two screws 882A and 882B for integrating the light source unit 813 and the light guide plate 715B, a fixing position for fixing the light source unit 813 to the base body 701 on both outer sides of the screws 882A and 882B. (Screws 881A and 881B) are provided. For this reason, the shape in which the light source units 812 and 813 and the light guide plate 715B are integrated can be easily held without being changed in a situation where the light source unit 813 is fixed to the base body 701, and the performance defect of the light guide plate 715B can be suppressed. In addition, the fish pattern 724 using the light guide plate 715B can be displayed with good appearance.

  Next, the operation and effect of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment described above will be described.

  In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the through holes 841A and 843A and the through holes 841B and 843B formed on the left and right sides of the upper light source unit 812 are vertically aligned with respect to the outer diameter of the protruding portion 892 formed on the base body 701. It is constructed in the shape of a long hole that is slightly larger in the direction. Similarly, the through holes 851A and 853A and the through holes 851B and 853B formed on the left and right sides of the lower light source unit 813 are also vertically formed with respect to the outer diameter of the protruding portion 893 formed on the base 701. Slightly larger oblong hole shape.

  Therefore, the allowable range of positioning of the light source units 812 and 813 with respect to the base 701 is relatively permissible in the direction in which the plate surface of the light guide plate 715B continues (up and down direction). Even if the curved portion 715B1 of the light guide plate 715B is deformed due to a manufacturing error or the like by fixing the light plate 715B to the base body 701 via the light source units 812 and 813, the light guide plate 715B accompanying the deformation is caused. Displacement in the direction in which the plate surfaces continue (vertical direction) is allowed. Therefore, in order to suppress the manufacturing cost of the light guide plate 715B including the curved portion, even if the manufacturing variation of the light guide plate 715B is greatly allowed, the light guide plate 715B is curved when integrated with the base body 701 and the outer cover 715A. It can suppress that the load of the up-down direction with respect to part 715B1 (namely, the force which expands and compresses curved part 715B1) can be suppressed, and it can suppress that the light-guide plate 715B is damaged at the time of the assembly of the light-guide plate unit 810.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the through holes 861A and 861B formed on the left and right sides of the light guide plate 715B are both protrusions 844A of the light source unit 812 inserted into the through holes 861A and 861B. , 844B is configured to have a size in which the vertical displacement of the position is not allowed. Similarly, the through holes 862A and 862B formed on the left and right sides of the lower side of the light guide plate 715B are also vertically aligned with respect to the protrusions 854A and 854B of the light source unit 813 inserted through the through holes 862A and 862B. The size is such that the displacement is hardly allowed.

  Therefore, the light source units 812 and 813 can be positioned and integrated with respect to the light guide plate 715B at a suitable position in the direction (vertical direction) in which the plate surface of the light guide plate 715B continues. Accordingly, the position of the light emitting means 824 with respect to the upper end surface 715B5 (see FIG. 39) of the light guide plate 715B and the position of the light emitting means 834 with respect to the lower end surface 715B4 (see FIG. 39) of the light guide plate 715B are preferably used. Therefore, the poor performance of the light guide plate 715B due to the misalignment of the light emitting means 824 or the light emitting means 834 can be suppressed, and the fish pattern 724 using the light guide plate 715B can be luminescently displayed with good appearance.

  Of the through holes 861A and 861B formed on the left and right sides of the upper side of the light guide plate 715B, one through hole 861A is configured to have such a size that the displacement in the left and right direction of the corresponding protrusion 844A is hardly allowed. On the other hand, the other through-hole 861B is configured such that a displacement in the left-right direction relative to the corresponding protrusion 844B is relatively allowed. Similarly, of the through holes 862A and 862B formed on the left and right sides of the lower side of the light guide plate 715B, one of the through holes 862A is also sized so that the horizontal displacement of the position with respect to the corresponding protrusion 854A is hardly allowed. In contrast, the other through-hole 862B is configured such that a displacement in the left-right direction relative to the corresponding protrusion 854B is relatively allowed.

  Therefore, even if there is a manufacturing error or the like in the installation position of the projections 844A and 844B in the light source unit 812 or the installation position of the projections 854A and 854B in the light source unit 813, the manufacturing error is determined as the through hole 861B or the through hole 862. Can be absorbed by the displacement in the left-right direction allowed by. Thereby, it can suppress that the manufacturing error of protrusion part 844A, 844B, 854A, 854B has a bad influence on the positioning accuracy in the up-down direction of the light source units 812 and 813 with respect to the light-guide plate 715B.

  In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the light source units 812 and 813 are pressed against the curved portion 715A1 by the pressing member 811 on the left and right sides of the curved portion 715B1 of the light guide plate 715B attached to the top and bottom. Units 812 and 813 are fixed to the base 701.

  Therefore, the light guide plate 715B is fixed to the base body 701 integrated with the outer cover 715A in a state where the shape of the curved portion 715B1 is corrected in advance to the shape of the curved portion 715A1 by the pressing member 811. Even when the portion 715B1 is deformed due to a manufacturing error or the like, when the light guide plate 715B is fixed to the base body 701, the load on the bending portion 715B1 in the vertical direction (that is, the bending portion 715B1 is stretched or compressed). Force) can be suppressed. Also in this respect, the light guide plate 715B can be prevented from being damaged when the light guide plate unit 810 is assembled.

<Twelfth embodiment>
Next, a twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The pachinko machine 100 according to the twelfth embodiment is characterized by how the light guide plate 715B shines. In the following description, the same components as those in the first to eleventh embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals and the description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 41A is a schematic diagram illustrating the traveling direction of light incident on the lower end surface 715B4 of the light guide plate 715B, and FIG. 41B is a front view of the light guide plate 715B showing an example of how to shine. It is.

  As shown in FIG. 41 (a), the lower end surface 715B4 of the light guide plate 715B has left and right smaller than the left and right widths of one light-emitting means 834 when viewed from the front (or viewed in the direction along the thickness direction of the light guide plate 715B). A plurality of trapezoidal concave portions Z having a width are formed in a continuous shape. Further, the lower end surface 715B4 of the light guide plate 715B has trapezoidal concave portions Z having a lateral width smaller than the light irradiation width of the one light emitting means 834, and the light emitting width of the one light emitting means 834 is within the light irradiation width. In addition, it is configured in a shape in which a plurality of recesses Z are located. It is preferable that 5 or more are provided in the irradiation width of the light by one light emission means 834, and it is preferable that 10 or more are provided in the plurality of recesses Z. The width of the trapezoid constituting each recess Z is preferably set to 0.5 mm or less, and more preferably set to 0.1 mm or less.

  The concave portion Z includes a side Z1 extending substantially horizontally as a bottom of the concave portion Z, a side Z2 extending to the lower left direction connected to the left end C1 of the side Z1, and a lower side extending to the right end C2 of the side Z1. An extending side Z3 is provided.

  As described above, the light emitting unit 834 disposed below the end surface 715B4 is configured by a light emitting unit having directivity in the light irradiation direction (output direction), such as an LED. Accordingly, the side Z1 of the recess Z is substantially orthogonal to the light irradiation direction (output direction) by the light emitting means 834 in a state where the light source unit 813 is attached to the lower side of the light guide plate 715B. That is, since the light emitted from the light emitting unit 834 is incident substantially perpendicular to the side Z1 of the recess Z, the light incident from the side Z1 is in a direction substantially perpendicular to the side Z1 (arrow F1 direction). It proceeds in the light guide plate 715B.

  Since the light guide plate 715B is made of a resin having a refractive index (absolute refractive index) greater than 1, such as acrylic resin, the light guide plate 715B is incident from the side Z2 or the side Z3 inclined with respect to the light irradiation direction by the light emitting means 834. The light is refracted according to the relationship of (sin (incident angle φ1) / sin (refractive angle φ2)) = (refractive index of light guide plate 715B / refractive index of air). In this case, the incident angle φ1 is an incident angle of light incident on the light guide plate 715B (side Z2 or side Z3) from the air, and the refraction angle φ2 is a refraction angle of light incident on the light guide plate 715B. .

  For example, when the light guide plate 715B is made of an acrylic resin, the refractive index of the light guide plate 715B is approximately 1.5 that is the refractive index of the acrylic resin. In the following description, the refractive index of the light guide plate 715B is calculated as 1.5 for convenience. On the other hand, since the refractive index of air is approximately 1 (hereinafter, the refractive index of air is assumed to be 1 for convenience), the light incident from the side Z2 or the side Z3 is (sin (incident angle φ1) / sin ( Refraction occurs according to the relationship of refraction angle φ2)) = 1.5.

  The incident angle φ1 of light by the light emitting means 834 with respect to the side Z2 of the recess Z is equal to the angle θ1 formed by the side Z2 inclined in the lower left direction and the side Z1 extending substantially horizontally in the recess Z, that is, the incident angle φ1 = angle Since θ1, the refraction angle φ2 of the light incident from the side Z2 is a value of φ2 that satisfies sin (refraction angle φ2) = (sin (angle θ1) /1.5). For example, when the angle θ1 is approximately 41 °, the refraction angle φ2 is approximately 26 °.

  That is, when the angle θ1 formed by the side Z2 tilted in the lower left direction and the side Z1 is approximately 41 °, the light emitted from the light emitting means 834 is approximately 41 ° with respect to the side Z2 of the recess Z in the light guide plate 715B. Is incident at an incident angle φ1, and refracted at a refraction angle φ2 of approximately 26 °, and proceeds in the direction of the arrow F2 through the light guide plate 715B. Accordingly, when the angle θ1 is approximately 41 °, the traveling direction of light incident from the side Z2 (arrow F2 direction) is leftward with respect to the traveling direction of light incident from the side Z1 (arrow F1 direction). The direction is inclined by an angle θ2 of approximately 15 °.

  The magnitude of the angle θ2 changes according to the magnitude of the angle θ1. Therefore, by changing the angle formed between the side Z1 and the side Z2 which are adjacent two sides in the recess Z (that is, the angle θ1), the angle formed between the traveling directions of the respective lights incident from the side Z1 and the side Z2 (that is, the angle θ1). , Angle θ2) can be changed. For example, by setting the angle θ1 formed by the side Z1 and the side Z2 to about 60 °, the angle θ2 formed by the traveling direction of each light incident from the side Z1 and the side Z2 can be set to about 25 °. it can.

  For the side Z3 of the recess Z, similarly to the side Z2, the incident angle φ1 of the light by the light emitting means 834 with respect to the side Z3 is equal to the angle formed by the side Z3 inclined in the lower right direction and the side Z1 extending substantially horizontally. . Therefore, according to the angle of the side Z3 with respect to the side Z1, the traveling direction of light incident from the side Z3 (arrow F3 direction) can be tilted with respect to the traveling direction of light incident from the side Z1 (arrow F1 direction). .

  In the example shown in FIG. 41A, the angle formed by the side Z1 and the side Z3 is configured to be equal to the angle θ1 formed by the side Z1 and the side Z2, so that the light is incident from the side Z1 and the side Z3, respectively. The angle formed by the traveling direction of each light is equal to the angle θ2 formed by the traveling direction of each light incident from side Z1 and side Z2. Therefore, when the angle θ2 is approximately 15 °, the light incident from the concave portion Z is light that travels in a direction (arrow F1 direction) substantially equal to the light irradiation direction by the light emitting means 834 and left and right with respect to the light. It is separated into light traveling in a direction inclined by approximately 15 ° (arrow F2 and arrow F3 directions). Note that the angle θ1 formed by the side Z1 and the side Z2 and the angle θ2 formed by the side Z1 and the side Z3 are not necessarily the same.

  Since the traveling direction of light incident from side Z1 (the direction of arrow F1) and the traveling direction of light incident from side Z2 (the direction of arrow F2) intersect at an angle θ2, the intersection of side Z1 and side Z2 (ie, side In a region D1 extending from the left end C1 of Z1 at an angle θ3 equal to the angle θ2, neither the light incident from the side Z1 nor the light incident from the side Z2 enters (or the direction of the arrow F1 or the arrow F2) This is a region where light that is weaker than light that travels to).

  Similarly, since the traveling direction of light incident from side Z1 (arrow F1 direction) and the traveling direction of light incident from side Z3 (arrow F3 direction) intersect at a predetermined angle, the intersection of side Z1 and side Z3 The region D2 extending from the side Z1 (ie, the right end C2 of the side Z1) at an angle equal to the angle is also a region where neither the light incident from the side Z1 nor the light incident from the side Z3 enters (or the direction of the arrow F1 or This is a region where light that is weaker than light traveling in the direction of arrow F3 enters.

  By providing a plurality of the recesses Z described above on the lower end surface 715B4 of the light guide plate 715B, the light incident from the lower side of the light guide plate 715B is separated in three directions as shown in FIG. The light guide plate 715B can be moved upward.

  That is, the light irradiated to the range K1 in the end face 715B4 is incident from the side Z1 of each recess Z included in the range K1, and is in the direction substantially equal to the direction of arrow F1 (that is, the light irradiation direction by the light emitting means 834). ), A band-shaped region 981A composed of light traveling in the direction Z), a band-shaped region 981B composed of light traveling from the side Z2 and traveling in the direction of the arrow F2, and entering from side Z3 and traveling in the direction of the arrow F3. A band-shaped region 981C constituted by light is formed.

  In addition, the light incident from the lower end surface 715B4 and guided by the light guide plate 715B is guided so as to almost come out of the light guide plate 715B around the top X of the curved portion 715B1 that protrudes forward and curves. The curvature of the optical plate 715B and the plate thickness may be set. In this case, the light traveling in the region 981A, the region 981B, and the region 981C disappears around the top portion X of the curved portion 715B1, and does not reach the upper portion. Further, it is preferable that the light irradiation intensity by the light emitting unit 834 is set so that the light incident from the end face 715B4 and guided by the light guide plate 715B can reach at least the top X of the curved portion 715B1.

  When the light emitting unit 834 is configured by a light emitting unit that can emit light of a plurality of colors, when the light emitting unit 834 irradiates light of a predetermined color (for example, red light) to the range K1, the region 981A, the region 981B, In addition, the light of the color can travel in the region 981C. Therefore, when the light emitting means 834 irradiates the range K1 with red light, only the regions 981A, 981B, and 981C overlap in the fish pattern 743 drawn with fine irregularities on one surface side of the curved portion 715B1 of the light guide plate 715B. In these regions 981A, 981B, and 981C, red light is emitted and displayed by red light traveling upward.

  In addition, as described above, the concave portion Z is formed in a shape that forms the regions D1 and D2 into which the irradiation light from the light emitting means 834 does not enter, so that the end surface 715B4 is between the region 981A and the region 981B. A region 982 in which the light irradiated in the range K1 does not travel is formed. Similarly, a region 983 where the light irradiated to the range K1 does not travel is formed between the region 981A and the region 981BC. Therefore, in the fish pattern 743 drawn on the curved portion 715B1, the region 982 and the portion within the region 983 are not subjected to light emission display by the light irradiated to the range K1. Thereby, for example, when the range K1 is irradiated with red light, the range between the region 981B and the region 98C can be lit and displayed in a mottled red color.

  Further, when a color (for example, blue light) different from the color irradiated to the range K1 is irradiated to the range K2 of the end surface 715B4 that is different from the range K1, the light enters from the side Z1 of each recess Z included in the range K2. Thus, light of a different color from the band-like region 983A composed of light of a different color from the regions 983A to 983C traveling in the direction of the arrow F1 and the regions 983A to 983C entering from the side Z2 and traveling in the direction of the arrow F2 And a band-shaped region 983C formed of light of a different color from the regions 983A to 983C that enter from the side Z3 and travel in the direction of the arrow F3.

  Therefore, when the light emitting means 834 irradiates the range K2 with blue light, only the regions 983A, 983B, and 983C overlap in the fish pattern 743 drawn with fine irregularities on one surface side of the curved portion 715B1 of the light guide plate 715B. In these regions 983A, 983B, and 983C, blue light is emitted and displayed by blue light traveling upward.

  In addition, when the light emitting unit 834 emits red light to the range K1, and the light emitting unit 834 emits blue light to the range K2, the areas 981A and 981B of the fish pattern 743 drawn on the curved portion 715B1. 981C and the regions 983A, 983B, and 983C overlap with each other, the red light that travels in the regions 981A, 981B, and 981C and the blue light that travels in the regions 983A, 983B, and 983C are emitted in a purple color. .

  The upper end surface 715B5 of the light guide plate 715B is also provided with a trapezoidal recess Z in the same front view as the above-described lower end surface 715B4, so that, as shown in FIG. 41 (b), from the upper side of the light guide plate 715B. The incident light can be separated in three directions and traveled downward in the light guide plate 715B.

  That is, the light irradiated to the range K3 in the end face 715B5 is incident from the side Z1 of each concave portion Z included in the range K3 and is substantially in the direction indicated by the arrow F1 (that is, the direction of light irradiation by the light emitting unit 824). ), A band-like region 991A composed of light traveling in the direction Z), a belt-shaped region 991B composed of light incident from the side Z2 and traveling in the direction of the arrow F2, and incident from side Z3 and traveling in the direction of the arrow F3. A band-shaped region 991C constituted by light is formed.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, as in the example shown in FIG. 41 (b), the recess Z formed in the upper end surface 715B5 is the light traveling direction in the region 991A (that is, the direction of the arrow F1). And the angle formed by each traveling direction of light in the region 991B or the region 991C (that is, the directions of arrows F2 and F3) is the traveling direction of light in the region 981A and each traveling direction of light in the region 981B or the region 981C. It is set to be different from the angle formed. That is, in the recess Z formed in the upper end surface 715B5, the angle formed by the side Z2 or the side Z3 with respect to the side Z1 is the angle formed by the side Z2 or the side Z3 with respect to the side Z1 in the recess Z formed in the lower end surface 715B4. It is set to be different.

  The angle formed by the traveling direction of light in the region 991A (that is, the direction of the arrow F1) and each traveling direction of light in the region 991B or the region 991C (that is, the directions of the arrows F2 and F3) is the traveling direction of the light in the region 981A. By making the angle different from the traveling direction of light in the region 981B or the region 981C, the light emission display of the fish pattern 743 in the curved portion 715B1 can have randomness, and the light emission display of the pattern 743 is monotonous. Can be suppressed.

  In the example shown in FIG. 41 (b), the light irradiated to the range K4 located on the left end side in the front view of the gaming machine in the end surface 715B5 is emitted from the side Z1 of each recess Z included in the range K4. A light guide that separates in two directions, a band-shaped region 993A composed of light incident and traveling in the direction of arrow F1, and a band-shaped region 931B composed of light incident from side Z2 and traveling in the direction of arrow F2. It is comprised so that.

  With respect to the light guide, the side Z3 (that is, the left end side of the end surface 715B5 in the front view of the gaming machine) is substantially orthogonal to the side Z1 (that is, the light emitting means 824) with respect to the concave portion Z included in the range K4. This can be realized by making the shape substantially parallel to the light irradiation direction.

  Even if the light emitted from the light emitting means 824 to the range K4 is guided in the left direction in the game machine front view, the light exits from the left end of the light guide plate 715B in the game machine front view before reaching the bending portion 715B1. Therefore, there is no point in guiding light in that direction. Therefore, by guiding light in the two directions of the region 993A and the region 993B, the light irradiated by the light emitting unit 824 can be transmitted to the bending portion 715B1 without waste.

  Note that the same range as the range K4 located on the right end side in the front view of the gaming machine in the end surface 715B5 is also configured by light that enters the concave portion Z included in the range from the side Z1 and travels in the direction of the arrow F1. It may be configured to guide light in two directions: a belt-like region that is formed from light that enters from the side Z3 and travels in the direction of the arrow F3. That is, the recesses Z included in the range may have a shape in which the side Z2 (that is, the side on the right end side of the end surface 715B5 in the gaming machine front view) is substantially orthogonal to the side Z1.

  In addition, regarding the lower end surface 715B4, in the predetermined range on the left and right end sides in the front view of the gaming machine, the shape of the recess Z included in the range is incident from the side Z1 in the same manner as the recess Z included in the range K4. The band-shaped region composed of light traveling in the direction of the arrow F1 and the band-shaped region composed of light incident from the side Z2 or Z3 and traveling in the direction of the arrow F2 or arrow F3 are guided in two directions. You may comprise in the shape which shines.

  Next, the operation and effect of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment described above will be described.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the upper end surface 715B5 and the lower end surface 715B4 of the light guide plate 715B are configured in a shape in which a plurality of trapezoidal recesses Z are continuous in a front view, so that the light emitting means 824 is formed. , 825 including a predetermined direction in which light incident on the light guide plate 715B does not travel or travels as relatively weak light (a direction in which the regions D1 and D2 are formed), and with respect to the predetermined direction, Irradiated from the light emitting means 824 and 825 so as to emit light stronger than the portion extending in the predetermined direction in the regions on both sides inclined to one side and the other about the light emitting means 824 and 825 (for example, the regions 981A and 981C with respect to the region 982). Light can travel (guide light) in the light guide plate 715B. Accordingly, since the light guide plate 715B can be given randomness, it is possible to suppress monotonous light emission display of the pattern 743, thereby making it possible to realize diversification of display modes in the light guide plate 715B. .

  Note that the present invention is not limited to the above embodiments, and may be modified as described below, for example. In this case, each configuration described below may be applied to each of the above embodiments, or a plurality of configurations described below may be combined and applied to each of the above embodiments.

(1) Modified example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the first embodiment In the first embodiment, information such as lottery results of each special effect lottery is stored with respect to the variable display of the decorative symbol being executed. However, the variation of a plurality of (for example, four) decorative symbols including the variation display of the decorative symbol being executed and the variation display of the decorative symbol performed before the variation symbol of the present decorative symbol is displayed. It is good also as a structure by which information, such as a lottery result of each special production | presentation lottery, is memorize | stored whenever the display of each decoration symbol is changed with respect to each display. In such a configuration, even if the lottery result of the special symbol lottery (the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery) corresponding to the variation display of each decorative symbol is not a big hit, the lottery of each special effect lottery Information such as results shall be stored.

  In this way, when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery corresponding to the variation display of the decorative symbol being executed is a big win, in the special gaming state that has subsequently transitioned, the player can By restoring not only the suggestive effects that can appear in the variable display but also the suggested effects that can appear in the decorative display of the decorative symbols performed before the decorative display of the decorative symbol, until the transition to the special gaming state It is possible to know the history of the suggestion production.

  Moreover, in the said 1st Embodiment, although it was set as the structure which can restore | restore a suggestion effect in a special game state, it is not necessary to restrict | limit to a special game state as a time which can restore | restore an suggestion effect, For example, the fluctuation | variation of a decoration symbol During the display, it may be configured to restore the suggestion effect that could appear in the decorative symbol variation display executed before the variation display, so-called “customer waiting effect” (that is, the pachinko machine 100 It may be configured to use a period during which a non-game time by a player has elapsed for a predetermined period of time, which is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479, such as a title display and a demonstration display that is independent of the gaming state). .

  In such a configuration, even if the lottery result of the special symbol lottery (the first special symbol lottery or the second special symbol lottery) corresponding to the variation display of each decorative symbol is not a big hit, the lottery of each special effect lottery Information such as results may be stored.

  Moreover, in the said 1st Embodiment, although it was set as the structure which can restore | restore the suggestion effect which can appear during the fluctuation | variation display of a decoration symbol, it is performed using the image which shows the pending | holding status displayed on the decoration symbol display apparatus 479. A suggestion effect that suggests the probability of occurrence of a special game state for each hold (that is, the right of each unit game held) may be restored. In other words, it may be possible to restore the decorative symbol variation display including the suggestive effect that can appear before the decorative symbol variation display is started. The variable display can be restored over a long period of time after the occurrence. In this case, when the color indicating the degree of expectation is displayed as the reserved display color as the information stored in the predetermined area of the RAM regarding the variable display of the decorative symbols performed before the transition to the special game state being executed. The information on the color for each hold display in, the number of holds at the timing when the start winning corresponding to the big win is generated, and the information on the variable display executed each time the hold is consumed It is preferable that the control board 940 memorizes it because it can more accurately reproduce the process up to the occurrence of the big hit.

  Moreover, in the said 1st Embodiment, although it was set as the structure by which the suggestion effect selected from multiple types appears by operating the press operation apparatus 261 in the operation possible period, in one operation possible period, it was set. A plurality of operation modes that can be operated may be set, and a plurality of types of suggested effects may be associated with each operation mode.

  In this case, when the pressing operation device 261 or the selection operation device 263 is operated in any one of the plurality of operation modes in the operable period, a plurality of suggested effects associated with the operated operation mode are displayed. A suggestion effect selected from the above may be displayed. For example, when a right operation is performed on the selection operation device 263 during a predetermined operable period, the selected one of a plurality of types of patterns constituting the suggestion effect associated with the operation is selected. When a pattern appears and a left operation is performed on the selection operation device 263 in the same operable period, the selected pattern is selected from a plurality of types of patterns constituting the suggestive effect associated with the operation. A configuration in which two patterns appear may be used.

  As described above, when operations in a plurality of different operation modes are possible in the same operation possible period, one operation mode (for example, the selection operation device 263 with respect to the selection operation device 263) is included in the operation possible period. By performing the operation in the right direction), it is inevitably impossible to see the suggestive effect seen by the operation in another operation mode (for example, the left direction operation on the selection operation device 263). On the other hand, by making it possible to restore a suggestion effect that can appear later in the operable period, the player can also see the suggestion effect that the appearance becomes exclusive later. Thereby, the interest in the game can be suitably improved.

  Moreover, in the said 1st Embodiment, although the video effect displayed on the decoration symbol display apparatus 479 was illustrated as a suggestion effect, the suggestion effect does not need to be restricted to a video effect. For example, effects by sounds (speech, music) output from the acoustic devices 281 and 282, effects by light output from the various light emitting devices 490 and 271 to 275, and effects by operations of structures that are operably provided. May be a suggestive element.

  Different suggestion effects may be configured depending on a combination of elements such as an image effect, an effect by sound, an effect by light, and an effect by the operation of the structure. In this case, a suggestion effect with different elements may be displayed depending on the operation mode in the operable period. For example, when the selection operation device 263 is operated in the right direction, a suggestion effect composed of an image effect, an effect by sound, an effect by light, and an effect by operation of a structure is displayed, and the selection operation is performed. When the device 263 is operated in the left direction, the suggestion effect composed of the video effect and the sound effect is displayed, and when the selection operation device 263 is operated in the upward direction, the video effect is displayed. You may make it appear the suggestion production which consists only of.

(2) Modified example of pachinko machine 100 according to the second embodiment In the second embodiment, after the end of the special effect (first special effect, second special effect) that is the suggestive effect, the next operable period The cancelable period (the first cancelable period, the second cancelable period) is provided before the start of (the second operable period, the third operable period), but after the suggestion effect ends From this point, a cancelable period may be provided until the next suggestive effect is started.

  Alternatively, the operation device that instructs execution of the suggestion effect and the operation device that instructs cancellation of execution of the suggestion effect may be different operation devices, and the operable period may also serve as the cancelable period. In the configuration in which the operable period also serves as the cancelable period, a process corresponding to the operating device operated first in the period (that is, execution of the suggestion effect or cancellation of the execution of the suggestion effect) is performed. Alternatively, the process corresponding to the last operated device during the period may be performed.

  Further, in the second embodiment, the player can cancel the execution of the second and subsequent suggestion effects by the suggestion effect canceling function among a plurality of suggestion effects that can appear during one variation display. Although it is configured, a cancelable period may be provided before the start of the variable display or immediately after the start of the variable display, and the execution of the suggested effects that can appear while the variable display is performed may be canceled.

  Moreover, in the said 2nd Embodiment, the suggestion effect which can appear in the variable display provided with the operation possible period (namely, the suggestion effect which appears when a player operates) is canceled by the suggestion effect cancellation function. However, it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the player can cancel the suggestion effect that automatically appears regardless of the player's operation during the decorative symbol variation display.

  Further, in the second embodiment, when the player operates the pressing operation device 261 during the cancelable period, the subsequent suggestion effect is not displayed by not generating the subsequent operable period. Although the subsequent operable period is generated, the player's operation during the operable period may be invalidated so that subsequent suggested effects are not displayed.

  In the second embodiment, when the player operates the pressing operation device 261 during the cancelable period, the subsequent suggestion effect is not displayed. However, the player operates the pressing operation device 261 during the cancelable period. It is good also as a structure by which the suggestion effect with a lower probability of occurrence of a special gaming state appears than the suggestion effect that appears before the cancelable period.

(3) Modified example of pachinko machine 100 according to third and fourth embodiments In the third and fourth embodiments, when the pressing operation device 261 is operated during a predetermined operable period, the operable period The suggestion effect corresponding to the display device 479 of the other pachinko machine 100 or the decoration design display device 479 of the pachinko machine 100 that is the own machine is configured to be displayed in another area. A configuration in which all of the variation display of the decorative symbols after the button is operated is displayed in another area in the decorative symbol display device 479 of the other pachinko machine 100 or the decorative symbol display device 479 of the pachinko machine 100 that is the own machine. It may be. In addition, in the configuration in which all of the decorative symbol display after the operation of the pressing operation device 261 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 479 of the other pachinko machine, the other pachinko machine 100 is displayed in the subsequent operable period. It is good also as a structure which can be operated using an operating device (press operation device 261 etc.).

(4) Modified example of pachinko machine 100 according to the fifth embodiment In the fifth embodiment, as the reserved full tank effect selection table, the number of times of each hold for the first special symbol and the second special symbol is the maximum number. The first table that is referred to when it is the first time in the suspension count monitoring period, the second table that is referred to when it is the second time, the third table that is referred to when it is the third time, and 4 The fourth table to be referred to in the second and subsequent times is prepared, but each of these tables (the first table, the second table, and the third table) is put on a special symbol lottery while on hold. It is divided into a hit time table that is referenced when the winning hold is included, and a missed table that is referenced when the hold that is won in the special symbol lottery is not included in the hold. A configuration may be used.

  By having a winning table and a losing table, if the special symbol lottery hold is included in the hold, compared to the case where the special symbol lottery is not included Since the reserved full tank effect is easily displayed, it is possible to create a situation in which the player is expected to generate a special gaming state by the display of the reserved full tank effect. Therefore, since it is possible to add a feeling of feeling to the progress of the game, the interest of the game can be improved more suitably.

(5) Modified example of pachinko machine 100 according to sixth embodiment In the sixth embodiment described above, by performing the complete loss variation display (variation display not including the reach display) a plurality of times, the variation display including the reach display is performed. Although it is configured to perform variation display of the corresponding variation display time, a configuration in which complete loss variation display of variation display time corresponding to variation display including reach display is prepared exclusively.

  In the sixth embodiment, when the variable display including the reach display is selected as the decorative symbol variable display, the special symbol is put on hold for the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol). When there is a hold that has been selected for the lottery, it is configured to execute the variable display that includes the variable display that does not include the reach display for the same variable display time as the selected variable display. A configuration may be adopted in which a variable display that does not include a reach display and has a variable display time shorter than the display is performed.

  Further, in the sixth embodiment, when a variable display including a reach display is selected as a decorative symbol variable display, and there is a special symbol lottery in a special symbol lottery among the special symbols. Has a configuration that makes it easy to store a hold by executing a change display that includes the change display that does not include the reach display for a plurality of times with the same change display time as the selected change display, with a predetermined probability. The configuration for facilitating the operation is not limited to this.

  For example, when an entrance restriction mechanism that changes the entrance probability of a game ball to the inside of the starter device is provided at the entrance portion of the starter device related to the special design, the attitude of the entry restricting mechanism is changed to the inside of the starter device. It is also possible to make it easier to store the hold by changing the posture to allow the game ball to easily enter (or allow the game ball to enter the inside). Alternatively, by shortening the period from when the reach display is made until the middle symbol is finally stopped, the period during which the player can stop firing the game ball is shortened, thereby making it easier to save the hold. It may be.

  Further, in the sixth embodiment, when there is a holding that is won in the special symbol lottery among the holdings for the special symbols (the first special symbol and the second special symbol), there is no holding that is won Compared to the above, the variable display time may be selected based on the condition that the long time variable display is easily selected as the decorative symbol variable display.

(6) Modification of Pachinko Machine 100 According to Seventh Embodiment In the seventh embodiment, each reel 711L, 711M, 711R is a drum formed in a cylindrical shape, but each reel 711L, 711M , 711R may be a revolving belt in which a decorative pattern is drawn on the outer peripheral surface and rotated by driving of a roller.

  In the seventh embodiment, the second sub-sign warning or count-down notice is performed using the change display performed in the reel device 710 (that is, the decorative display change display by the change of each reel 711L, 711M, 711R). However, a pre-reading effect such as the second sub-sign warning or countdown notice may be performed using the decorative symbol change display displayed on the screen of the decorative symbol display device 479.

  In the seventh embodiment, if it is determined that the stop display timing is reached in the lottery result display device 730 during the reach effect period in the variation display of the decorative pattern being executed, the variation display time of the lamp variation display By extending this, the timing at which stop display is performed in the lottery result display device 730 is excluded from the reach effect period. The configuration for removing the timing at which stop display is performed in the lottery result display device 730 from the reach effect period is not limited to the above method, and for example, the timing at which stop display is performed in the lottery result display device 730 is before the reach effect period. As described above, it is possible to shorten the variation display time of the lamp variation display.

  Alternatively, the timing of the stop display in the lottery result display device 730 can be changed from the reach effect period by shortening the variation display time in the variation display of the decorative pattern being executed without changing the variation display time of the lamp variation display. It is good also as a structure to remove. In such a modified example, since the variation display time in the variation display of the decorative pattern being executed is shortened, the lottery result of the pending full tank effect lottery is shown early while showing the player the suggestion effect executed during the reach effect period. Can show.

  In addition, when the timing at which the lottery result display device 730 is stopped and displayed is during execution of the prefetching effect using a plurality of variable displays, the timing at which the lottery result display device 730 is stopped and displayed is the prefetching effect. The fluctuation display time of the lamp fluctuation display may be extended so that it comes after the end of the fluctuation display of the pre-reading object.

  In addition, when the execution of the pre-reading effect is decided or during the execution of the pre-reading effect, it is confirmed that the special effect display that is determined in advance is executed or the special effect display is executed. If so, the sub-control board 940 may provide control for selecting not to execute the reserved full tank effect.

  In addition, the lottery result display device is displayed at the time when an effect performed by the light emission of the frame light emitting devices 271 to 275 or an effect performed by displaying an image on a resin cover configured as a light guide plate in the reel device 710 is executed. It is good also as a structure which adjusts the execution period of the said production | presentation, or adjusts the fluctuation display time of a lamp fluctuation display so that stop display is not performed in 730.

  In the seventh embodiment, the middle reel 711M, which has been stopped from the variation display before the variation display of the prefetch target in the second sub-sign warning, is changed by the left and right reels 711L and 711R in the variation display of the prefetch target. Although the variation is started in synchronization with the reach display formed on the middle line L2, the variation of the middle reel 711M that has been stopped is displayed at the end of the variation display of the prefetch target (that is, stopped display). It may be configured to start a predetermined time before (for example, 5 seconds).

  Note that the fluctuation of the stopped middle reel 711M is not limited to the start of the reach display, but the effect produced by the light emission of the frame light emitting devices 271 to 275 and the light guide plate in the reel device 710. It may be configured to start in synchronism with an effect performed by displaying an image on a configured resin cover.

  In the seventh embodiment, the second sub symbol 713B (that is, the symbol that does not constitute the jackpot symbol) is displayed on the middle line L2 in the variation display before the pre-change target variation display in the second sub symbol predictive notice. When the middle reel 711M is stopped and displayed in the state, the left and right reels 711L, 711L and 711L, while maintaining the second sub-pattern 713 of the middle reel 711M on the middle line L2 from the beginning to the end of the variation display in the subsequent variation display. 711R is configured to vary.

  Instead of this, or in addition to this, when the left and right reels 711L and 711R are stopped and displayed on the middle line L2 with the symbol that does not constitute the reach display in the variation display before the variation display of the prefetch target, In the variation display, the middle reel 711M may be varied while maintaining the symbols of the middle line L2 in the left and right reels 711L and 711R from the beginning to the end of the variation display.

  In such a configuration, in the variable display two or more times before the prefetch target, the changing middle reel 711M is stopped and displayed with the second sub symbol 713B or the first sub symbol 713A displayed on the middle line L2. In the next change display, the middle reel 711M is changed again. After that, in the change display immediately before the prefetch target, the middle reel 711M is stopped and displayed with the main symbol 712 displayed on the middle line L2, and the left and right reels 711L and 711R are displayed with the middle reel 711M stopped. The first reel (eg, the left reel 711L) is stopped first. At this time, the main symbol 712 of the reel displayed on the middle line L2 can constitute a reach display together with the main symbol 712 of the middle reel 711M displayed on the middle line L2. After one of the left and right reels 711L and 711R is stopped, the other reel is stopped.

  In the seventh embodiment, in the second sub-sign warning, the decorative symbols of the left reels 711L, 711M, and 711R are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction with the main symbol 712 and the sub-symbol 713 (713A, 713B). However, for the left reel 711L to be stopped next to the middle reel 711M, three or more sub-designs 713 are continuously arranged between the main design 712 and the main design 712, or “3” is added. A plurality of sub-symbols 713 may be continuously arranged between the main symbol 712 and the main symbol 712 with “5”.

  According to such a configuration, the second sub-pattern 713B of the middle reel 711M is stopped and displayed on the middle stage line L2, and the continuous sub-picture 713 of the left reel 711R is arranged on the middle stage line L2, so that the upper stage line L1. In any of the middle line L2 and the lower line L3, it is possible to suppress the reach display from being formed by the symbol of the left reel 711L and the symbol of the middle reel 711R.

  In the seventh embodiment, the second sub symbol 713B is provided on the left reel 711L or the right reel 711R. However, the second sub symbol 713B is provided on the left reel 711L or the right reel 711R. The pre-reading effect similar to the second sub-sign warning may be performed using the second sub-design 713B provided on the left reel 711L or the right reel 711R.

  In the seventh embodiment, in the countdown notice, the countdown of the number of times of change display executed until the change display of the prefetch target is executed is the main symbol 712 displayed when the middle reel 711M is finally stopped. However, the countdown may be performed by a temporary stop during the change.

  In the seventh embodiment, the main symbols 712 provided on the reels 711L, 711M, and 711R are all symbols including numbers. However, the left symbols 711L and 711R that are not counted down in the countdown notice are the main symbols 712. However, it may be composed of symbols including numerical information other than numbers. In addition, for the middle reel 711M that counts down in the countdown notice, the main symbol 712 includes a pattern that includes a number (for example, “3”, “2”, “1”) that may be used for the countdown in the countdown notice. , May be composed of symbols including numerical information other than numbers, and is preferably composed of symbols including at least “1” and “2”.

  In the seventh embodiment, in the countdown notice, the countdown of the number of times of change display executed until the change display of the prefetch target is executed is configured by the main symbol 712 of the middle reel 711M, but the countdown is performed. The reel is not limited to the middle reel 711M, but may be a left reel 711L or a right reel 711R.

  In the seventh embodiment, in the countdown notice, the number of the variable display during the pre-reading effect that is being executed until the variable display of the pre-read target is executed is displayed by the countdown. The notice effect may be configured by counting up each time the variable display is executed, and the main symbol 712 may be used for counting up in the count up notice (for example, “1”, “2” ”,“ 3 ”).

(7) Modified Example of Pachinko Machine 100 According to Eighth Embodiment In the eighth embodiment, the school of fish that is directed to the left is displayed on both sides of reel device 710. Only the right side or the left side may be used.

  In the eighth embodiment, the region J is a part of the light-transmitting substrate 401. However, the light-transmitting region J is formed on a substrate that does not have light transmittance. It may be.

  In the eighth embodiment, when a player who is playing the game looks obliquely in the lower left direction, a part of the passage forming member 1631 (passage wall portions 1631A and 1631B) overlaps with the front side of the left information display portion 753. However, the dedicated member that hinders the visibility of the information display portion 753 may be configured to overlap the front side of the information display portion 753 when the player who is playing the game obliquely looks in the lower left direction.

  In the eighth embodiment, when a game ball that has entered the downstream passages 1613A2 and 1613B2 after being entered from the inlet 1611 is detected by the start winning switches 1441A and 1411B, a special design start winning ( That is, the special symbol lottery condition) is established. Instead, when a game ball that has entered the downstream passages 1613A2 and 1613B2 is detected by the detection unit, a fixed number of game balls are awarded as prize balls (privileges) without satisfying the lottery condition. May be.

  In the eighth embodiment, when the game ball that has entered from the entrance 1611 enters the second passages 1614A and 1614B, the special symbol start winning is not established, but when the game ball enters the downstream passages 1613A2 and 1613B2. A configuration in which a privilege with lower value (for example, the number of prize balls, the winning probability of the special symbol lottery, or the gaming state after winning the special symbol lottery) may be given.

(8) Modification of Pachinko Machine 100 According to Ninth Embodiment In the ninth embodiment, the resin cover 715 provided with the half mirrors 761A and 761B has a circular arc shape in a side sectional view. The half mirrors 761 </ b> A and 761 </ b> B may have shapes that face the front upper side and the front lower side, respectively. For example, the shape of the resin cover 715 may be a shape having at least a slope facing the front upper side and a slope facing the front lower side, such as a trapezoidal shape in a sectional view, and faces the convex surface facing the front upper side and the front lower side. The shape comprised from a convex surface and the plane continuously provided between these convex surfaces may be sufficient.

  In the ninth embodiment, the half mirrors 761A and 761B are provided on the upper and lower sides of the resin cover 715. However, the half mirror 761A or the half mirror 761B is provided on either the upper side or the lower side of the resin cover 715. It is good also as a structure to provide.

  In the ninth embodiment, the reel side lamp 717A is provided in the region on the back side of the lower half mirror 761B. However, in addition to or instead of this, the back side of the upper half mirror 761A. The reel side lamp similar to the reel side lamp 717A may be provided in the region. In addition, a reel side lamp similar to the reel side lamp 717A may be provided on the entire front side of the partition portion 717.

  In the ninth embodiment, the half mirrors 761A and 761B are provided on the resin cover 715 of the reel device 710. However, the pressing operation device is attached to the cover provided on the surface of the liquid crystal display device such as the decorative symbol display device 479. In order to allow the player to visually recognize the image G2 and the like by H.261, a projecting portion having an arc shape or the like may be provided in a side sectional view, and half mirrors 761A and 761B may be provided on the projecting portion.

  In the ninth embodiment, the pressing operation device 261 can be turned on (emitted), but the pressing operation device 261 may be configured not to emit light. Even if the pressing operation device 261 does not emit light, the player can recognize the operable period of the pressing operation device 261 by visually recognizing the image G3 of the wave lamp 771 reflected on the half mirror 761B.

(9) Modified example of pachinko machine 100 according to the tenth embodiment In the tenth embodiment described above, in the reel device 710 that displays the decorative symbols in a variable manner by the reels 711L, 711M, and 711R, the display area of each symbol row is set. Although the case of reduction is illustrated, the present invention may be applied to a liquid crystal display device such as a decorative symbol display device 479. For example, among the decorative symbol strings displayed on the liquid crystal display device, the middle symbol string is reduced, and the left and right symbol strings are moved so that the left and right symbol strings are arranged on both sides of the reduced middle symbol string. It may be.

  In the tenth embodiment, after moving the middle reel 711M backward, the left and right reels 711L, 711R are moved in a direction approaching the middle reel 711M. A configuration may be adopted in which the reels 711L and 711R are moved rearward and then moved in a direction approaching the middle reel 711M.

  Alternatively, with the position of the left reel 711L as it is, the middle reel 711M is moved rearward so as to be behind the left reel 711L and then moved in a direction approaching the left reel 711L, and then the right reel 711R is moved from the middle reel 711M. A configuration may be adopted in which the display area of each symbol row is reduced by moving in the direction toward the middle reel 711M after being moved rearward so as to be on the rear side.

  In the tenth embodiment, when the left and right reels 711L and 711R are moved in a direction approaching the middle reel 711M after the middle reel 711M is moved rearward, the LEDs provided inside the middle reel 711M located on the rear side The luminance of the light emitting means such as LED may be higher than the luminance of the light emitting means such as LEDs provided in the left and right reels 711L and 711R located in front of the middle reel 711M. The luminance of the light emitting means provided inside each reel 711L, 711M, 711R is controlled by the sub control board 940.

  According to such a modification, the brightness of the light emitting means provided inside the middle reel 711M located on the rear side is made higher than the brightness of the light emitting means provided inside the left and right reels 711L and 711R, whereby the middle reel 711M. Is positioned on the rear side of the left and right reels 711L and 711R, it is possible to prevent the symbols of the middle reel 711M from becoming difficult to see.

(10) Modified Example of Pachinko Machine 100 According to Eleventh Embodiment In the eleventh embodiment, the light guide plate unit 810 including the light guide plate 715B disposed on the front side of the reel device 710 is illustrated, but the light guide plate 715B and When a light guide plate having a similar curved portion is arranged on the front side of a movable body such as a character that performs a predetermined action, the present invention may be applied to a light guide plate unit including the light guide plate.

  In the eleventh embodiment, the curved portion 715B1 of the light guide plate 715B is configured to be curved in a substantially cylindrical shape along the curved surfaces of the reels 711L, 711M, and 711R of the reel device 710, and has a substantially arc shape in a side view. Although the curved configuration has been described, it is not always necessary to have an arc shape in a side view, and may be configured to have another shape protruding forward such as a curved line or a broken line.

  In the eleventh embodiment, the through-holes 841A and 843A and the through-holes 841B and 843B of the light source unit 812 are inserted into the protrusion 892 protruding rearward on the rear side of the base body 701. A projecting portion projecting forward may be provided on the front side of the unit 812 (that is, the front side of the reflector 823), and a mounting hole corresponding to the projecting portion may be provided in the base 701. In such a case, the mounting hole provided in the base 701 is configured in the shape of a long hole that is slightly larger in the vertical direction than the outer diameter of the protruding portion corresponding to the mounting hole, like the through-hole 841A. In this case, the same effect as in the case where the through-hole 841A or the like is formed in a long hole shape slightly larger in the vertical direction than the outer diameter of the protruding portion 892 is produced. Similarly, a configuration may be adopted in which a projecting portion projecting forward is provided on the front side of the light source unit 813 and an attachment hole corresponding to the projecting portion is provided in the base 701.

  In the eleventh embodiment, after fixing (attaching) the light source units 812 and 813 above and below the light guide plate 715B, the base 701 in which the light guide plate 715B is integrated with the outer cover 715A via the light source units 812 and 813. It was set as the structure fixed to. Alternatively, the upper and lower light source units corresponding to the light source units 812 and 813 may be fixed to the base body 701 integrated with the outer cover 715A, and then the light guide plate 715B may be fixed to the light source unit.

  In the eleventh embodiment, the pressing portion 811A of the pressing member 811 is configured to have a substantially arcuate front end shape in a side view along the curved shape of the curved portion 715A1 of the outer cover 715A. It is not necessary to have a shape that follows the curved shape of 715A1, and one or a plurality of protruding portions have a shape protruding toward the curved portion 715A1 of the outer cover 715A, and are deformed as a part of the curved portion 715B1 of the light guide plate 715B. It is good also as a structure which correct | amends partially the site | part which wants to correct. In this case, it is preferable to provide at least a central pressing portion that presses the rear side of the portion that protrudes to the most front side at a substantially central height position in the vertical direction of the curved portion 715B1 of the light guide plate 715B. In a situation where the radius of curvature is larger than the curve set by the curved portion 715B1 of the light guide plate 715B and the amount of bending is insufficient, the curved portion 715B1 of the light guide plate 715B can be corrected efficiently. In addition, it is preferable to provide at least an upper and lower pressing portion that presses the rear side of the portion located on the rear side of the curved portion 715B1 in the vertical position of the curved portion 715B1 of the light guide plate 715B in the vertical direction. Thereby, in a situation where the radius of curvature is smaller than the curve set by the curved portion 715B1 of the light guide plate 715B and the amount of bending becomes excessive, the curved portion 715B1 of the light guide plate 715B can be corrected efficiently.

(11) Modified example of pachinko machine 100 according to the twelfth embodiment In the twelfth embodiment, the upper and lower end surfaces 715B4 and 715B5 of the light guide plate 715B are provided with trapezoidal recesses Z having sides Z1 to Z3 in front view. Although the configuration is adopted, the shape of the recess provided in the end faces 715B4 and 715B5 is not necessarily a trapezoid. For example, a concave portion including two sides that are continuous in a mountain shape or a concave portion including four or more sides may be used.

  In the twelfth embodiment, the recesses Z provided on the upper and lower end faces 715B4 and 715B5 of the light guide plate 715B have a corner portion formed by the intersection of two continuous sides. However, as in the regions D1 and D2, light is transmitted. The corner may be rounded or chamfered as long as a region where light does not enter or a region where weak light enters compared to light traveling in the directions of arrows F1 to F3 is formed.

  In the twelfth embodiment, the upper and lower end surfaces 715B4 and 715B5 of the light guide plate 715B are provided with the trapezoidal concave portions Z in front view, so that no light enters or the arrows F1 to F1 as in the regions D1 and D2. Although the light guide including a predetermined direction in which light that is weaker than light traveling in the F3 direction enters is realized, the concave portion Z has an arc shape, and light does not partially enter due to black coating or plating. By doing so, the predetermined direction may be configured. Alternatively, a dedicated component capable of configuring the predetermined direction may be provided between the end face 715B4 of the light guide plate 715B and the light emitting means 834, or between the end face 715B5 and the light emitting means 824.

  In the twelfth embodiment, the light guide plate 715B is provided with a recess Z in the upper and lower end surfaces 715B4 and 715B5 of the light guide plate 715B having the curved portion 715B1, but the light guide plate 715B is given a randomness. Even in the case where a concave portion similar to the concave portion Z is provided on the end face of the flat light guide plate that is not provided, the light guide plate can be given randomness.

  (12) You may implement this invention in the pachinko machine etc. of a type different from said each embodiment. For example, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine in which the big hit expectation value is increased until the big hit state is generated a plurality of times (for example, twice or three times) including the big hit. Further, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that enters a special gaming state on the condition that a ball wins a predetermined area after a big hit symbol is displayed. Moreover, you may implement in the enclosed pachinko machine with which a ball | bowl circulates. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, the present invention may be implemented as various game machines such as an arrangement ball type pachinko machine and a sparrow ball. Further, the present invention is not limited to a pachinko machine and may be applied to a slot machine, or may be applied to a game machine such as a parrot of a type in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated.

<Invention extracted from each of the above embodiments>
Hereinafter, the characteristics of the invention group extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be described while showing problems and effects as necessary. In the following, for easy understanding, the corresponding configuration in each of the above embodiments is appropriately shown in parentheses, but is not limited to the specific configuration shown in parentheses. In addition, the meanings and examples of terms described in each feature may be applied as the meanings and examples of terms described in other features described in the same wording.

<Feature 10>
A display unit (decorative symbol display device 479) capable of variably displaying a plurality of columns of symbols,
Lottery means (main control board 920) for performing a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied;
A variation mode selection means (main control board 920) for selecting a variation mode (decoration pattern variation pattern) of the variation display of the plurality of rows of symbols when the start condition is satisfied;
When the start condition is satisfied, after the symbols of the plurality of columns are variably displayed in the variation mode selected by the variation mode selection means on the display unit, the combination is stopped by a combination of symbols according to the lottery result. Change execution means for displaying (sub control board 940);
When the lottery result is a predetermined first result, the variation execution means stops and displays the symbols of the plurality of columns in a combination of symbols indicating the first result, and then displays a special gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state. Game control means (main control board 920) to be generated;
Of the lottery results by the lottery means, the lottery results for which the execution of the variable display of the plurality of rows of symbols by the fluctuation executing means is suspended are stored in a predetermined storage unit (RAM of the main control board 920) up to a predetermined number Hold storage means (main control board 920) that can be stored in
Special effect display means (sub control board 940) for displaying a predetermined special effect on the display unit with a predetermined probability when the number of lottery results stored in the storage unit by the holding storage means reaches an upper limit. And comprising
When the lottery result indicating the first result is included in the lottery result stored in the storage unit by the hold storage unit, the variation mode selection unit is stored in the storage unit by the hold storage unit. Compared to the case where the lottery result indicating the first result is not included in the lottery result, the variation mode in which the number of lottery results stored in the storage unit is easily increased by the holding storage unit is selected. A gaming machine characterized by

  Conventionally, there is a pachinko machine as a representative example of a gaming machine. In a conventional typical pachinko machine, when entering a start opening provided in a game area, a lottery is performed according to the entry, and when a big win is won in the lottery, a special gaming state is entered. A configuration is known in which a large number of game balls can enter a winning opening. In addition, the pachinko machine includes a display device, and the display device starts the variable display of the symbols based on the fact that the lottery has been performed, and displays the final lottery display as a final stop display of the variable display. The corresponding stop result is displayed.

  In addition, in the conventional pachinko machine, when the game ball enters the starting port while the display of the symbols is displayed on the display device, the hit information (corresponding to the lottery result) is used. Information (corresponding to a lottery result) is stored on hold with a predetermined number (for example, 4) as an upper limit (see, for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2016-22214).

  However, there is still a possibility that there is still room for improvement in a gaming machine having a conventional configuration that can hold a lottery result up to a predetermined upper limit value. For example, if the hit information reaches the upper limit value, even if the game ball enters the start port, the hit information for the entered ball is not stored and is merely wasted.

  In contrast, with the gaming machine described in feature 10, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can suitably hold and store a lottery result up to a predetermined upper limit value. That is, when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, the variation mode of the variation display of the plurality of columns of symbols is selected by the variation mode selection means, and the plurality of symbols in the selected variation mode is displayed on the display unit by the variation execution means. Then, the display is stopped and displayed with a combination of symbols corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means. At this time, if the lottery result is a predetermined first result, a special game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state is generated by the game control means after the symbols in a plurality of columns are stopped and displayed in a combination of symbols indicating the first result. To do.

  Among the lottery results by the lottery means, the lottery results for which the execution of the variable display of a plurality of columns by the fluctuation execution means is suspended can be stored in a predetermined storage unit with a predetermined number as an upper limit by the storage unit. The When the number of lottery results stored in the storage unit reaches the upper limit, the special effect display means displays a predetermined special effect on the display unit with a predetermined probability. Therefore, the player can face a game aiming at the establishment of the start condition with the purpose of increasing the number of lottery results stored in the storage unit. Thereby, it is possible to improve a player's willingness to play a gaming machine that can store up to a predetermined number (upper limit) of lottery results in the storage unit.

  When the lottery result indicating the first result is included in the lottery result stored in the storage unit by the hold storage unit, the variation mode selection unit includes the lottery result stored in the storage unit by the hold storage unit. Compared to the case where the lottery result indicating the first result is not included, the variation mode is selected so that the number of lottery results stored in the storage unit by the holding storage unit is likely to increase.

  Therefore, when the lottery result indicating the first result is included in the lottery results stored in the storage unit by the holding storage unit, the number of lottery results stored in the storage unit by the holding storage unit is likely to increase. Therefore, the number of lottery results stored in the storage unit easily reaches the upper limit, and the possibility of displaying special effects increases. Thereby, since it becomes difficult for a player to be dissatisfied by not being able to see a special effect, the decline of the interest with respect to a game can be suppressed.

  Further, when a lottery result indicating the first result is included in the lottery result stored in the storage unit, and a lottery result indicating the first result is not included in the lottery result stored in the storage unit. Since the special effects are easily displayed as compared with each other, it is possible to create a situation in which the player is expected to generate a special game state by displaying the special effects. Therefore, since the feeling of progress can be enhanced in the progress of the game, the interest in the game can be improved.

  The “special effect” in the gaming machine described in the feature 10 is not limited to the effect displayed on the display unit, but instead of the effect displayed on the display unit or in addition to the effect displayed on the display unit. An effect by sound, an effect by light, an effect by an operation of an operable structure, or an effect combining some or all of them may be used. Therefore, the “special effect display means” in the feature 10 may be “special effect execution means” for executing various special effects including display.

  Further, in the gaming machine described in the feature 10, the information stored (held) in the storage unit by the holding storage unit may be “information used for lottery by the lottery unit” instead of the description of “lottery result”. Alternatively, “information corresponding to the lottery result” may be used.

<Feature 11>
A display unit (decorative symbol display device 479) capable of variably displaying a plurality of columns of symbols,
Lottery means (main control board 920) for performing a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied;
A variation mode selection means (main control board 920) for selecting a variation mode (decoration pattern variation pattern) of the variation display of the plurality of rows of symbols when the start condition is satisfied;
When the start condition is satisfied, after the symbols of the plurality of columns are variably displayed in the variation mode selected by the variation mode selection means on the display unit, the combination is stopped by a combination of symbols according to the lottery result. Change execution means for displaying (sub control board 940);
When the lottery result is a predetermined first result, the variation execution means stops and displays the symbols of the plurality of columns in a combination of symbols indicating the first result, and then displays a special gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state. Game control means (main control board 920) to be generated;
Among the lottery results obtained by the lottery means, a hold storage means capable of storing the lottery results for which the execution of the variable display of the plurality of rows of symbols by the fluctuation executing means is suspended in a predetermined storage unit with a predetermined number as an upper limit ( Sub-control board 940),
Special effect display means (sub control board 940) for displaying a predetermined special effect on the display unit with a predetermined probability when the number of lottery results stored in the storage unit by the holding storage means reaches an upper limit. And comprising
The variation mode that can be selected by the variation mode selection means is the lottery of the remaining symbols for which the variable display is continued after the symbols are stopped and displayed in a state in which a part of the combination of symbols indicating the first result is configured. Including at least a reach display mode that stops display with a symbol corresponding to a lottery result by means, and a non-reach display mode that does not include the reach display mode,
When the lottery result indicating the first result is included in the lottery result stored in the storage unit by the hold storage unit, the variation mode selection unit is stored in the storage unit by the hold storage unit. A non-reach display mode is selected with high probability as compared with a case where the lottery result indicating the first result is not included in the lottery result.

  Conventionally, there is a pachinko machine as a representative example of a gaming machine. In a conventional typical pachinko machine, when entering a start opening provided in a game area, a lottery is performed according to the entry, and when a big win is won in the lottery, a special gaming state is entered. A configuration is known in which a large number of game balls can enter a winning opening. In addition, the pachinko machine includes a display device, and the display device starts the variable display of the symbols based on the fact that the lottery has been performed, and displays the final lottery display as a final stop display of the variable display. The corresponding stop result is displayed.

  In addition, in the conventional pachinko machine, when the game ball enters the starting port while the display of the symbols is displayed on the display device, the hit information (corresponding to the lottery result) is used. Information (corresponding to a lottery result) is stored on hold with a predetermined number (for example, 4) as an upper limit (see, for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2016-22214).

  However, there is still a possibility that there is still room for improvement in a gaming machine having a conventional configuration that can hold a lottery result up to a predetermined upper limit value. For example, if the hit information reaches the upper limit value, even if the game ball enters the start port, the hit information for the entered ball is not stored and is merely wasted.

  In contrast, with the gaming machine described in feature 11, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can suitably hold and store a lottery result up to a predetermined upper limit value. That is, when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, the variation mode of the variation display of the plurality of columns of symbols is selected by the variation mode selection means, and the plurality of symbols in the selected variation mode is displayed on the display unit by the variation execution means. Then, the display is stopped and displayed with a combination of symbols corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means. At this time, if the lottery result is a predetermined first result, a special game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state is generated by the game control means after the symbols in a plurality of columns are stopped and displayed in a combination of symbols indicating the first result. To do.

  Among the lottery results by the lottery means, the lottery results for which the execution of the variable display of a plurality of columns by the fluctuation execution means is suspended can be stored in a predetermined storage unit with a predetermined number as an upper limit by the storage unit. The When the number of lottery results stored in the storage unit reaches the upper limit, the special effect display means displays a predetermined special effect on the display unit with a predetermined probability. Therefore, the player can face a game aiming at the establishment of the start condition with the purpose of increasing the number of lottery results stored in the storage unit. Thereby, it is possible to improve a player's willingness to play a gaming machine that can store up to a predetermined number (upper limit) of lottery results in the storage unit.

  When the lottery result indicating the first result is included in the lottery result stored in the storage unit by the hold storage unit, the variation mode selection unit includes the lottery result stored in the storage unit by the hold storage unit. The non-reach display mode is selected with high probability as compared with the case where the lottery result indicating the first result is not included. Therefore, when the lottery result indicating the first result is included in the lottery results stored in the storage unit by the storage unit, the variable display of the non-reach display mode is easily displayed.

  When the variation display of the reach display mode is displayed, the player may stop firing the game ball during the variation display in consideration of the occurrence of a special gaming state thereafter. On the other hand, in the gaming machine described in the feature 11, when the lottery result indicating the first result is included in the lottery result stored in the storage unit by the holding storage unit, the variable display of the non-reach display mode is displayed. Since it becomes easy to display, it can suppress that a player stops discharge | release of a game ball during a fluctuation display.

  As a result, the number of lottery results stored in the storage unit by the storage unit tends to increase, so that the number of lottery results stored in the storage unit easily reaches the upper limit, and the possibility of displaying a special effect is likely. Rise. Thereby, since it becomes difficult for a player to be dissatisfied by not being able to see a special effect, the decline of the interest with respect to a game can be suppressed.

  Further, when a lottery result indicating the first result is included in the lottery result stored in the storage unit, and a lottery result indicating the first result is not included in the lottery result stored in the storage unit. In comparison, since the variable display of the non-reach display mode is easily displayed, the special effect can be more easily displayed when the lottery result indicating the first result is included in the lottery result stored in the storage unit. it can. Therefore, since a situation in which the player can expect the occurrence of a special gaming state can be created by displaying the special effect, the feeling of progress in the game can be improved, and the interest in the game can be improved.

  The “special effect” in the gaming machine described in the feature 11 is not limited to the effect displayed on the display unit, but instead of the effect displayed on the display unit or in addition to the effect displayed on the display unit. An effect by sound, an effect by light, an effect by an operation of an operable structure, or an effect combining some or all of them may be used. Therefore, the “special effect display means” in the feature 11 may be “special effect execution means” for executing various special effects including display.

  Further, in the gaming machine described in feature 11, the information stored (held) in the storage unit by the holding storage unit may be “information used for lottery by the lottery unit” instead of the description of “lottery result”. Alternatively, “information corresponding to the lottery result” may be used.

<Feature 12>
A gaming machine according to feature 11, wherein
Fluctuation time determining means for determining a variation time related to the variation display of a plurality of rows of symbols when the start condition is satisfied,
The variation mode selection unit selects the variation mode corresponding to the variation time determined by the variation time determination unit,
When the variation time determined by the variation time determination unit corresponds to the reach display mode, the variation mode selection unit includes the first result among the lottery results stored in the storage unit by the holding storage unit. Is included in the lottery results stored in the storage unit by the holding storage unit, the non-reach display mode having a variation time shorter than the variation time determined by the variation time determination unit. Compared with the case where the lottery result indicating the first result is not included in
The variation execution means corresponds to the reach display mode with the variation time determined by the variation time determination means, and the first result is included in the lottery results stored in the storage unit by the holding storage means. When the non-reach display mode having a variation time shorter than the variation time determined by the variation time determination unit is selected by the variation mode selection unit when the lottery result shown is included, the selected non-reach type is selected. A gaming machine, wherein the display of the variation time determined by the variation time determination means is performed by performing the display mode one or more times.

  In the gaming machine described in the feature 12, when the variation time determined by the variation time determination unit corresponds to the reach display mode, the first result is included in the lottery result stored in the storage unit by the holding storage unit. When the lottery result to be shown is included, the variation mode selecting means displays the non-reach display mode of the fluctuation time shorter than the fluctuation time determined by the fluctuation time determining means of the lottery result stored in the storage unit by the holding storage means. It is selected with a higher probability than when the lottery result indicating the first result is not included.

  When the variation time determined by the variation time determination unit corresponds to the reach display mode, and the lottery result indicating the first result is included in the lottery result stored in the storage unit by the holding storage unit, the variation mode When the non-reach display mode with a variation time shorter than the variation time determined by the variation time determination unit is selected by the selection unit, the selected non-reach display mode is performed one or more times by the variation execution unit. Thus, the variation display of the variation time determined by the variation time determination means is performed.

  Therefore, in order to perform the variable display of the non-reach display mode of the variable time corresponding to the reach display mode, it is possible to divert the data related to the non-reach display mode of the variable time shorter than the reach display mode, and corresponds to the reach display mode. It is not necessary to prepare data relating to the non-reach display mode of the fluctuation time to be dedicated. Thereby, the consumption of the storage capacity in the gaming machine can be suitably suppressed.

<Feature 20>
A display unit (decorative symbol display device 479) capable of displaying symbols;
Lottery means (main control board 920) for performing a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied;
Fluctuation execution means (sub-control board 940) for displaying the symbol according to the lottery result as a stop symbol after displaying the symbol variation on the display unit when the start condition is satisfied. ,
When the lottery result is a predetermined first result, after the stop symbol indicating the first result is displayed by the variation execution means, a game control means for generating a special game state more advantageous than the normal game state (Main control board 920);
An operation unit (press operation device 261) that can be operated by the player;
It is composed of at least a part of a period from when the start condition where the first result is obtained by the lottery means to when the stop symbol indicating the first result is displayed by the variation executing means. Each operation mode is performed for each of the plurality of operation modes of the operation unit that can be operated at one or a plurality of operation timings set within a performance execution possible period (execution period of decorative symbol variation display). Special effect selection means (sub-control board 940) for selecting each special effect to be executed in the event of a break from a plurality of types of effects,
Among the plurality of operation modes of the operation unit that can be operated at the one or more operation timings during the one or more operation timings set within the performance executable period, the first operation mode is the first operation mode. A first special effect display means (sub control board 940) for displaying the special effect selected by the special effect selection means for the first operation mode on the display unit when the operation unit is operated;
Each special effect selected by the special effect selection means for each of the plurality of operation modes of the operation unit that can be operated at the one or more operation times set within the effect execution period. Storage control means (sub-control board 940) that stores in the predetermined storage unit (RAM of the sub-control board 940) so that each special effect can be restored,
When the operation unit is operated in a second operation mode among the plurality of operation modes within a predetermined restoration possible period set after the end of the performance executable period, the storage control unit stores the storage unit in the storage unit. Second special effect display means (sub control board 940) for displaying the special effect selected by the special effect selection means for the second operation mode on the display unit based on the stored effect information; A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  In a conventional typical pachinko machine, when entering a start opening provided in a game area, a lottery is performed according to the entry, and when a big win is won in the lottery, a special gaming state is entered. A configuration is known in which a large number of game balls can enter a winning opening. In addition, the pachinko machine includes a display device, and the display device starts the variable display of the symbols based on the fact that the lottery has been performed, and displays the final lottery display as a final stop display of the variable display. The corresponding stop result is displayed.

  In recent years, there is also a gaming machine in which a predetermined effect such as a change in display content on a display device or output of a corresponding sound from a speaker is performed by a player operating an effect button at a predetermined timing. It is known (see, for example, JP-A-2006-193329).

  However, there is still a possibility that there is still room for improvement in the conventional gaming machine configured to execute a predetermined effect based on the player operating the effect button at a predetermined timing. For example, if the player operates the effect button at a predetermined timing, the player can experience the effect corresponding to the operation of the effect button, but if the player does not operate the effect button at that timing, The player cannot experience the effect corresponding to the operation of the effect button.

  On the other hand, with the gaming machine according to feature 20, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is configured so that a predetermined effect is suitably executed based on a player operating an operation unit at a predetermined timing. it can. That is, when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, the change execution means displays the change of the symbol on the display unit, and then stops and displays the combination of symbols according to the lottery result by the lottery means. At this time, if the lottery result is a predetermined first result, after the symbols are stopped and displayed with a combination of symbols indicating the first result, a special game state advantageous to the normal game state is generated by the game control means.

  It is possible to perform an effect composed of at least a part of a period from when the start condition that the first result is obtained by the lottery means to when the stop symbol indicating the first result is displayed by the variation executing means. The operation time is set within the period. For each of the plurality of operation modes of the operation unit that can be operated at the operation time, each special effect executed when each operation mode is performed is a plurality of types of effects by the special effect selection unit. Selected from. The effect information indicating each special effect selected by the special effect selection means is stored in a predetermined storage unit by the storage control means so that each special effect can be restored.

  When the operation unit is operated in the first operation mode among the plurality of operation modes that can be operated at the one or more operation times at one or more operation times set within the performance executable period. The special effect selected by the special effect selection unit for the first operation mode is displayed on the display unit by the first special effect display unit.

  On the other hand, if the operation unit is operated in the second operation mode among the plurality of operation modes within the predetermined restoration possible period set after the end of the effect execution possible period, the storage control unit stores the operation unit. Based on the effect information stored in the part, the special effect selected by the special effect selecting means for the second operation mode is displayed on the display unit.

  Therefore, even when the operation unit is not operated in the second operation mode at a predetermined operation time within the performance executable period, the operation unit is operated in the second operation mode within the recoverable period. The player can not see the special effect (the special operation corresponding to the second operation mode) that he could not see because he did not operate the operation unit in the second operation mode at the predetermined operation time in the performance executable period. (Direction) can be restored and viewed. This will reduce the possibility that the player will have negative feelings about the game, such as regret not having seen some or all of the special effects at his own will during the performance executable period. Decline in interest is suppressed.

  Note that the “special effect” in the gaming machine described in the feature 20 is not limited to the effect displayed on the display unit, but instead of the effect displayed on the display unit or in addition to the effect displayed on the display unit. An effect by sound, an effect by light, an effect by an operation of an operable structure, or an effect combining some or all of them may be used. Therefore, the “first special effect display means” and the “second special effect display means” in the feature 20 respectively execute “first special effect execution means” and “second special effect execution means” that execute various special effects including display. It may be “production execution means”.

<Feature 21>
A gaming machine according to feature 20, wherein
The effect execution possible period includes an execution period of the symbol variation display executed by the variation execution means,
A plurality of the operation times are set within the execution period of the symbol variation display,
The second special effect display means is second during the operation period after the operation period when the operation unit is operated in the first operation mode among the plurality of operation modes within the recoverable period. When the operation unit is operated in the operation mode, the special selected by the special effect selection unit for the second operation mode based on the effect information stored in the storage unit by the storage control unit A game machine, wherein an effect is displayed on the display unit.

  In the gaming machine according to the feature 21, in the configuration in which the operation unit can be operated in the first operation mode or the second operation mode at different operation timings within the execution period of the symbol variation display, The special effect corresponding to the first operation mode is displayed by operating the operation unit in the first operation mode at the previous operation time within the execution period, but the second operation mode is displayed at the subsequent operation time. Even when the operation unit is not operated and the special effect corresponding to the second operation mode is not displayed, the player can operate the operation unit in the second operation mode within the recoverable period, thereby allowing the player to The special effect corresponding to the second operation mode can be restored and viewed.

  When there are multiple operation periods within the execution period of the variable display of symbols, if the special effects that can be displayed for each operation period are effects that suggest the probability of occurrence of a special game state after that, If the displayed special performance is an effect that suggests that there is a lower possibility of transitioning to the special gaming state than the previously displayed special performance, the player loses the expectation of transitioning to the special gaming state. There is a risk of disappointment. To prevent such discouragement, the player can choose not to operate the operation unit at a later operation time, but if the operation unit is not operated at a later operation time, the player subsequently transitions to a special gaming state. In some cases, you may want to know what happened later if you displayed a special performance that you did not display on your own.

  On the other hand, with the gaming machine described in the feature 21, the player can restore and see the special performance corresponding to the second operation mode during the restoration possible period, so that the player is satisfied. It is possible to improve the interest in games.

<Feature 22>
The gaming machine according to the feature 20 or the feature 21,
The second special effect display means performs the operation in the second operation mode at the operation time when the operation unit is operated in the first operation mode among the plurality of operation modes within the recoverable period. When the unit is operated, the special effect selected by the special effect selection unit for the second operation mode is displayed on the display unit based on the effect information stored in the storage unit by the storage control unit. A gaming machine characterized by display.

  With the gaming machine described in the feature 22, in the configuration in which the operation unit can be operated in the first operation mode or the second operation mode at a common operation time within the performance executable period, Even if the operation unit cannot be operated in the second operation mode by operating the operation unit in the operation mode, the player corresponds to the second operation mode in the recoverable period. Special effects can be restored and viewed. Thereby, since it is possible to see the special game that the player could not see during the performance executable period, the player can be satisfied, and the interest in the game can be improved suitably.

<Feature 30>
A display unit (decorative symbol display device 479) capable of displaying symbols;
Lottery means (main control board 920) for performing a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied;
Fluctuation execution means (sub-control board 940) for displaying the symbol according to the lottery result as a stop symbol after displaying the symbol variation on the display unit when the start condition is satisfied. ,
When the lottery result is a predetermined first result, after the stop symbol indicating the first result is displayed by the variation execution means, a game control means for generating a special game state more advantageous than the normal game state (Main control board 920);
A first operation unit (press operation device 261) that can be operated by the player;
A second operation unit (selection operation device 263) provided at a position different from the first operation unit and operable by the player;
It is composed of at least a part of a period from when the start condition where the first result is obtained by the lottery means to when the stop symbol indicating the first result is displayed by the variation executing means. A special effect that is executed when the first operation unit is operated during an operation time set within a period during which an effect can be performed (an execution period of variable display of decorative symbols) is selected from a plurality of types of effects Special effect selection means (sub control board 940);
When the first operation unit is operated at the operation time set within the effect displayable period, the special effect selected by the special effect selection unit with respect to the operation of the first operation unit at the operation time. Is displayed at a predetermined position on the display unit, and when the second operation unit is operated at the operation time, the special effect selection unit selects the operation of the first operation unit at the operation time. And a special effect control means (sub control board 940) for controlling the special effect to be displayed at a position different from the predetermined position.

  In a conventional typical pachinko machine, when entering a start opening provided in a game area, a lottery is performed according to the entry, and when a big win is won in the lottery, a special gaming state is entered. A configuration is known in which a large number of game balls can enter a winning opening. In addition, the pachinko machine includes a display device, and the display device starts the variable display of the symbols based on the fact that the lottery has been performed, and displays the final lottery display as a final stop display of the variable display. The corresponding stop result is displayed.

  In recent years, there is also a gaming machine in which a predetermined effect such as a change in display content on a display device or output of a corresponding sound from a speaker is performed by a player operating an effect button at a predetermined timing. It is known (see, for example, JP-A-2006-193329).

  However, there is still a possibility that there is still room for improvement in the conventional gaming machine configured to execute a predetermined effect based on the player operating the effect button at a predetermined timing. For example, the effect displayed on the display device by the player operating the operation button is always displayed in the same area, and in this respect, it is monotonous without any novelty.

  On the other hand, with the gaming machine described in the feature 30, it is possible to provide a gaming machine configured so that a predetermined effect is suitably executed based on the player operating the operation unit at a predetermined timing. it can. That is, when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, the change execution means displays the change of the symbol on the display unit, and then stops and displays the combination of symbols according to the lottery result by the lottery means. At this time, if the lottery result is a predetermined first result, after the symbols are stopped and displayed with a combination of symbols indicating the first result, a special game state advantageous to the normal game state is generated by the game control means.

  It is possible to perform an effect composed of at least a part of a period from when the start condition that the first result is obtained by the lottery means to when the stop symbol indicating the first result is displayed by the variation executing means. The operation time is set within the period. Each special effect executed when the operation unit is operated during the operation time is selected from a plurality of types of effects by the special effect selection unit.

  When the first operation unit is operated at the operation time set within the effect executable period, the special effect control unit selects the operation of the first operation unit at the operation time by the special effect selection unit. The special effect is displayed at a predetermined position on the display unit. On the other hand, when the second operation unit is operated at the operation time, the special effect selected by the special effect selection unit with respect to the operation of the first operation unit at the operation time by the special effect control unit. It is displayed at a position different from the predetermined position.

  Therefore, since the display position of the special effect can be changed by operating the first operation unit or the second operation unit, the game in which the special effect is displayed according to the player's operation is given diversity. It is possible to improve the interest.

<Feature 31>
The gaming machine according to feature 30, wherein
The special effect control means selects the special effect for the operation of the first operation unit at the operation time when the second operation unit is operated at the operation time set within the effect displayable period. A gaming machine characterized by transmitting production information indicating a special production selected by the means to another gaming machine and displaying the special production on a display unit of the other gaming machine.

  In the case of the gaming machine described in the feature 31, when the second operation unit is operated at the operation time set within the period during which the effect display is possible, the special operation control unit causes the first operation unit to be operated at the operation time. By transmitting the effect information indicating the special effect selected by the special effect selecting means in response to the operation to the other gaming machine, the special effect is displayed on the display unit of the other gaming machine.

  Therefore, since the special effect can be displayed on the display unit of another gaming machine, the special effect can be viewed together with other players, and an interest different from the case of playing a game alone can be obtained.

<Feature 32>
The gaming machine according to feature 30, wherein
When the second operation unit is operated at the operation time set within the display period of the effect display, the special effect control means can perform the special effect with respect to the operation of the first operation unit at the operation time. The special effect selected by the selection means is displayed at a position different from the predetermined position on the display section, and the first operation section or the second operation section is displayed at the predetermined position at the operation timing. A game machine that displays contents displayed on the display unit when not operated.

  In the case of the gaming machine described in the feature 32, when the second operation unit is operated at the operation time set within the period in which the effect display is possible, the special operation control unit causes the first operation unit to be operated at the operation time. A position where the special effect selected by the special effect selection means for the operation is different from a predetermined position on the display unit (that is, a position where the special effect is displayed when the first operation unit is operated at the operation time). Is displayed. On the other hand, the content displayed on the display unit when neither the first operation unit or the second operation unit is operated at the operation time is displayed at a predetermined position on the display unit.

  Therefore, the player simultaneously displays the special effect displayed by operating the second operation unit and the content displayed on the display unit when neither the first operation unit nor the second operation unit is operated. Since it can see, the interest with respect to a game can be improved suitably.

<Feature 33>
The gaming machine according to Feature 30 or Feature 31,
Receiving means (sub control board 940 of the pachinko machine 100B) capable of receiving the effect information from other gaming machines,
The special effect control means displays a special effect indicated by the effect information on the display unit when the effect information transmitted from another game machine is received by the receiving means.

  In the case of the gaming machine described in the feature 33, when the effect information transmitted from another game machine is received, the special effect indicated by the effect information is displayed by the special effect display unit based on the received effect information. Displayed in the section. Therefore, since the special effect based on the effect information received from other game machines can be displayed on the display unit, the special effect can be viewed together with other players playing on other game machines, and the game can be played alone. You can get a different interest from what you do.

<Feature 40>
A display unit (decorative symbol display device 479) capable of displaying symbols;
Lottery means (main control board 920) for performing a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied;
Fluctuation execution means (sub-control board 940) for displaying the symbol according to the lottery result as a stop symbol after displaying the symbol variation on the display unit when the start condition is satisfied. ,
When the lottery result is a predetermined first result, after the stop symbol indicating the first result is displayed by the variation execution means, a game control means for generating a special game state more advantageous than the normal game state (Main control board 920);
Among the lottery results, a hold storage unit that can store a lottery result for which the execution of the symbol variation display by the variation execution unit is suspended in a predetermined storage unit (RAM of the main control board 920) up to a predetermined number. (Main control board 920);
Special effect display means (sub control board 940) for displaying a predetermined special effect on the display unit with a predetermined probability when the number of lottery results stored in the storage unit by the holding storage means reaches an upper limit. And comprising
When the lottery result indicating the first result is included in the lottery result stored in the storage unit by the holding storage unit, the special effect display unit is stored in the storage unit by the holding storage unit. A gaming machine characterized in that the special effect is displayed with a higher probability than when the lottery result indicating the first result is not included in the lottery result.

  Conventionally, there is a pachinko machine as a representative example of a gaming machine. In a conventional typical pachinko machine, when entering a start opening provided in a game area, a lottery is performed according to the entry, and when a big win is won in the lottery, a special gaming state is entered. A configuration is known in which a large number of game balls can enter a winning opening. In addition, the pachinko machine includes a display device, and the display device starts the variable display of the symbols based on the fact that the lottery has been performed, and displays the final lottery display as a final stop display of the variable display. The corresponding stop result is displayed.

  In addition, in the conventional pachinko machine, when the game ball enters the starting port while the display of the symbols is displayed on the display device, the hit information (corresponding to the lottery result) is used. Information (corresponding to a lottery result) is stored on hold with a predetermined number (for example, 4) as an upper limit (see, for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2016-22214).

  However, there is still a possibility that there is still room for improvement in a gaming machine having a conventional configuration that can hold a lottery result up to a predetermined upper limit value. For example, if the hit information reaches the upper limit value, even if the game ball enters the start port, the hit information for the entered ball is not stored and is merely wasted.

  In contrast, with the gaming machine described in the feature 40, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably storing the lottery result up to a predetermined upper limit value. That is, when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, the change execution means displays the change of the symbol on the display unit, and then stops and displays the combination of symbols according to the lottery result by the lottery means. At this time, if the lottery result is a predetermined first result, after the symbols are stopped and displayed with a combination of symbols indicating the first result, a special game state advantageous to the normal game state is generated by the game control means.

  Among the lottery results by the lottery means, the lottery results for which the execution of the symbol variation display by the variation executing means is suspended can be stored in a predetermined storage unit with a predetermined number as an upper limit by the retention storage means. When the number of lottery results stored in the storage unit reaches the upper limit, the special effect display means displays a predetermined special effect on the display unit with a predetermined probability. Therefore, the player can face a game aiming at the establishment of the start condition with the purpose of increasing the number of lottery results stored in the storage unit. Thereby, it is possible to improve a player's willingness to play a gaming machine that can store up to a predetermined number (upper limit) of lottery results in the storage unit.

  When the lottery result indicating the first result is included in the lottery result stored in the storage unit by the hold storage unit, the special effect display unit includes the lottery result stored in the storage unit by the hold storage unit. The special effect is displayed with a higher probability than when the lottery result indicating the first result is not included.

  Therefore, when the lottery result indicating the first result is included in the lottery result stored in the storage unit, and the lottery result indicating the first result is not included in the lottery result stored in the storage unit. Since the special effects are easily displayed as compared with each other, it is possible to create a situation in which the player is expected to generate a special game state by displaying the special effects. Therefore, since the feeling of progress can be improved in the progress of the game, it is possible to improve the interest in the gaming machine that can store up to a predetermined number (upper limit) of lottery results in the storage unit by the holding storage means.

  Note that the “special effect” in the gaming machine described in the feature 40 is not limited to the effect displayed on the display unit, but instead of the effect displayed on the display unit or in addition to the effect displayed on the display unit. An effect by sound, an effect by light, an effect by an operation of an operable structure, or an effect combining some or all of them may be used. Therefore, the “special effect display means” in the feature 40 may be “special effect execution means” for executing various special effects including display.

  Further, in the gaming machine described in the feature 40, the information stored (held) in the storage unit by the holding storage unit may be “information used for the lottery by the lottery unit” instead of “the lottery result”. Alternatively, “information corresponding to the lottery result” may be used.

<Feature 50>
A display unit (decorative symbol display device 479) capable of displaying symbols;
Lottery means (main control board 920) for performing a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied;
Fluctuation execution means (sub-control board 940) for displaying the symbol according to the lottery result as a stop symbol after displaying the symbol variation on the display unit when the start condition is satisfied. ,
When the lottery result is a predetermined first result, after the stop symbol indicating the first result is displayed by the variation execution means, a game control means for generating a special game state more advantageous than the normal game state (Main control board 920);
Among the lottery results, a hold storage unit that can store a lottery result for which the execution of the symbol variation display by the variation execution unit is suspended in a predetermined storage unit (RAM of the main control board 920) up to a predetermined number. (Main control board 920);
Special effect display means (sub control board 940) for displaying a predetermined special effect on the display unit with a predetermined probability when the number of lottery results stored in the storage unit by the holding storage means reaches an upper limit. And comprising
The special effect display means has a predetermined second within a predetermined period including the first time after the number of lottery results stored in the storage unit by the holding storage means reaches an upper limit at the predetermined first time. When the number of lottery results stored in the storage unit by the holding storage means at the time reaches the upper limit again, the special effect is displayed with a higher probability than when the special effect is displayed at the first time. A gaming machine characterized by that.

  Conventionally, there is a pachinko machine as a representative example of a gaming machine. In a conventional typical pachinko machine, when entering a start opening provided in a game area, a lottery is performed according to the entry, and when a big win is won in the lottery, a special gaming state is entered. A configuration is known in which a large number of game balls can enter a winning opening. In addition, the pachinko machine includes a display device, and the display device starts the variable display of the symbols based on the fact that the lottery has been performed, and displays the final lottery display as a final stop display of the variable display. The corresponding stop result is displayed.

  In addition, in the conventional pachinko machine, when the game ball enters the starting port while the display of the symbols is displayed on the display device, the hit information (corresponding to the lottery result) is used. Information (corresponding to a lottery result) is stored on hold with a predetermined number (for example, 4) as an upper limit (see, for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2016-22214).

  However, there is still a possibility that there is still room for improvement in a gaming machine having a conventional configuration that can hold a lottery result up to a predetermined upper limit value. For example, if the hit information reaches the upper limit value, even if the game ball enters the start port, the hit information for the entered ball is not stored and is merely wasted.

  In contrast, with the gaming machine described in the feature 50, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably storing the lottery result up to a predetermined upper limit value. That is, when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, the change execution means displays the change of the symbol on the display unit, and then stops and displays the combination of symbols according to the lottery result by the lottery means. At this time, if the lottery result is a predetermined first result, after the symbols are stopped and displayed with a combination of symbols indicating the first result, a special game state advantageous to the normal game state is generated by the game control means.

  Among the lottery results by the lottery means, the lottery results for which the execution of the variable display of the symbols by the fluctuation execution means is suspended can be stored in a predetermined storage unit with a predetermined number as an upper limit by the storage unit. When the number of lottery results stored in the storage unit reaches the upper limit, the special effect display means displays a predetermined special effect on the display unit with a predetermined probability. Therefore, the player can face a game aiming at the establishment of the start condition with the purpose of increasing the number of lottery results stored in the storage unit. Thereby, it is possible to improve a player's willingness to play a gaming machine that can store up to a predetermined number (upper limit) of lottery results in the storage unit.

  The special effect display means holds on at a predetermined second time within a predetermined period including the first time after the number of lottery results stored in the storage unit by the holding storage means reaches an upper limit at the predetermined first time. When the number of lottery results stored in the storage unit by the storage means reaches the upper limit again, the special effect is displayed with a higher probability than when the special effect is displayed in the first period.

  Therefore, during the predetermined period, when the number of lottery results stored in the storage unit reaches the upper limit again, a special effect is displayed compared to the case where the number of lottery results reaches the upper limit before that. Since it becomes easy, the player can face the game which aims at establishment of starting conditions with the objective of increasing the number of the lottery results memorize | stored in a memory | storage part. Thereby, it is possible to improve a player's willingness to play a gaming machine that can store up to a predetermined number (upper limit) of lottery results in the storage unit.

  The “special effect” in the gaming machine described in the feature 50 is not limited to the effect displayed on the display unit, but instead of the effect displayed on the display unit or in addition to the effect displayed on the display unit. An effect by sound, an effect by light, an effect by an operation of an operable structure, or an effect combining some or all of them may be used. Therefore, the “special effect display means” in the feature 50 may be “special effect execution means” for executing various special effects including display.

  Further, in the gaming machine described in feature 50, the information stored (held) in the storage unit by the holding storage unit may be “information used for lottery by the lottery unit” instead of the description of “lottery result”. Alternatively, “information corresponding to the lottery result” may be used.

<Feature 51>
In the gaming machine according to feature 50,
The special effect display means, after the number of lottery results stored in the storage unit by the hold storage means reaches an upper limit in a predetermined first time, the hold storage means in the storage unit in the second time. When the number of lottery results stored reaches the upper limit again, the lottery result indicating the first result is included in the lottery results stored in the storage unit by the hold storage unit. A gaming machine, characterized in that the special effect is displayed with a higher probability than when the lottery result indicating the first result is not included in the lottery result stored in the storage unit by the storage means.

  In the case of the gaming machine according to the feature 51, the special effect display means stores the hold in the second time after the number of lottery results stored in the storage unit by the hold storage means reaches the upper limit in the predetermined first time. When the number of lottery results stored in the storage unit by the means reaches the upper limit again, when the lottery result indicating the first result is included in the lottery results stored in the storage unit by the holding storage unit, The special effect is displayed with higher probability than when the lottery result indicating the first result is not included in the lottery result stored in the storage unit by the holding storage unit.

  Therefore, when the lottery result indicating the first result is included in the lottery result stored in the storage unit, and the lottery result indicating the first result is not included in the lottery result stored in the storage unit. Since the special effects are easily displayed as compared with each other, it is possible to create a situation in which the player is expected to generate a special game state by displaying the special effects. Therefore, since the feeling of progress can be enhanced in the progress of the game, the interest in the game can be improved.

<Feature 60>
A display unit (decorative symbol display device 479) capable of displaying symbols;
Lottery means (main control board 920) for performing a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied;
Fluctuation execution means (sub-control board 940) for displaying the symbol according to the lottery result as a stop symbol after displaying the symbol variation on the display unit when the start condition is satisfied. ,
When the lottery result is a predetermined first result, after the stop symbol indicating the first result is displayed by the variation execution means, a game control means for generating a special game state more advantageous than the normal game state (Main control board 920);
The predetermined condition set within a period from when the start condition that the first result is obtained by the lottery means to when the stop symbol indicating the first result is stopped by the variation executing means is displayed. As a first special effect that can be displayed in the first period, a first special effect selection means (sub control board) that selects one special effect from a plurality of types of special effects that suggest the probability of occurrence of the special gaming state thereafter. 940),
First special effect means (sub control board 940) for displaying the first special effect selected by the first special effect selection means on the display unit at the first time;
An operation unit (press operation device 261) that can be operated by the player;
After the first special effect is executed by the first special effect means at the first time, before the predetermined second time set after the first time in the period arrives, the operation unit If the occurrence probability of the special gaming state suggested by the first special effect is higher than a predetermined probability, the second special effect indicating the occurrence probability of the special gaming state is set to the second special effect. Second special effect control means for controlling the second special effect to be displayed on the display unit, which is not displayed on the display unit at a time, or suggests the occurrence probability of the special gaming state higher than the first special effect. (Sub-control board 940).

  In a conventional typical pachinko machine, when entering a start opening provided in a game area, a lottery is performed according to the entry, and when a big win is won in the lottery, a special gaming state is entered. A configuration is known in which a large number of game balls can enter a winning opening. In addition, the pachinko machine includes a display device, and the display device starts the variable display of the symbols based on the fact that the lottery has been performed, and displays the final lottery display as a final stop display of the variable display. The corresponding stop result is displayed.

  In recent years, various character designs, etc. are displayed during symbol variation display, and each time the character design etc. is displayed, the expectation that becomes a big hit according to the type of the displayed character design, etc. What is suggested to a person is known (for example, refer to JP 2009-153699 A).

  However, there is still a possibility that there is still room for improvement in the conventional gaming machine configured such that an effect that suggests the degree of expectation to the big hit is displayed during the variation display of the symbol. For example, if the display of a character symbol or the like displayed later during the symbol variation display has a lower degree of expectation for the jackpot suggested by the display than the character symbol or the like displayed earlier, the player Although the expectation for the big hit is once increased by the previous display, it is lost by the subsequent display, so that there is a possibility that the interest in the game may decline.

  On the other hand, with the gaming machine described in the feature 60, it is possible to provide a gaming machine configured so that a predetermined effect is suitably executed based on the player operating the operation unit at a predetermined timing. it can. When a predetermined start condition is satisfied, the change execution means displays the change of the symbol on the display unit, and then stops and displays the combination of symbols according to the lottery result by the lottery means. At this time, if the lottery result is a predetermined first result, after the symbols are stopped and displayed with a combination of symbols indicating the first result, a special game state advantageous to the normal game state is generated by the game control means.

  At a predetermined first time set within a period from when the start condition for obtaining the first result by the lottery means is established to when the stop symbol indicating the first result is displayed by the fluctuation executing means. The first special effect that can be displayed is selected by the first special effect selecting means from a plurality of types of special effects that suggest the probability of the subsequent occurrence of the special gaming state. The selected first special effect is displayed on the display unit at the first time by the first special effect means.

  After the first special performance means is executed by the first special performance means at the first time, the first result is obtained by the fluctuation execution means after the period (the start condition for obtaining the first result by the lottery means is established). If the operation unit is operated before the predetermined second time set after the first time in the period until the stop symbol of the stop symbol shown is performed), it is suggested by the first special effect. When the occurrence probability of the special gaming state is higher than the predetermined probability, the second special effect suggesting the occurrence probability of the special gaming state is not displayed on the display unit in the second period under the control of the second special effect control means. Alternatively, a second special effect that suggests a higher probability of occurrence of a special gaming state than the first special effect is displayed on the display unit.

  Therefore, since it is possible to suppress the display of the second special effect suggesting the occurrence probability of the special gaming state lower than the first special effect after the first special effect, the second special effect is performed after the first special effect. In the configuration to be performed, it is possible to prevent the player from losing the expectation for the occurrence of the special gaming state and the interest in the game from declining.

  The “special effect” in the gaming machine described in the feature 60 is not limited to the effect displayed on the display unit, but instead of the effect displayed on the display unit or in addition to the effect displayed on the display unit. An effect by sound, an effect by light, an effect by an operation of an operable structure, or an effect combining some or all of them may be used. Therefore, the “first special effect display means” in the feature 60 may be a “first special effect execution means” that executes various special effects including display, and the “second special effect control means” You may control to perform various special effects including a display.

<Feature 70>
A rotating body (middle reel 711M) in which a plurality of symbols including at least two symbols (main symbols 712) to which two or more numerical information corresponding to the number of times of variable display is attached circulates is defined as a predetermined symbol row. Each of the plurality of symbol rows formed by arranging a plurality of rotating bodies (left reel 711L, middle reel 711M, and right reel 711R) including the rotating body is changed by rotating the plurality of rotating bodies. A display unit (reel device 710) capable of displaying;
Lottery means (main control board 920) for performing a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied;
Fluctuation execution means (sub-control board 940) that displays the plurality of symbol sequences in a variable manner on the display unit when the start condition is satisfied, and then stops and displays a stop symbol corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means. When,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined first result, the variation executing means stops the display of the plurality of symbol sequences at the stop symbol corresponding to the first result, and then the game is more advantageous than the normal gaming state. Game control means (main control board 920) for generating a special game state that is a state;
If the start condition is satisfied when the change display is performed by the change execution means, information corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means is stored in a predetermined storage unit (main control board) with a predetermined number as the upper limit. 920 (RAM), the storage means (main control board 920) for holding the information until the fluctuation display corresponding to the information is executed by the fluctuation execution means,
Information corresponding to the lottery result held by the holding means and based on the production target information corresponding to execution of predetermined fluctuation display executed after at least two or more fluctuation displays are executed. Production execution means (sub-control board 940) for executing
In the variation display executed before the predetermined variation display by the variation execution means, the predetermined effect is a symbol sequence displayed on the predetermined rotator among the plurality of symbol sequences. A game machine characterized by an effect that the player stops in a visually recognizable manner with a symbol attached with numerical information corresponding to the number of times the variable display is executed until the variable display is executed.

  Conventionally, there is a pachinko machine as a representative example of a gaming machine. In a conventional typical pachinko machine, when a game ball wins at the start winning opening, the symbol display device starts displaying a variation of the production symbol and performs a big hit lottery, and the big hit is based on the result of the big hit lottery When it determines with generating, the structure which produces | generates a jackpot after stopping and displaying an effect design with a jackpot symbol (for example, "777") is known.

  In addition, some conventional pachinko machines pre-read the results of the big hit lottery and perform the pre-reading effect while the effect design is changing (see, for example, JP 2009-291480 A). The pre-reading effect means that if a game ball is won at the start winning opening during the change of the production symbol, the number of reserved balls is added and a big hit lottery is performed based on the random number value acquired at the winning timing. Based on the result, it is an effect of notifying about the gaming state that occurs when the variation display of the effect symbol performed by digestion of the reserved ball is completed. For example, if the result of the jackpot lottery for the first reserved ball is a jackpot, it is notified that a jackpot will occur when the next variation display after the current variation display is completed.

  However, there is still a possibility that there is still room for improvement in the gaming machine having a conventional configuration that performs the pre-reading effect. For example, in order to increase the player's interest in prefetching effects, diversification of the prefetching effects is required.

  Conventionally, there is a pachinko machine as a representative example of the gaming machine. In a conventional typical pachinko machine, when entering a start opening provided in a game area, a lottery is performed according to the entry, and when a big win is won in the lottery, a special gaming state is entered. A configuration is known in which a large number of game balls can enter a winning opening. In addition, the pachinko machine includes a display device, and the display device starts the variable display of the symbols based on the fact that the lottery has been performed, and displays the final lottery display as a final stop display of the variable display. The corresponding stop result is displayed.

  In addition, in the conventional pachinko machine, when the game ball enters the starting port while the display of the symbols is displayed on the display device, the hit information (corresponding to the lottery result) is used. Information (corresponding to a lottery result) is stored on hold with a predetermined number (for example, 4) as an upper limit (see, for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2016-22214).

  However, there is still a possibility that there is still room for improvement in a gaming machine having a conventional configuration that can hold a lottery result up to a predetermined upper limit value. This problem is common to the gaming machines described in features 80 to B0 below.

  On the other hand, the gaming machine described in the feature 70 can provide a gaming machine in which the prefetching effects are diversified. In addition, with the gaming machine described in feature 70, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can suitably utilize a configuration that can hold a lottery result on hold up to a predetermined upper limit value. That is, the display unit has a three-dimensional rotatory body arranged so that a plurality of symbols including at least two symbols with two or more numerical information corresponding to the number of times of variable display are circulated as a predetermined symbol sequence, Each of the plurality of symbol arrays configured by arranging a plurality of rotating bodies including the rotating body is configured to be variablely displayed by rotating each of the plurality of rotating bodies.

  When a predetermined start condition is established, the plurality of symbol sequences are variably displayed on the display unit by the variation executing means, and then stopped and displayed with a stop symbol corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means. At this time, if the lottery result is a predetermined first result, a special game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state is generated by the game control means after a plurality of symbol sequences are stopped and displayed with a stop symbol corresponding to the first result. To do.

  If the start condition is satisfied when the fluctuation display is performed by the fluctuation execution means, the information corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means is stored in the predetermined storage unit by the holding means, and thus the information is stored. Then, with the predetermined number as the upper limit, it is possible to hold until the fluctuation display corresponding to the information is executed by the fluctuation execution means.

  Based on the rendering target information corresponding to the execution of the predetermined variation display that is executed after the at least two or more variation displays are executed, which is information corresponding to the lottery result held by the holding unit, As the predetermined effect, in the variation display executed before the predetermined variation display by the variation execution means, the predetermined variation display is executed for the symbols of the symbol sequence displayed on the predetermined rotator among the plurality of symbol sequences. An effect is performed in which the player stops in a visually recognizable manner with a symbol to which numerical information corresponding to the number of times of variable display executed is performed.

  Therefore, the player can visually recognize the numerical information attached to the symbols in the symbol sequence displayed on the predetermined laparoscope in the variation display during execution until the predetermined variation display is executed thereafter. It is possible to grasp the number of times of variable display to be performed from the numerical information. Since the number of times is counted down every time the variable display is performed, a sense of expectation for the lottery result with respect to the predetermined variable display that gradually approaches can be amplified, thereby improving the interest of the game.

  In addition, the countdown of the number of times of variation display executed until the predetermined variation display is executed is performed by the symbols in the symbol sequence displayed on the laparoscope to be variably displayed, so that the player may miss the countdown. Can be suppressed.

  In addition, the graphic sequence to be displayed in a variable manner is not limited to the rotating body, but there is a gaming machine that is executed by image display by a liquid crystal display device or the like. There are many players who tend to have high component costs and prefer variable display with a three-dimensional rotator. At this time, in a gaming machine that performs variable display using a three-dimensional rotating body, if it is intended to display the number of countdowns described above separately from the symbols that are variable displayed, the cost of the display device is added.

  On the other hand, the gaming machine described in the feature 70 includes a design in which numerical information is attached to the three-dimensional rotator, and a part of the stop design corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means by this design. Can be configured. For this reason, in a gaming machine that performs variable display using a three-dimensional rotator, the display size of the symbol displayed on the rotator is set large, making it easier for the player to visually recognize the symbol and suppressing an increase in cost. However, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having an effect in which a countdown display is performed by a symbol until a predetermined variation display is executed.

  In the gaming machine described in the feature 70, “... a player can stop visually with a symbol with numerical information attached” is not limited to a complete stop of the symbol with the numerical information. The symbol may stop within a predetermined range and be accompanied by an operation such as swinging, or may be a temporary stop in the middle of the change, not the final stop of the symbol.

<Feature 71>
A gaming machine according to feature 70,
In the variation display executed before the predetermined variation display by the variation execution means, the predetermined production is performed in such a manner that the symbols in the symbol row displayed on the predetermined rotation body are different from the predetermined rotation body. It is an effect that the player stops in a visually recognizable manner with a symbol attached with numerical information corresponding to the number of times of change display executed until the predetermined change display is executed while the body is changing. A gaming machine characterized by

  In the gaming machine according to the feature 71, the player can move the predetermined turning body in a state in which another rotating body (a rotating body different from the predetermined rotating body) is changing in the change display during execution. By visually recognizing the numerical information attached to the symbol of the symbol sequence to be displayed, it is possible to grasp from the numerical information the number of times the variable display is executed until a predetermined variable display is subsequently executed. Therefore, the player can easily grasp the predetermined spinning body by distinguishing it from other spinning bodies from among the plurality of spinning bodies, and thus can prevent the player from overlooking the countdown performed in the predetermined spinning body.

<Feature 80>
A display unit (reel device 710, decorative design display device 479) capable of displaying symbols;
Lottery means (main control board 920) for performing a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied;
First variation execution means (sub-control board 940) that, when the start condition is satisfied, displays the symbols on the display section in a variable manner, and then stops and displays the symbols at a stop symbol corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means; ,
If the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined first result, the special variation state that is advantageous to the normal gaming state after being stopped and displayed by the first variation executing means with the stop symbol corresponding to the first result. Game control means (main control board 920) for generating a game state;
If the start condition is satisfied when the first variation execution means is displaying the symbol variation, information corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means is stored in a predetermined storage unit with the predetermined number as the upper limit. By storing the information in (RAM of the main control board 920), the information is held until the first fluctuation execution means executes the fluctuation display of the symbol corresponding to the information (main control board 920). When,
Special effect selection means (sub control board 940) that selects execution of a predetermined special effect with a predetermined probability when the number of information corresponding to the lottery result held by the holding means reaches an upper limit;
When the number of pieces of information corresponding to the lottery result held by the holding means reaches an upper limit and the execution of the special effect is selected by the special effect selecting unit, the display unit or the display unit A second variation execution means (sub control board 940) for performing a predetermined second variation display on a second display unit (lottery result display device 730) different from that, and then performing a stop display in a predetermined stop mode;
And a special effect executing means (sub control board 940) for executing the special effect when the second change display is stopped and displayed in the predetermined stop mode by the second change executing means. A gaming machine.

  Conventionally, there is a pachinko machine as a representative example of a gaming machine. In a conventional typical pachinko machine, when entering a start opening provided in a game area, a lottery is performed according to the entry, and when a big win is won in the lottery, a special gaming state is entered. A configuration is known in which a large number of game balls can enter a winning opening. In addition, the pachinko machine includes a display device, and the display device starts the variable display of the symbols based on the fact that the lottery has been performed, and displays the final lottery display as a final stop display of the variable display. The corresponding stop result is displayed.

  In addition, in the conventional pachinko machine, when the game ball enters the starting port while the display of the symbols is displayed on the display device, the hit information (corresponding to the lottery result) is used. Information (corresponding to a lottery result) is stored on hold with a predetermined number (for example, 4) as an upper limit (see, for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2016-22214).

  However, there is still a possibility that there is still room for improvement in a gaming machine having a conventional configuration that can hold a lottery result up to a predetermined upper limit value. For example, if the hit information reaches the upper limit value, even if the game ball enters the start port, the hit information for the entered ball is not stored and is merely wasted.

  In contrast, with the gaming machine described in the feature 80, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably storing the lottery result up to a predetermined upper limit value. That is, when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, the first variation execution means displays the symbols in a variable manner on the display unit, and then stops and displays the symbols at the stop symbol corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means. At this time, if the lottery result is a predetermined first result, a special game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state is generated by the game control means after being stopped and displayed with a stop symbol corresponding to the first result.

  When the start condition is established when the variation display is performed by the first variation execution means, the information corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means is stored in the predetermined storage unit by the holding means, thereby It is possible to hold the information up to a predetermined number as an upper limit until the fluctuation display corresponding to the information is executed by the fluctuation execution means.

  When the number of pieces of information corresponding to the lottery result held by the holding means reaches the upper limit, the special effect selecting means selects execution of the predetermined special effect with a predetermined probability. When execution of the special effect is selected, the second variation execution means performs a predetermined second variation display on the display unit or a second display unit different from the display unit, and then stops in a predetermined stop mode. After that, the special effect is executed by the special effect executing means.

  Therefore, when execution of the special effect is selected by the special effect selection means, the special effect is executed by the special effect execution means, so the player increases the number of information corresponding to the lottery result to be held. With this objective, you can face a game that aims to establish start conditions. Thereby, it is possible to improve a player's willingness to play a gaming machine capable of holding a lottery result up to a predetermined upper limit value.

  Further, since the player is informed as to whether or not the special effect is selected by the special effect selection means as the stop display after the second variation display, the number of information corresponding to the reserved lottery result has reached the upper limit. From the start to the end of the second variation display (that is, during the execution period of the second variation display), it is possible to suitably amplify the player's expectation for the execution of the special effect.

  Note that the “special effect” in the gaming machine described in the feature 80 may be an effect displayed on the display unit, an effect due to sound, an effect due to light, or an effect due to operation of an operable structure, or The production may be a combination of some or all of these productions.

  Further, the second variation executing means in the gaming machine described in the feature 80 is a display section or a second different from the display section when the number of information corresponding to the lottery result held by the holding means reaches an upper limit. After performing the predetermined second variation display on the display unit, when the execution of the special effect is selected by the special effect selection means, the display is stopped in a predetermined stop mode, and the execution of the special effect is not selected The stop display may be performed in a stop mode different from the predetermined stop mode.

<Feature 81>
A gaming machine according to feature 80,
The second variation execution means performs the second variation display that varies within a predetermined range on the display unit or the second display unit, and then the execution of the special effect is selected by the special effect selection unit. A game machine, wherein stop display is performed at different positions within the predetermined range depending on whether or not execution of the special effect is selected.

  In the case of the gaming machine described in feature 81, when the second variation display is performed by the second variation execution means, execution of the special effect is selected by the special effect selection means, and execution of the special effect is selected. Since the position of the stop display after the second variation display is different from the case where there is not, the player can easily determine sensuously from the position of the stop display whether or not the execution of the special effect is selected. In particular, since the stop display is limited to a predetermined range, it is easy for the player to grasp the position of the stop display.

<Feature 90>
A display unit (reel device 710, decorative design display device 479) capable of variably displaying a plurality of symbol rows,
Lottery means (main control board 920) for performing a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied;
Fluctuation execution means (sub-control board 940) that displays the plurality of symbol sequences in a variable manner on the display unit when the start condition is satisfied, and then stops and displays the symbol combination according to the lottery result;
When the lottery result is a predetermined first result, after the plurality of symbol sequences are stopped and displayed by the combination of symbols corresponding to the first result by the variation execution means, the gaming state is more advantageous than the normal gaming state. Game control means (main control board 920) for generating a special game state;
When the start condition is satisfied when the variation display is performed by the variation execution means, information corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means is stored in a predetermined storage unit (main control board 920) with a predetermined number as the upper limit. Storage means (main control board 920) for suspending the information until the fluctuation display corresponding to the information is executed by the fluctuation execution means.
Special effect selection means (sub control board 940) that selects execution of a predetermined special effect with a predetermined probability when the number of information corresponding to the lottery result held by the holding means reaches an upper limit;
Special execution executing means (sub control board 940) for executing the special effect when execution of the special effect is selected by the special effect selecting means;
When execution of the special effect is selected by the special effect selection unit and the variation display is performed by the variation execution unit, a predetermined attention display is displayed as the content of the variation display. And a selection result display means (sub-control board 940) for recognizing that the execution of the special effect is selected at a time different from the time at which the player is performing. Machine.

  Conventionally, there is a pachinko machine as a representative example of a gaming machine. In a conventional typical pachinko machine, when entering a start opening provided in a game area, a lottery is performed according to the entry, and when a big win is won in the lottery, a special gaming state is entered. A configuration is known in which a large number of game balls can enter a winning opening. In addition, the pachinko machine includes a display device, and the display device starts the variable display of the symbols based on the fact that the lottery has been performed, and displays the final lottery display as a final stop display of the variable display. The corresponding stop result is displayed.

  In addition, in the conventional pachinko machine, when the game ball enters the starting port while the display of the symbols is displayed on the display device, the hit information (corresponding to the lottery result) is used. Information (corresponding to a lottery result) is stored on hold with a predetermined number (for example, 4) as an upper limit (see, for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2016-22214).

  However, there is still a possibility that there is still room for improvement in a gaming machine having a conventional configuration that can hold a lottery result up to a predetermined upper limit value. For example, if the hit information reaches the upper limit value, even if the game ball enters the start port, the hit information for the entered ball is not stored and is merely wasted.

  On the other hand, with the gaming machine described in the feature 90, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably storing the lottery result up to a predetermined upper limit value. That is, when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, a plurality of symbol sequences are variably displayed on the display unit by the variation executing means, and then stopped and displayed with a stop symbol corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means. At this time, if the lottery result is a predetermined first result, a special game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state is generated by the game control means after a plurality of symbol sequences are stopped and displayed with a stop symbol corresponding to the first result. To do.

  If the start condition is satisfied when the fluctuation display is performed by the fluctuation execution means, the information corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means is stored in the predetermined storage unit by the holding means, and thus the information is stored. Then, with the predetermined number as the upper limit, it is possible to hold until the fluctuation display corresponding to the information is executed by the fluctuation execution means.

  When the number of pieces of information corresponding to the lottery result held by the holding means reaches the upper limit, the special effect selecting means selects execution of the predetermined special effect with a predetermined probability. When execution of the special effect is selected, the special effect is executed by the special effect executing means. Therefore, when execution of the special effect is selected by the special effect selection means, the special effect is executed by the special effect execution means, so the player increases the number of information corresponding to the lottery result to be held. With this objective, you can face a game that aims to establish start conditions. Thereby, it is possible to improve a player's willingness to play a gaming machine capable of holding a lottery result up to a predetermined upper limit value.

  Further, when execution of the special effect is selected by the special effect selection means, and when the change display is executed by the change execution means, the selection result display means that the execution of the special effect is selected. Thus, the player can recognize the content at the time different from the time when the predetermined attention display is displayed as the contents of the variable display.

  Therefore, since the display indicating that the execution of the special effect has been selected does not overlap the display timing of the attention display, the player does not easily miss the display indicating that the execution of the special effect has been selected. In addition, when a predetermined attention display is displayed as the content of the variable display, the player can be dedicated to the attention display, so that the expectation for the variable display during execution by the attention display is preferably improved. be able to.

  In addition, the “predetermined attention display” in the gaming machine described in the feature 90 is a stop display in a state in which a part of a plurality of symbol strings constitutes a part of a symbol combination corresponding to the first result. Display (so-called “reach display”) may be used, and display of characters (for example, a school of fish) on the display unit and suggestive effects (e.g., ease of transition to a special game state) by light emission of the light emitting unit, etc. It may be an effect that suggests the degree or expectation).

  Further, the “special effect” in the gaming machine described in the feature 90 may be an effect displayed on the display unit, an effect by sound, an effect by light, or an effect by an operation of an operable structure, or The production may be a combination of some or all of these productions.

<Feature 91>
A gaming machine according to feature 90,
The selection result display means is a case where execution of the special effect is selected by the special effect selection means, and the predetermined attention display is displayed in the variation display executed by the variation execution means. A game machine characterized in that the end time of the notice display is advanced, and after the notice display is finished, the player can recognize that the execution of the special effect has been selected.

  In the case of the gaming machine described in the feature 91, when execution of the special effect is selected by the special effect selection unit, and a predetermined attention display is displayed in the variation display performed by the variation execution unit. Then, the end time of the notice display is advanced by the selection result display means, and the fact that the execution of the special effect has been selected is displayed so that the player can recognize after the notice display ends. Thereby, the display which shows that execution of the special effect was selected can be shown at an early stage, showing a notice display to a player.

<Feature 92>
The gaming machine according to Feature 90 or 91,
The predetermined attention display is displayed in a stopped state in a state in which a part of the plurality of symbol strings constitutes a part of a combination of symbols corresponding to the first result, and then the remaining symbol strings are It is a display until it stops displaying with a symbol according to the lottery result by the lottery means,
The selection result display means is a case where execution of the special effect is selected by the special effect selection means, and the predetermined attention display is displayed in the variation display executed by the variation execution means. A gaming machine characterized in that after completion of the predetermined attention display, a player can recognize that execution of the special effect has been selected.

  In the case of the gaming machine described in the feature 92, when the execution of the special effect is selected by the special effect selection unit and the predetermined attention display is displayed in the variation display executed by the variation execution unit. The selection result display means displays that the execution of the special effect is selected so that the player can recognize after the notice display ends. Here, the attention display is stopped and displayed in a state in which a part of a plurality of symbol strings constitutes a part of a combination of symbols corresponding to the first result, and then the remaining symbol strings are selected by lottery means. This is a display until it is stopped and displayed with a symbol corresponding to the lottery result by, and it is a display that expects the player to transition to the special gaming state, so execution by attention display by dedicating the player to the attention display The expectation with respect to the variable display inside can be improved suitably.

<Feature A0>
A display unit (reel device 710, decorative design display device 479) capable of variably displaying a plurality of symbol rows,
Lottery means (main control board 920) for performing a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied;
Fluctuation execution means (sub-control board 940) that displays the plurality of symbol sequences in a variable manner on the display unit when the start condition is satisfied, and then stops and displays a stop symbol corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means. When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined first result, the plurality of symbol sequences are stopped and displayed at the stop symbol corresponding to the first result by the variation executing means, and then more advantageous than the normal gaming state. Game control means (main control board 920) for generating a special game state which is a game state;
When the start condition is satisfied when the variation display is performed by the variation execution means, information corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means is stored in a predetermined storage unit (main control board 920) with a predetermined number as the upper limit. Storage means (main control board 920) for suspending the information until the fluctuation display corresponding to the information is executed by the fluctuation execution means.
Information corresponding to the lottery result held by the holding means and based on the production target information corresponding to execution of the predetermined fluctuation display executed after at least one or more fluctuation display is executed. Production execution means (sub-control board 940) for executing
The predetermined performance is
When the stop symbol corresponding to the first result is stopped and displayed, the plurality of symbol strings are different from the first result in a predetermined display area (middle line L2) that is shifted to the special gaming state. Executing a first variable display that stops and displays a stop symbol corresponding to a lottery result and is a combination of predetermined symbols that do not transition to the special gaming state;
After executing the first variation display, one or more variation displays executed by the variation execution means before the predetermined variation display, or included in the predetermined symbol combination in the predetermined variation display A part of the symbol (second sub-symbol 713B) that cannot stop display the stop symbol corresponding to the first result in the predetermined display area when the part of the symbol is included. Other symbol rows (left symbol row, right symbol row) that are different from the symbol row (middle symbol row) including the part of the plurality of symbol rows while maintaining the state displayed in the predetermined display area ) Starts the second fluctuation display that fluctuates,
Synchronized with a predetermined attention display performed in the predetermined variation display or at a timing before a predetermined time from the end timing of the predetermined variation display, the symbol that has been stopped from the previous time among the plurality of symbol rows A gaming machine that is an effect of starting a change in a row (middle symbol row).

  Conventionally, there is a pachinko machine as a representative example of a gaming machine. In a conventional typical pachinko machine, when a game ball wins at the start winning opening, the symbol display device starts displaying a variation of the production symbol and performs a big hit lottery, and the big hit is based on the result of the big hit lottery When it determines with generating, the structure which produces | generates a jackpot after stopping and displaying an effect design with a jackpot symbol (for example, "777") is known.

  In addition, some conventional pachinko machines pre-read the results of the big hit lottery and perform the pre-reading effect while the effect design is changing (see, for example, JP 2009-291480 A). The pre-reading effect means that if a game ball is won at the start winning opening during the change of the production symbol, the number of reserved balls is added and a big hit lottery is performed based on the random number value acquired at the winning timing. Based on the result, it is an effect of notifying about the gaming state that occurs when the variation display of the effect symbol performed by digestion of the reserved ball is completed. For example, if the result of the jackpot lottery for the first reserved ball is a jackpot, it is notified that a jackpot will occur when the next variation display after the current variation display is completed.

  However, there is still a possibility that there is still room for improvement in the gaming machine having a conventional configuration that performs the pre-reading effect. For example, in order to increase the player's interest in prefetching effects, diversification of the prefetching effects is required.

  On the other hand, with the gaming machine described in the feature A0, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which prefetching effects are diversified. That is, when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, a plurality of symbol sequences are variably displayed on the display unit by the variation executing means, and then stopped and displayed with a stop symbol corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means. At this time, if the lottery result is a predetermined first result, a special game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state is generated by the game control means after a plurality of symbol sequences are stopped and displayed with a stop symbol corresponding to the first result. To do.

  If the start condition is satisfied when the fluctuation display is performed by the fluctuation execution means, the information corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means is stored in the predetermined storage unit by the holding means, and thus the information is stored. Then, with the predetermined number as the upper limit, it is possible to hold until the fluctuation display corresponding to the information is executed by the fluctuation execution means.

  Based on the production target information corresponding to the execution of the predetermined variation display executed after the at least one or more variation display is executed, which is information corresponding to the lottery result held by the holding means, the predetermined production is produced. It is executed by execution means.

  Specifically, in the predetermined performance, first, when a stop symbol corresponding to the first result is stopped and displayed, a plurality of symbol strings are displayed in a predetermined display area that will transition to the special gaming state. A first variation display is performed in which a stop symbol corresponding to a lottery result different from the one result is stopped and displayed in a stop symbol that is a combination of predetermined symbols that do not transition to the special gaming state.

  After the first fluctuation display is executed, one or more fluctuation displays executed by the fluctuation execution means before the predetermined fluctuation display, or the stop that is stopped and displayed in the first fluctuation display in the predetermined fluctuation display A part of symbols included in a combination of predetermined symbols that are symbols that cannot stop display corresponding to the first result in the predetermined display area when the symbols are included. While the state is displayed in the predetermined display area, the second variation display in which another symbol sequence different from the symbol sequence including the partial symbol among the plurality of symbol sequences is started.

  And, in synchronization with the predetermined attention display performed in the predetermined variation display, or at a timing before the predetermined time from the end time of the predetermined variation display, the symbols that have been stopped from the previous time in the plurality of symbol rows The variation of the column (that is, the symbol sequence including a part of the symbols displayed in the predetermined display area among the stopped symbols stopped and displayed in the first variation display) is started.

  Therefore, in the one or more variation displays executed before the predetermined variation display, or in the predetermined variation display, as a second variation display, a part of the stopped symbols stopped and displayed in the first variation display While the state in which the symbols are displayed in the predetermined display area is maintained, the variation of another symbol sequence different from the symbol sequence including the part of the symbols is performed, so the player has started the second variation display. In this way, it is possible to amplify the expectation for the lottery result display (stop display) for the predetermined variation display that comes after that, thereby improving the interest in the game.

  In particular, the symbol sequence that has been stopped from the variation display before the predetermined variation display is synchronized with a predetermined attention display performed in the predetermined variation display or a predetermined time from the end time of the predetermined variation display. Since the variation starts at the previous timing, it is strongly impressed that the end time of the predetermined variation display is approaching, thereby further enhancing the expectation of the lottery result for the predetermined variation display.

  In addition, the symbols displayed in the predetermined display area in the symbol row that has been stopped from the variation display before the predetermined variation display (a part of the symbols that are stopped in the first variation display) If the symbol is included, the symbol corresponding to the first result cannot be stopped and displayed in the predetermined display area. Therefore, in one or more variation displays executed before the predetermined variation display, the second variation display is performed. It is possible to prevent the stop symbol corresponding to the first result from being stopped and displayed when another symbol sequence that fluctuates as is stopped.

  In addition, the “predetermined attention display” in the gaming machine described in the feature A0 is a stop display in a state where a part of a plurality of symbol strings constitutes a part of a combination of symbols corresponding to the first result. Display (so-called “reach display”) may be used, and display of characters (for example, a school of fish) on the display unit and suggestive effects (e.g., ease of transition to a special game state) by light emission of the light emitting unit, etc. It may be an effect that suggests the degree or expectation).

<Feature A1>
A gaming machine according to feature A0,
In the first variation display, a symbol that cannot constitute the first result in a symbol sequence different from the other symbol sequence is stopped in the predetermined display area while the other symbol sequence is fluctuating. Thereafter, the other symbol sequence is stopped so as to become a stop symbol which is a combination of the predetermined symbols.

  In the case of the gaming machine described in the feature A1, in the first variation display, the symbol sequence stopped prior to another symbol sequence is synchronized with a predetermined attention display performed in the subsequent predetermined variation display, or Since it is stopped until it is re-varied at a timing before a predetermined time from the end time of the predetermined variation display, it is easy to attract the player's attention to the most varied symbol sequence, and the predetermined variation display due to the most variation The feeling of expectation for the lottery result can be suitably increased.

<Feature B0>
A display unit (reel device 710, decorative design display device 479) capable of variably displaying a plurality of symbol rows,
Lottery means (main control board 920) for performing a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied;
Fluctuation execution means (sub-control board 940) that displays the plurality of symbol sequences in a variable manner on the display unit when the start condition is satisfied, and then stops and displays a stop symbol corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means. When,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined first result, the special execution state which is a advantageous game state over the normal game state after being displayed in a stop pattern corresponding to the first result by the variation execution means Game control means (main control board 920) for generating
When the start condition is satisfied when the variation display is performed by the variation execution means, information corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means is stored in a predetermined storage unit (main control board 920) with a predetermined number as the upper limit. Storage means (main control board 920) for suspending the information until the fluctuation display corresponding to the information is executed by the fluctuation execution means.
Information corresponding to the lottery result held by the holding means and based on the production target information corresponding to execution of the predetermined fluctuation display executed after at least one or more fluctuation display is executed. Production execution means (sub-control board 940) for executing
The predetermined effect is a partial display (second sub-pattern 713B) that does not constitute a stop symbol corresponding to the first result as a variation display executed before the predetermined variation display by the variation execution means. When the stop symbol corresponding to the first result is stopped and displayed, the display is continued in the predetermined display area (middle line L2) that will transition to the special gaming state over the entire period of the variable display, An effect of suspending and displaying another symbol row after the symbol row (left symbol row, right symbol row) different from the symbol row (middle symbol row) including the part of the symbol row is displayed. A gaming machine characterized by being.

  Conventionally, there is a pachinko machine as a representative example of a gaming machine. In a conventional typical pachinko machine, when a game ball wins at the start winning opening, the symbol display device starts displaying a variation of the production symbol and performs a big hit lottery, and the big hit is based on the result of the big hit lottery When it determines with generating, the structure which produces | generates a jackpot after stopping and displaying an effect design with a jackpot symbol (for example, "777") is known.

  In addition, some conventional pachinko machines pre-read the results of the big hit lottery and perform the pre-reading effect while the effect design is changing (see, for example, JP 2009-291480 A). The pre-reading effect means that if a game ball is won at the start winning opening during the change of the production symbol, the number of reserved balls is added and a big hit lottery is performed based on the random number value acquired at the winning timing. Based on the result, it is an effect of notifying about the gaming state that occurs when the variation display of the effect symbol performed by digestion of the reserved ball is completed. For example, if the result of the jackpot lottery for the first reserved ball is a jackpot, it is notified that a jackpot will occur when the next variation display after the current variation display is completed.

  However, there is still a possibility that there is still room for improvement in the gaming machine having a conventional configuration that performs the pre-reading effect. For example, in order to increase the player's interest in prefetching effects, diversification of the prefetching effects is required.

  In contrast, with the gaming machine described in the feature B0, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the pre-reading effects are diversified. That is, when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, a plurality of symbol sequences are variably displayed on the display unit by the variation executing means, and then stopped and displayed with a stop symbol corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means. At this time, if the lottery result is a predetermined first result, a special game state that is more advantageous than the normal game state is generated by the game control means after a plurality of symbol sequences are stopped and displayed with a stop symbol corresponding to the first result. To do.

  If the start condition is satisfied when the fluctuation display is performed by the fluctuation execution means, the information corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery means is stored in the predetermined storage unit by the holding means, and thus the information is stored. Then, with the predetermined number as the upper limit, it is possible to hold until the fluctuation display corresponding to the information is executed by the fluctuation execution means.

  Based on the production target information corresponding to the execution of the predetermined variation display executed after the at least one or more variation display is executed, which is information corresponding to the lottery result held by the holding means, the predetermined production is produced. It is executed by execution means. By executing the predetermined effect, it is possible to amplify the expectation for the display (stop display) of the lottery result for the predetermined variation display that comes after that, thereby improving the interest of the game.

  In the predetermined effect, in the variation display executed before the predetermined variation display by the variation execution means, a part of the symbols not constituting the stop symbol corresponding to the first result is a stop symbol corresponding to the first result. When a symbol is stopped and displayed, it is continuously displayed in the predetermined display area that will transition to the special gaming state during the entire period of the variable display, and the symbol sequence including the part of the symbols is a symbol sequence. After another symbol sequence is displayed in a variable manner, the other symbol sequence is stopped and displayed.

  Therefore, in the variation display executed before the predetermined variation display, by showing that a part of the symbols not constituting the stop symbol corresponding to the first result is displayed from the start to the end of the variation display, The person recognizes that the stop symbol corresponding to the first result is not displayed in the variation display, and thereby can further amplify the expectation for the predetermined variation display that comes after that.

  In the gaming machine described in the feature B0, “a symbol that does not constitute a stop symbol corresponding to the first result” displayed in a predetermined display area in the entire period of the variable display is one symbol of a plurality of symbol strings. It may be a symbol included in a column, or may be a plurality of symbols included in a part or all of a symbol column excluding one symbol column among a plurality of symbol columns.

<Feature C0>
A gaming machine having a gaming area in which a game ball launched from a launching device (launching device 330) flows down,
A ball guide nail portion (nail 411A, nail 411B) comprising a plurality of game nails erected side by side so that a game ball can be guided to a predetermined direction side in the game area;
A plate-like light-transmitting nail support member (region J of the base body 401) that supports the base end side of the plurality of game nails constituting the ball guiding nail portion and has light transmittance capable of seeing through the rear side from the front side. When,
A first passage (left first passage 1613A, right first passage 1613B) provided on the rear side of the light transmissive nail support member;
A path component (guide path 1612) for guiding a game ball that has entered from a predetermined entrance (entrance 1611) out of the game balls flowing down the game area to the first path;
A detection unit (left starting winning switch 1441A, right starting winning switch 1441B) capable of detecting a game ball flowing down along the first passage;
Privilege granting means (main control board 920) for granting a predetermined privilege when a game ball is detected by the detection unit;
A second passage that is branched upstream from the detection portion in a direction different from the first passage, and when a game ball enters from the first passage, the game ball is detected by the detection portion. Second passage (left second passage 1614A, right second passage 1614B) that is not performed,
An information display unit that displays predetermined benefit non-granting information (non-startup winning area information) that allows the player to recognize that the second passage is an area where the predetermined bonus is not given when a game ball enters. An information display unit 753),
The information display unit is behind the light-transmitting nail support member, and does not overlap the plurality of game nails when viewed from the front of the gaming machine, and the player's viewpoint is located on the front side of the gaming machine The game machine is provided at a position overlapping the back side of the plurality of game nails when viewed in a predetermined oblique direction.

  A typical example of a gaming machine is a pachinko machine. In a conventional typical pachinko machine, when a game ball that has entered a winning port (for example, a starting port) provided in a gaming area is detected by a detection sensor (winning switch), a configuration that gives a privilege in the game ( For example, when a winning prize is generated and a big hit lottery is performed, and a big win is won in the big win lottery, a special gaming state is established and a large number of game balls can enter the winning opening). (See, for example, JP-A-2016-22147).

  Further, in a conventional pachinko machine, a detection sensor that branches from the guide passage and detects a winning at the start port is detected with respect to a guide passage that guides a game ball that has entered from a predetermined entrance to the start port. By providing a non-branching passage, even if a game ball enters the entrance, a part thereof may not be a start prize.

  However, as represented by the above gaming machine, when other passages are provided so that a part of the game balls that have entered the guide passage from a predetermined entrance does not become a prize that gives a predetermined privilege, There is a possibility that there is room for improvement in the configuration that allows the player to appropriately recognize the presence of the passage.

  For example, when predetermined information is displayed so that a player can recognize the existence of a region that is not allowed to start a prize, such as the above-mentioned branch passage, into which a game ball that has entered from a predetermined entrance can be entered, While it is possible to inform the player of the existence of an area that does not become a game, there is a possibility that the player may feel the game boring when a game ball enters an area that does not become a start prize.

  On the other hand, in the case of the gaming machine described in the feature C0, when a game ball is detected, a part of the game ball that has entered from a predetermined entrance leading to a detection unit to which a predetermined privilege is given has a predetermined privilege. It is the structure which provided the other channel | path so that it might not become a prize to give, Comprising: The game machine which can display suitably the presence of the said other channel | path can be provided. That is, of the game balls flowing down the game area, the game ball that has entered from a predetermined entrance is guided to the first path by the path configuration unit. When a game ball flowing down along the first passage is detected by the detection unit, a predetermined privilege is given by the privilege giving means.

  On the other hand, a second passage that branches in a direction different from the first passage is provided on the upstream side of the detection unit, and a part of the game balls flowing down the first passage can pass through the second passage. When a game ball enters the second passage, the game ball is not detected by the detection unit. Therefore, when a game ball that has entered from a predetermined entrance flows down the first passage and is detected by the detection unit, the player can obtain a predetermined privilege, but from the first passage to the second passage, When entering, the player cannot obtain a predetermined privilege.

  Since the first passage is provided on the back side of the light-transmitting plate-like light-transmitting nail support member that can be seen through from the front side to the rear side, the player visually recognizes the game ball flowing down the first passage. In addition, the entry of the game ball from the first passage to the second passage can be visually confirmed.

  An information display unit is provided on the rear side of the light transmissive nail support member. The information display section displays predetermined benefit non-granting information that allows the player to recognize that the second passage is an area where a predetermined privilege is not given when a game ball enters. Therefore, the player who has visually recognized the predetermined privilege non-granting information knows that the second passage is an area where a predetermined privilege is not granted when a game ball enters.

  The information display unit is provided at a position overlapping the back side of the plurality of game nails in a predetermined oblique view when the player's viewpoint is located on the front side of the gaming machine. A player located on the front side of the gaming machine sees the information display portion that overlaps the back side of the plurality of game nails when viewing a predetermined oblique direction. Therefore, since it is difficult for a player who is playing a game to recognize the predetermined privilege non-grant information using a plurality of game nails, even if a game ball entering from a predetermined entrance enters the second passage through the first passage The discouragement of the player for not being given a predetermined privilege can be suitably suppressed.

  On the other hand, the light-transmitting nail support member is configured as a member that supports the base end side of the plurality of game nails constituting the ball guide nail portion, but the information display unit is configured to be a plurality of games in the game machine front view. It is provided at a position that does not overlap the nail. Therefore, the visibility of the information display unit from the front of the gaming machine is sufficiently ensured, so that the predetermined privilege non-grant information can be reported appropriately.

  Examples of the “predetermined privilege” described in the feature C0 include the occurrence of a start winning prize, lottery conditions, a lottery probability, a special gaming state that occurs when a lottery is won, and the number of game balls to be paid out.

  Further, the “position overlapping the back side of the plurality of game nails in the predetermined oblique direction view” described in the feature C0 overlaps the distal end side in the oblique direction with respect to the plurality of game nails in the predetermined oblique direction view. It is good also as a position.

<Feature C1>
A gaming machine according to feature C0,
A first rear side portion (passage forming member 1631) disposed on the rear side of the light transmissive nail support member and having a portion (passage wall portion 1631A) overlapping the front side of the information display portion in a front view of the gaming machine. A gaming machine characterized by comprising.

  In the gaming machine described in the feature C1, the first rear side portion having a portion overlapping the front side of the information display portion in the front view of the gaming machine is provided on the rear side of the light-transmitting nail support member. The visibility of the predetermined privilege no-giving information overlapping the rear side of the first rear side portion when viewed from the front can be reduced. This makes it more difficult for a player in the game to recognize the predetermined privilege non-granting information, so that the player's discouragement when a game ball entering from a predetermined entrance enters the second passage through the first passage. It can suppress more suitably.

<Feature C2>
A gaming machine according to feature C0 or feature C1,
A portion (passage wall) disposed behind the light transmissive nail support member and overlapping the front side of the information display unit in the predetermined oblique view when the player's viewpoint is located on the front side of the gaming machine A gaming machine comprising a second rear side portion (passage forming member 1631) having a portion 1631B).

  In the gaming machine according to the feature C2, the rear side of the light-transmitting nail support member is located on the front side of the information display unit in a predetermined oblique direction when the player's viewpoint is located on the front side of the gaming machine. Since the 2nd rear side part which has an overlap part is provided, the visibility of the predetermined privilege non-giving information which overlaps the back side of the 2nd rear side part seeing from the front can be made low. This makes it more difficult for a player in the game to recognize the predetermined privilege non-granting information, so that the player's discouragement when a game ball entering from a predetermined entrance enters the second passage through the first passage. It can suppress more suitably.

<Feature C3>
A gaming machine according to any one of features C0 to C2,
The predetermined privilege non-grant information is composed of a predetermined character string indicating that the predetermined privilege is not provided.
The predetermined character string is arranged along an arrangement of the plurality of game nails overlapping the front side of the information display unit in the predetermined oblique view when the player's viewpoint is located on the front side of the gaming machine. A gaming machine characterized by

  In the case of the gaming machine described in the feature C3, the predetermined privilege non-granting information is composed of a predetermined character string, and the predetermined character string is a predetermined diagonal when the player's viewpoint is located in front of the gaming machine. They are arranged along an arrangement of a plurality of game nails that overlap the front side of the information display unit in the direction view. Therefore, since many areas of the character string constituting the predetermined privilege non-granting information are arranged so as to overlap the plurality of game nails in the predetermined oblique view, the player who is playing the game is given the predetermined privilege non-granting information Is more difficult to recognize. Therefore, the disappointment of the player when the game ball that has entered from the predetermined entrance enters the second passage through the first passage can be more preferably suppressed.

<Feature D0>
A game area (base body 401) having an opening formed in the game area, and a game area in which a game ball can flow down is formed on the front side.
A decorative surface (base 701) provided in the rear side of the game board and positioned in the opening in a front view of the gaming machine;
A three-dimensional rotator arranged so that a plurality of symbols circulate is regarded as one symbol row, and each of a plurality of symbol rows configured by arranging a plurality of the rotators is displayed in a variable manner by rotating each rotator. A variable display unit configured to be capable of being displayed in the opening of the game board, wherein a part of the plurality of rotating bodies protrudes forward from the opening so that the plurality of symbols can be visually recognized. Part (reel device 710);
Provided at a position overlapping the front side of the plurality of rotating bodies so that the plurality of symbols can be visually recognized, and a cross section seen from a predetermined direction intersecting the front-rear direction in a front view of the gaming machine protrudes in a substantially arc shape on the front side A display cover unit configured in a plate shape, and when a light is irradiated from a predetermined end side so that the light travels along a direction in which the plate-shaped plate surfaces continue, a predetermined image is generated by the light. A display cover portion (resin cover 715) having a light guide portion (light guide plate 715B) capable of emitting and displaying (pattern 743);
A game board image display unit provided on at least one side of the predetermined image that can be displayed on the light guide unit at least a part of the periphery of the opening of the game board, and the predetermined image together with the predetermined image A game board image display part (pattern 741) that constitutes a part of a decorative image (a school of fish facing to the left) continuous on the direction side of
The decorative surface is provided between the light guide unit and the game board image display unit in the display cover unit in the front view of the gaming machine, and the continuous decoration together with the predetermined image and the game board image display unit. A gaming machine comprising a decorative surface image display part (picture 742) that constitutes a part of an image.

  A typical example of a gaming machine is a pachinko machine. In a conventional typical pachinko machine, when entering a start opening provided in a game area, a lottery is performed according to the entry, and when a big win is won in the lottery, a special gaming state is entered. There is known a configuration in which a large number of game balls can enter a winning opening (see, for example, JP-A-2016-22147).

  In such a conventional pachinko machine, the interest of the game is improved by displaying a symbol corresponding to the lottery result or displaying various effect images on the liquid crystal display device. A configuration is also known in which a lottery result is displayed by printing a symbol on a three-dimensional rotating body arranged so that a plurality of symbols circulate. However, in a gaming machine including a three-dimensional spinning body arranged so that a plurality of symbols circulate, it may be difficult to provide a display area for production over a wide range.

  On the other hand, with the gaming machine described in the feature D0, a wide range display area for presentation is suitable even for a gaming machine including a three-dimensional spinning body arranged so that a plurality of symbols circulate. An installable gaming machine can be provided. That is, the variable display unit uses a three-dimensional rotating body arranged so that a plurality of symbols circulate as one symbol row, and each of a plurality of symbol rows configured by arranging a plurality of the rotating bodies is rotated around each rotating body. Each can be displayed in a variable manner by moving it. The variation display section is provided in an opening formed in the game area of the game board, and a part of the plurality of rotator bodies protrudes forward from the opening so that a plurality of symbols can be visually recognized.

  A cross section seen from a predetermined direction intersecting the front-rear direction in the front view of the gaming machine protrudes in a substantially arc shape to the front side at a position overlapping the front side of the plurality of rotating bodies so that a plurality of symbols in the variable display portion can be visually recognized. The display cover part comprised by the plate shape to be provided is provided. The display cover unit can emit and display a predetermined image with light when the light is irradiated from a predetermined end side so that the light travels along the direction in which the plate-like plate surfaces of the display cover unit continue. A light guide.

  A game board image display unit is provided on at least a part of the periphery of the opening of the game board and on at least one side of a predetermined image that can be displayed by the light guide unit of the display cover unit. The game board image display unit constitutes a part of a decorative image continuous in a predetermined direction side together with a predetermined image that can be displayed by the light guide unit. The display range beyond can be displayed. Thereby, the effect by the decoration image which continues in a predetermined direction side can be made into a thing with a high impression degree compared with the case where the said decoration image is displayed using only a light guide part.

  However, when there is a structural separation between the opening of the game board and the display cover part, the predetermined discontinuity between the predetermined image displayed on the light guide part and the game board image display part causes a predetermined There is a possibility that an unnatural feeling may be given to the effect by the decorative image continuous on the direction side.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine described in the feature D0, the decorative surface located in the opening of the gaming board in the front view of the gaming machine is provided on the rear side of the gaming board. Between the light guide unit and the game board image display unit of the game board, a decorative surface image display unit that is a part of a decorative image continuous in a predetermined direction is provided.

  As a result, even if there is a structural separation between the opening of the game board and the display cover part (light guide part), the predetermined image displayed on the light guide part and the game board image display part Can be compensated by the decorative surface image display unit. Therefore, it is possible to realize an effect by a decorative image continuous in a predetermined direction displayed beyond the display range by the light guide unit as a suitable effect in which unnaturalness due to discontinuity is suppressed.

<Feature D1>
A gaming machine according to feature D0,
A side wall surface (side wall portion 702) provided between the peripheral edge of the opening of the game board and the decorative surface and extending in a direction intersecting the game board and the decorative surface;
The side wall surface is provided between the decorative surface image display unit and the game board image display unit, and together with the decorative surface image display unit and the game board image display unit, a part of the continuous decorative image is displayed. A gaming machine comprising a side wall surface image display unit (a pattern connecting between the pattern 741 and the pattern 742).

  In the gaming machine described in the feature D1, a side wall surface extending in a direction intersecting with the game board and the decoration surface is provided between the peripheral portion of the opening of the game board and the decoration surface. A side wall surface image display unit is provided on the side wall surface between the decorative surface image display unit of the decorative surface and the image display unit of the game board. The side wall surface image display unit, together with the decorative surface image display unit and the game board image display unit, is configured to be a part of a decorative image continuous in a predetermined direction. Therefore, the discontinuity in the height direction due to the height difference between the game board and the decorative surface can be compensated by the side wall surface image display unit. Thereby, since the continuity of the decorative image continuous in the predetermined direction side is improved, the unnaturalness due to the discontinuity in the effect by the decorative image continuous in the predetermined direction side can be more preferably suppressed.

<Feature D2>
A gaming machine according to feature D0 or feature D1,
The light guide unit is configured to display a first image (picture 743B, 743C), which is a part of one image constituting a decorative image continuous in the predetermined direction side, below a top part located at the foremost position in the display cover part. It is configured to be able to be displayed as a part of the predetermined image in a predetermined region (region R1, R2) on the side,
The decorative surface image display unit is displayed at a position adjacent to the first image displayed on the light guide unit, and forms a first image together with the first image (patterns 742B and 742C). A gaming machine characterized by including:

  In the case of the gaming machine described in the feature D2, a decorative image continuous in the predetermined direction side is configured from the first image displayed on the light guide unit and the second image displayed on the decorative surface image display unit. One image is formed. Thereby, since one image which comprises the decoration image continuous in a predetermined direction side can be arrange | positioned in the boundary part of a light guide part and a decoration surface, the continuity in the said decoration image can be improved suitably.

  In particular, since the first image is displayed in a predetermined area below the top located at the foremost position in the display cover portion, the height difference from the second image displayed on the decorative surface image display portion (decorative surface) ( The height in the front-rear direction can be kept low. Therefore, since distortion of one image composed of the first image and the second image can be suppressed, a sense of incongruity with respect to the one image can be made difficult to occur.

<Feature E0>
A game area (base body 401) having an opening formed in the game area, and a game area in which a game ball can flow down is formed on the front side.
A variation display unit (reel device 710) disposed in the opening of the game board and capable of variably displaying a plurality of symbol rows;
Lottery means (main control board 920) for performing a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied;
When the start condition is satisfied, the variation display unit displays the plurality of symbol sequences in a variable manner, and then stops and displays the change execution unit (sub control board 940 with a stop symbol corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery unit. )When,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined first result, the variation executing means stops the display of the plurality of symbol sequences at the stop symbol corresponding to the first result, and then the game is more advantageous than the normal gaming state. Game control means (main control board 920) for generating a special game state that is a state;
A display cover part (resin cover 715) provided to project forward from the position where the stop symbol is displayed;
An operation unit (press operation device 261) capable of emitting light that is arranged toward the upper side of the display cover unit when viewed from the front of the gaming machine and is operable by the player;
The operation unit is displayed in a predetermined color in synchronization with an operation effective period (operation possible period) during which input to the operation unit is valid, or a notification period before the operation effective period and reporting the operation effective period. Light emission control means (sub control board 940) for emitting light;
A reflective part (half mirror 761B) provided in a predetermined area below the top part located in the forefront of the display cover part, and capable of reflecting the light emitted from the operation part so that the player can visually recognize the reflected light. And a gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  A typical example of a gaming machine is a pachinko machine. In a conventional typical pachinko machine, when entering a start opening provided in a game area, a lottery is performed according to the entry, and when a big win is won in the lottery, a special gaming state is entered. A configuration is known in which a large number of game balls can enter a winning opening.

  In recent years, when a player operates an effect button (operation unit) at a predetermined timing, a predetermined effect such as change of display contents on a display device or output of corresponding sound from a speaker is executed. There are also known gaming machines (see, for example, JP-A-2006-193329). Some gaming machines of this type can inform the player of the operation timing of the operation unit by configuring the operation unit to emit light.

  However, there is still a possibility that there is still room for improvement in the conventional gaming machine configured to inform the player of the operation timing of the operation unit by light emission of the operation unit. For example, since the player tends to pay attention to the variable display performed on the display device, it is difficult to recognize the operation timing of the operation unit notified by the light emission of the operation unit provided below the display device. was there.

  On the other hand, in the case of the gaming machine described in the feature E0, in the configuration in which the operation time of the operation unit is reported to the player by the light emission of the operation unit, the operation time of the operation unit is preferably recognized by the player. Can be provided. That is, a game board in which a game area where a game ball can flow down is formed on the front side, an opening is formed in the game area in a front view of the gaming machine, and a plurality of symbol rows are formed in the opening. A variable display unit capable of variable display is provided. When a predetermined starting condition is satisfied, the variation executing means displays a variation of a plurality of symbol sequences on the variation display unit, and then stops and displays the symbol combination according to the lottery result by the lottery means. At this time, if the lottery result is a predetermined first result, after the symbols are stopped and displayed with a combination of symbols indicating the first result, a special game state advantageous to the normal game state is generated by the game control means.

  A display cover part projects from the front side of the position where the stop symbol is displayed. An operation unit that can be operated by the player is arranged on the upper side of the display cover portion from the front side of the gaming machine. The operation unit is configured to emit light. The operation unit is controlled by the light emission control unit, and is synchronized with an operation effective period in which an input to the operation unit is valid, or a notification period before the operation effective period and reporting the operation effective period. Light is emitted in a predetermined color.

  Here, since a predetermined area below the top portion located in the forefront of the display cover portion is provided with a reflection portion capable of reflecting the light emitted from the operation portion so that the player can visually reflect the reflected light. The player can visually recognize the light emitted from the operation unit as reflected light by the reflecting unit. As a result, even in a situation where the player pays attention to the variable display portion, the player is unlikely to miss the notification of the operation timing of the operation portion due to the light emission of the operation portion, and the operation timing is easy to recognize.

  Further, since the player is notified of the operation timing of the operation unit using the light reflected by the reflection unit, the control load does not increase for the notification. Therefore, also in this respect, the player can appropriately recognize the operation timing of the operation unit. In addition, since it is not necessary to provide a dedicated image display device (for example, a liquid crystal display device) for notifying the operation timing of the operation unit by an image or the like, the manufacturing cost and control load are not increased, and this is required. In this case, it is possible to make the player appropriately recognize the operation timing of the operation unit.

<Feature E1>
A gaming machine according to feature E0,
The variable display unit has a three-dimensional rotator arranged so that a plurality of symbols circulate as one symbol row, and each of the plurality of symbol rows configured by arranging a plurality of the rotators is assigned to each rotator. Each of the plurality of rotating bodies is configured to protrude forward from the opening in the game board by being configured to be variable and displayable by rotating,
The display cover portion is provided at a position overlapping the front side of the plurality of rotating bodies so that the plurality of symbols can be visually recognized, and a cross section viewed from a predetermined direction intersecting the front-rear direction in the front view of the gaming machine is on the front side. A gaming machine characterized by being configured in a plate shape protruding in a substantially arc shape.

  In the case of the gaming machine described in the feature E1, the variable display unit includes a three-dimensional rotator arranged so that a plurality of symbols circulate as one symbol row, and a plurality of rotators including the rotator are arranged side by side. Each of the plurality of symbol rows to be displayed can be displayed in a variable manner by rotating each of the plurality of rotator bodies. In the case of a gaming machine in which the variable display of symbols is displayed on the screen of a display unit such as an LCD, the operation effective period can be notified by displaying a predetermined character string or a predetermined image on the screen of the display unit. is there. However, it is difficult to display a character string or an image on the revolving body in the gaming machine having the characteristic E1 that displays the variation of the symbols by the revolving body.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine described in the feature E1, a part of the plurality of rotating bodies crosses in the front-rear direction in the front view of the gaming machine on the front side of the variable display portion provided to project forward from the opening of the gaming board. A plate-like display cover portion is provided in which a cross section viewed from a predetermined direction side protrudes in a substantially arc shape on the front side. By providing the reflecting portion in a predetermined region below the top portion positioned in the forefront of the display cover portion, the player can visually recognize the light emitted from the operation portion as reflected light from the reflecting portion.

<Feature E2>
A gaming machine according to feature E1,
Predetermined display portions (holding lamp 720, lottery result display device 730) provided in the opening of the gaming board and at the rear end side and the lower side of the predetermined area in a front view of the gaming machine are provided. A gaming machine characterized by that.

  In the gaming machine according to feature E2, the predetermined display provided in the opening of the gaming board is provided on the rear end side and the lower side of the predetermined area in the front view of the gaming machine. The area where the display content of the reflection part is reflected in the reflection part can be limited to a limited area on the rear end side of the reflection part. Thereby, it can suppress that the visibility of the light of the light emission part reflected by the reflection part is inhibited by the display content by the predetermined display part reflected on the reflection part. In addition, an area where light from the light emitting part is reflected by the reflecting part (an image is formed by the light from the light emitting part) without increasing the reflecting part (that is, without increasing the forward protrusion of the display cover part). A large area can be secured on the front side of the reflecting portion.

<Feature F0>
A game area (base body 401) having an opening formed in the game area, and a game area in which a game ball can flow down is formed on the front side.
A variation display unit (reel device 710) disposed in the opening of the game board and capable of variably displaying a plurality of symbol rows;
Lottery means (main control board 920) for performing a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied;
When the start condition is satisfied, the variation display unit displays the plurality of symbol sequences in a variable manner, and then stops and displays the change execution unit (sub control board 940 with a stop symbol corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery unit. )When,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined first result, the variation executing means stops the display of the plurality of symbol sequences at the stop symbol corresponding to the first result, and then the game is more advantageous than the normal gaming state. Game control means (main control board 920) for generating a special game state that is a state;
A display cover part (resin cover 715) provided to project forward from the position where the stop symbol is displayed;
An operation unit (pressing operation device 261) that is arranged toward the upper side of the display cover unit when viewed from the front of the gaming machine and is operable by the player;
A light emitting section (wave lamp 771) capable of emitting light disposed on one side with respect to the operation section;
An operation effective period (operation possible period) during which input to the operation unit is valid, or the light emitting unit in a predetermined color in synchronization with a notification period before the operation effective period and reporting the operation effective period Light emission control means (sub control board 940) for emitting light;
A reflective portion (half mirror 761B) provided in a predetermined region below the top located in the forefront of the display cover portion, and capable of reflecting the light emitted from the light emitting portion so that the player can visually recognize the reflected light. And a gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  A typical example of a gaming machine is a pachinko machine. In a conventional typical pachinko machine, when entering a start opening provided in a game area, a lottery is performed according to the entry, and when a big win is won in the lottery, a special gaming state is entered. A configuration is known in which a large number of game balls can enter a winning opening.

  In recent years, when a player operates an effect button (operation unit) at a predetermined timing, a predetermined effect such as change of display contents on a display device or output of corresponding sound from a speaker is executed. There are also known gaming machines (see, for example, JP-A-2006-193329). Some gaming machines of this type can inform the player of the operation timing of the operation unit by configuring the light emitting unit provided around the operation unit to emit light.

  However, there is still a possibility that there is still room for improvement in the conventional gaming machine configured to inform the player of the operation timing of the operation unit by the light emission of the light emitting unit. For example, since the player tends to watch the variable display performed on the display device, the operation timing of the operation unit notified by the light emission of the light emitting unit provided around the operation unit provided below the display device There was a problem that it was difficult to recognize.

  On the other hand, in the case of the gaming machine described in the feature F0, in the configuration in which the operation time of the operation unit is reported to the player by the light emission of the light emitting unit provided around the operation unit, the operation time of the operation unit Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that allows the player to preferably recognize the above. That is, a game board in which a game area where a game ball can flow down is formed on the front side, an opening is formed in the game area in a front view of the gaming machine, and a plurality of symbol rows are formed in the opening. A variable display unit capable of variable display is provided. When a predetermined starting condition is satisfied, the variation executing means displays a variation of a plurality of symbol sequences on the variation display unit, and then stops and displays the symbol combination according to the lottery result by the lottery means. At this time, if the lottery result is a predetermined first result, after the symbols are stopped and displayed with a combination of symbols indicating the first result, a special game state advantageous to the normal game state is generated by the game control means.

  A display cover part projects from the front side of the position where the stop symbol is displayed. An operation unit that can be operated by the player is arranged on the upper side of the display cover portion from the front side of the gaming machine. A light emitting section capable of emitting light is disposed on one side with respect to the operation section. The light emitting unit is controlled by the light emission control means and is predetermined in synchronization with an operation effective period in which an input to the operation unit is valid, or a notification period before the operation effective period and reporting the operation effective period. Light is emitted in the color of.

  Here, in a predetermined region below the top portion located in the forefront of the display cover portion, there is provided a reflection portion capable of reflecting the light emitted from the light emitting portion so that the player can visually reflect the reflected light. The player can visually recognize the light emitted from the light emitting unit as the reflected light from the reflecting unit. As a result, even in a situation where the player pays attention to the variable display portion, the player can hardly miss the notification of the operation timing of the operation portion due to the light emission of the light emitting portion, and the operation timing can be easily recognized.

  Further, since the player is notified of the operation timing of the operation unit using the light reflected by the reflection unit, the control load does not increase for the notification. Therefore, also in this respect, the player can appropriately recognize the operation timing of the operation unit. In addition, since it is not necessary to provide a dedicated image display device (for example, a liquid crystal display device) for notifying the operation timing of the operation unit by an image or the like, the manufacturing cost and control load are not increased, and this is required. In this case, it is possible to make the player appropriately recognize the operation timing of the operation unit.

<Feature F1>
A gaming machine according to feature F0,
The variable display unit has a three-dimensional rotator arranged so that a plurality of symbols circulate as one symbol row, and each of the plurality of symbol rows configured by arranging a plurality of the rotators is assigned to each rotator. Each of the plurality of rotating bodies is configured to protrude forward from the opening in the game board by being configured to be variable and displayable by rotating,
The display cover portion is provided at a position overlapping the front side of the plurality of rotating bodies so that the plurality of symbols can be visually recognized, and a cross section viewed from a predetermined direction intersecting the front-rear direction in the front view of the gaming machine is on the front side. A gaming machine characterized by being configured in a plate shape protruding in a substantially arc shape.

  In the case of the gaming machine described in the feature F1, the variable display unit is configured by arranging a three-dimensional rotator arranged so that a plurality of symbols circulate as one symbol row and arranging a plurality of rotators including the rotator. Each of the plurality of symbol rows to be displayed can be displayed in a variable manner by rotating each of the plurality of rotator bodies. In the case of a gaming machine in which the symbol display is displayed on the screen of a display unit such as an LCD, the operation timing can be notified by displaying a predetermined character string or a predetermined image on the screen of the display unit. . However, it is difficult to display a character string or an image on the revolving body in the game machine having the feature F1 that displays the variation of the symbols by the revolving body.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine described in the feature F1, a part of the plurality of rotating bodies crosses in the front-rear direction in the front view of the gaming machine on the front side of the variable display portion provided to project forward from the opening of the gaming board. A plate-like display cover portion is provided in which a cross section viewed from a predetermined direction side protrudes in a substantially arc shape on the front side. By providing the reflecting portion in a predetermined region below the top portion positioned in the forefront of the display cover portion, the player can visually recognize the light emitted from the operation portion as reflected light from the reflecting portion.

<Feature F2>
The gaming machine according to Feature F1,
A second light emitting part (reel side lamp 717A) capable of emitting light provided between the rotating body and the rotating body;
The light emission control unit causes the second light emitting unit to emit light in the same color as the color emitted from the light emitting unit when the light emitting unit emits light in a predetermined color in synchronization with the operation effective period or the notification period. A gaming machine characterized by that.

  In the gaming machine described in the feature F2, a second light emitting unit capable of emitting light is provided between the rotating body and the rotating body. The second light emitting unit emits light with the same color as the light emitting unit that emits light in synchronization with the operation effective period or the notification period by the light emission control unit. Therefore, the notification of the operation time is not only from the reflected light by the reflecting unit, but also from the second light emitting unit provided in the fluctuation display unit (more specifically, between the rotating body and the rotating body) that is easily noticed by the player. Therefore, it is possible to suitably suppress the player from overlooking the notification of the operation time.

<Feature F3>
A gaming machine according to feature F1 or F2,
The rotating body is configured to be able to display and display the design,
The gaming machine is configured to reflect light incident from the front side and transmit light incident from the rear side.

  In the gaming machine described in the feature F3, the reflection unit is configured to reflect the light incident from the front side and transmit the light incident from the rear side. The player can visually recognize the luminescent display symbol through the reflecting portion. Therefore, since the reflection part can be placed in front of the symbol in the rotating body, it is possible to suppress the display cover part from becoming too large.

<Feature F4>
A gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F3,
Predetermined display portions (holding lamp 720, lottery result display device 730) provided in the opening of the gaming board and at the rear end side and the lower side of the predetermined area in a front view of the gaming machine are provided. A gaming machine characterized by that.

  In the case of the gaming machine according to feature F4, the predetermined display provided in the opening of the gaming board is provided on the rear end side and the lower side of the predetermined area in the front view of the gaming machine. The area where the display content of the reflection part is reflected in the reflection part can be limited to a limited area on the rear end side of the reflection part. Thereby, it can suppress that the visibility of the light of the light emission part reflected by the reflection part is inhibited by the display content by the predetermined display part reflected on the reflection part. In addition, the area where the light from the light emitting part is reflected in the reflecting part (the area where the image of the light from the light emitting part is formed) without enlarging the reflecting part (that is, without increasing the forward protrusion of the display cover part). ) Can be largely secured on the front side of the reflecting portion.

<Feature G0>
A variation display section (reel device 710) capable of variably displaying a plurality of symbol rows;
Lottery means (main control board 920) for performing a predetermined lottery when a predetermined start condition is satisfied;
When the start condition is satisfied, the variation display unit displays the plurality of symbol sequences in a variable manner, and then stops and displays the change execution unit (sub control board 940 with a stop symbol corresponding to the lottery result by the lottery unit. )When,
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined first result, the variation executing means stops the display of the plurality of symbol sequences at the stop symbol corresponding to the first result, and then the game is more advantageous than the normal gaming state. Game control means (main control board 920) for generating a special game state that is a state;
An operation unit (press operation device 261) that can be operated by the player;
When the operation unit is operated by the player, among the plurality of symbol sequences, at least two symbol sequences (left symbol sequence, which can constitute a part of a combination of stop symbols corresponding to the first result, A gaming machine comprising display area control means (sub-control board 940) that reduces a display range in which the at least two symbol strings are displayed by moving the position of the right symbol string).

  A typical example of a gaming machine is a pachinko machine. In a conventional typical pachinko machine, when entering a start opening provided in a game area, a lottery is performed according to the entry, and when a big win is won in the lottery, a special gaming state is entered. There is known a configuration in which a large number of game balls can enter a winning opening (see, for example, JP-A-2016-22147).

  Such a conventional pachinko machine is provided with a display device (display unit). The display device starts the variable display of the symbols based on the fact that the lottery is performed, and finally displays the stop display of the variable display. As a result, the stop result corresponding to the lottery result is displayed.

  However, as represented by the above gaming machine, there is still a possibility that there is still room for improvement in the gaming machine in which the display of the symbols is displayed on the display unit. For example, when a symbol that is displayed in a variable manner is displayed in a large size, a large symbol can give a player a strong impression of the variable display, but depending on the player, the region in which the variable indication is performed is larger than the field of view. It became too difficult to see the fluctuation display.

  On the other hand, with the gaming machine described in the feature G0, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that allows the player to suitably change the appearance of the display unit as necessary. That is, when a predetermined starting condition is satisfied, the variation execution unit displays the variation of the plurality of symbol sequences on the variation display unit, and then stops and displays the combination of symbols according to the lottery result by the lottery unit. . At this time, if the lottery result is a predetermined first result, after the symbols are stopped and displayed with a combination of symbols indicating the first result, a special game state advantageous to the normal game state is generated by the game control means.

  An operation unit that can be operated by the player is provided, and when the operation unit is operated by the player, a part of a combination of stop symbols corresponding to the first result is selected from the plurality of symbol sequences. The position of the at least two symbol rows that can be configured is moved by the display area control means, thereby reducing the display range in which the at least two symbol rows are displayed. As described above, the player can operate the operation unit as necessary, so that the display area of the plurality of symbol rows can be reduced, so that it is possible to suppress the player from feeling difficult to see the variable display.

Also, by moving the position of at least two symbol rows, the display range in which the at least two symbol rows are displayed is reduced, so that the appearance of the at least two symbol rows before and after the display range is reduced. There is no change in the size, and it is possible to suppress the difficulty in seeing these symbol strings due to the reduced display range. In particular, since the at least two symbol sequences are symbol sequences that can form a part of the combination of stop symbols corresponding to the first result, the player corresponds to the first result by the at least two symbol sequences. When a part of the combination of stop symbols to be displayed is displayed, the player can preferably visually recognize the display.
Note that “reducing the display range” described in the feature G0 may mean reducing either the vertical direction or the horizontal direction of the display range. It may be made smaller.

<Feature G1>
A gaming machine described in the feature G0,
The variable display unit has a three-dimensional rotator arranged so that a plurality of symbols circulate as one symbol row, and each of the plurality of symbol rows configured by arranging a plurality of the rotators is assigned to each rotator. It is configured to be able to display each variable by rotating,
The gaming machine is
Among the plurality of spinning bodies, a first spinning body (left reel 711L, right reel 711R) corresponding to at least two symbol rows that can constitute a part of a combination of stop symbols corresponding to the first result is played. First moving means (rack gears corresponding to gears 782, 783 and gears 782, 783) movable in a predetermined direction intersecting the front-rear direction in the front view of the machine;
Among the plurality of spinning bodies, second moving means (corresponding to gear 781 and gear 781) capable of moving a second spinning body (medium reel 711M) different from the first spinning body to the rear side in the front view of the gaming machine. Rack gear), and
The display area control means moves the second body to the rear side of the first body by the second moving means when the operation unit is operated by a player, and then moves the first body. A gaming machine characterized in that the display area of the plurality of symbol rows is reduced by moving the body by the first moving means.

  In the case of the gaming machine described in the feature G1, the variable display unit is configured by arranging a three-dimensional rotator arranged so that a plurality of symbols circulate as one symbol row and arranging a plurality of rotators including the rotator. Each of the plurality of symbol rows to be displayed can be displayed in a variable manner by rotating each of the plurality of rotator bodies.

  The first torso corresponding to at least two symbol rows that can constitute a part of the combination of stop symbols corresponding to the first result among the plurality of torso bodies is a front view of the gaming machine by the first moving means. It is configured to be movable in a predetermined direction that intersects the front-rear direction. On the other hand, a second spinning body different from the first spinning body among the plurality of spinning bodies is configured to be movable rearward in the front view of the gaming machine by the second moving means.

  When the operation unit is operated by the player, the display area control unit moves the second body so that it is located behind the first body by the second moving unit, and then the first body is It is moved by one moving means. Thereby, the display area of a some symbol row | line | column can be made small.

<Feature G2>
A gaming machine according to feature G1,
The first torso is a torso located at least at both ends of the plurality of torso,
The game machine according to claim 1, wherein the first moving means is configured to be movable by substantially the same distance in a direction in which the second torso bodies located at both ends of the plurality of torso bodies are brought closer to each other.

  In the case of the gaming machine described in the feature G2, when the operation unit is operated by the player, the second torso located at both ends of the plurality of torso bodies is approximately shortened in the direction of approaching each other by the first moving unit. Moved the same distance. Therefore, it can suppress that the center of the display area of a some symbol sequence moves by reduction. Thereby, it is possible to suppress a change in the line of sight of the player when viewing the variable display of the symbols due to the reduction of the display area of the plurality of symbol rows.

<Feature H0>
A predetermined structure (reel device 710) is provided at a position overlapping the front side of the structure portion so as to be visible from the front side, and a cross section viewed from a predetermined direction crossing the front-rear direction in the front view of the gaming machine is on the front side. A light guide member having a light guide curved portion (curved portion 715B1) that curves and protrudes (or has a substantially constant thickness), and has a predetermined continuous direction (or plate) that intersects the thickness direction. When light is incident from a predetermined end side (end surfaces 715B4, 715B5) so that the light travels along a predetermined continuous direction in which the surfaces are continuous or a predetermined continuous direction in which light can be guided A light guide member (light guide plate 715B) capable of emitting and displaying a predetermined image (pattern 743) at least on the light guide curved portion by the light;
The light guide member is provided so as to overlap at least the front side of the light guide bending portion, and has a light transmittance so that the predetermined image light-emitting and displayed on the light guide member can be viewed from the front side. A cover portion (outer cover 715A) having a curved cover bending portion (curved portion 715A1) along the portion;
A light source unit (light source unit 812, 813) having light emitting means (light emitting means 824, 834) for outputting light incident on the predetermined end portion side of the light guide member;
A first mounting portion (protrusion) that is used when the light guide member and the cover portion are integrated, and that allows displacement along the predetermined continuous direction due to deformation of the light guide bending portion. Part 892, through holes 841A, 841B, 843A, 843B, protrusions 893, through holes 851A, 851B, 853A, 853B),
A second mounting portion (protruding portion) that is used when the light guide member and the light source unit are integrated and does not allow displacement along the predetermined continuous direction compared to the first mounting portion. 844A, through-holes 861A and 842A, projections 844B, through-holes 861B and 842B, projections 854A, through-holes 862A and 852A, projections 854B, and through-holes 862B and 852B). Machine.

  A typical example of a gaming machine is a pachinko machine. In a conventional typical pachinko machine, when entering a start opening provided in a game area, a lottery is performed according to the entry, and when a big win is won in the lottery, a special gaming state is entered. A configuration is known in which a large number of game balls can enter a winning opening. In recent years, a pachinko machine having a variety of effects by providing a light guide plate that emits light from an end face to display a predetermined design in a game area is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-80625). ).

  However, for a light guide member having a curved plate-like portion (curved portion) instead of a flat light guide plate, there is a possibility that a problem may occur during assembly when unitizing. For example, if the curved portion cannot be accurately manufactured to the shape as designed, there is a possibility that the predetermined design cannot be displayed with good light emission. On the other hand, if an attempt is made to manufacture with high accuracy by reducing the tolerance of the light guide member including the curved portion, the cost of the light guide member increases and the cost as a gaming machine increases. Further, if an excessive force is applied so that the curved portion of the light guide plate is deformed, the light source and the light guide member may be misaligned to impair the light guide function.

  In contrast, with the gaming machine described in the feature H0, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably assembling a unit including a light guide member having a curved portion. That is, at a position overlapping a front side of the structure portion so that the predetermined structure can be seen from the front side, a cross section viewed from the predetermined direction intersecting the front-rear direction in the front view of the gaming machine is curved and protrudes forward. A light guide member having a plate-like light guide curved portion is provided. The light guide member can emit and display a predetermined image on at least the light guide curved portion when light is incident from a predetermined end side so that the light travels in a predetermined continuous direction. Composed. A light emitting unit is provided in the light source unit so that light is incident on a predetermined end side of the light guide member. For this reason, when a predetermined structure including a shape that protrudes by bending to the front side is arranged on the rear side of the light guide bending portion, the distance is largely separated as a whole in front of the predetermined structure. A predetermined image can be displayed. Therefore, even if the player's viewpoint position changes depending on the player's height, posture, etc., the position at which the predetermined image is displayed in front of the predetermined structure may greatly deviate. And a predetermined image can be displayed at an appropriate position.

  In addition, a cover portion having a curved cover bending portion along the light guide bending portion is provided to overlap at least the front side of the light guide bending portion in the light guide member. The cover portion has light permeability so that a predetermined image light-emitting and displayed on the light guide member can be viewed from the front side.

  Here, the first mounting portion which is a portion used when the light guide member and the cover portion are integrated is configured to allow displacement along a predetermined continuous direction accompanying deformation of the light guide bending portion. Has been. Therefore, even when the light guide bending portion is manufactured by being deformed due to manufacturing variation or the like, the displacement along the predetermined continuous direction due to the deformation is allowed by the first mounting portion. The manufacturing variation of the light guide member including the curved portion can be suppressed by allowing a large variation in the manufacture of the light guide member along the continuous direction.

  On the other hand, the second mounting portion, which is a part used when the light guide member and the light source unit are integrated, does not allow displacement along a predetermined continuous direction as compared to the first mounting portion. It is configured. As a result, the light guide member and the light source unit can be integrated by positioning at a suitable position with less manufacturing variation in a predetermined continuous direction, so that a predetermined image using the light guide member is displayed with good appearance. Can be possible.

<Feature H1>
A predetermined structure (reel device 710) is provided at a position overlapping the front side of the structure portion so as to be visible from the front side, and a cross section viewed from a predetermined direction crossing the front-rear direction in the front view of the gaming machine is on the front side. A light guide member having a light guide curved portion (curved portion 715B1) that curves and protrudes (or has a substantially constant thickness), and has a predetermined continuous direction (or plate) that intersects the thickness direction. When light is incident from a predetermined end side (end surfaces 715B4, 715B5) so that the light travels along a predetermined continuous direction in which the surfaces are continuous or a predetermined continuous direction in which light can be guided A light guide member (light guide plate 715B) capable of emitting and displaying a predetermined image (pattern 743) at least on the light guide curved portion by the light;
The light guide member is provided so as to overlap at least the front side of the light guide bending portion, and has a light transmittance so that the predetermined image light-emitting and displayed on the light guide member can be viewed from the front side. A cover portion (outer cover 715A) having a curved cover bending portion (curved portion 715A1) along the portion;
A light source unit (light source unit 812, 813) having light emitting means (light emitting means 824, 834) for outputting light incident on the predetermined end portion side of the light guide member;
The positioning allowable range is set larger in the predetermined continuous direction than the crossing direction intersecting the continuous direction, which is a part used when the light guide member and the cover part are integrated. A first mounting portion (projection portion 892, through-holes 841A, 841B, 843A, 843B, projection portion 893, through-holes 851A, 851B, 853A, 853B);
A second mounting portion that is used when the light guide member and the light source unit are integrated and has a positioning tolerance in the predetermined continuous direction smaller than that of the first mounting portion. (Projection 844A, through-holes 861A and 842A, projection 844B, through-holes 861B and 842B, projection 854A, through-holes 862A and 852A, projection 854B, and through-holes 862B and 852B). A gaming machine.

  A typical example of a gaming machine is a pachinko machine. In a conventional typical pachinko machine, when entering a start opening provided in a game area, a lottery is performed according to the entry, and when a big win is won in the lottery, a special gaming state is entered. A configuration is known in which a large number of game balls can enter a winning opening. In recent years, a pachinko machine having a variety of effects by providing a light guide plate that emits light from an end face to display a predetermined design in a game area is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-80625). ).

  However, for a light guide member having a curved plate-like portion (curved portion) instead of a flat light guide plate, there is a possibility that a problem may occur during assembly when unitizing. For example, if the curved portion cannot be accurately manufactured to the shape as designed, there is a possibility that the predetermined design cannot be displayed with good light emission. On the other hand, if an attempt is made to manufacture with high accuracy by reducing the tolerance of the light guide member including the curved portion, the cost of the light guide member increases and the cost as a gaming machine increases. Further, if an excessive force is applied so that the curved portion of the light guide plate is deformed, the light source and the light guide member may be misaligned to impair the light guide function.

  On the other hand, the gaming machine described in the feature H1 can provide a gaming machine capable of suitably assembling a unit including a light guide member having a curved portion. That is, at a position overlapping a front side of the structure portion so that the predetermined structure can be seen from the front side, a cross section viewed from the predetermined direction intersecting the front-rear direction in the front view of the gaming machine is curved and protrudes forward. A light guide member having a plate-like light guide curved portion is provided. The light guide member can emit and display a predetermined image on at least the light guide curved portion when light is incident from a predetermined end side so that the light travels in a predetermined continuous direction. Composed. A light emitting unit is provided in the light source unit so that light is incident on a predetermined end side of the light guide member. For this reason, when a predetermined structure including a shape that protrudes by bending to the front side is arranged on the rear side of the light guide bending portion, the distance is largely separated as a whole in front of the predetermined structure. A predetermined image can be displayed. Therefore, even if the player's viewpoint position changes depending on the player's height, posture, etc., the position at which the predetermined image is displayed in front of the predetermined structure may greatly deviate. And a predetermined image can be displayed at an appropriate position.

  In addition, a cover portion having a curved cover bending portion along the light guide bending portion is provided to overlap at least the front side of the light guide bending portion in the light guide member. The cover portion has light permeability so that a predetermined image light-emitting and displayed on the light guide member can be viewed from the front side.

  Here, the first attachment portion, which is a portion used when the light guide member and the cover portion are integrated, has a positioning tolerance in the predetermined continuous direction from the crossing direction intersecting the continuous direction. Is set larger. Therefore, even when the light guide bending portion is manufactured by being deformed due to manufacturing variations or the like, the allowable range of positioning in the continuous direction along the predetermined continuous direction is set to be relatively large by the first mounting portion. Therefore, the manufacturing variation of the light guide member including the curved portion can be suppressed by allowing a large variation in the manufacture of the light guide member along the predetermined continuous direction.

  On the other hand, the second mounting portion, which is a part used when the light guide member and the light source unit are integrated, has a positioning allowable range in a predetermined continuous direction set smaller than that of the first mounting portion. ing. As a result, the light guide member and the light source unit can be integrated by positioning at a suitable position with less manufacturing variation in a predetermined continuous direction, so that a predetermined image using the light guide member is displayed with good appearance. Can be possible.

<Feature H2>
A gaming machine according to Feature H0 or Feature H1,
The first mounting portion is
A first support portion (protruding portions 892, 893) projecting at a predetermined position on the back side of the flat portion continuous to the cover bending portion in the cover portion or on the front side of the light source unit;
A first hole provided in the light source unit or the cover so as to be able to be inserted through the first support part, wherein the predetermined continuous direction is longer than a crossing direction intersecting the continuous direction. A gaming machine comprising one hole portion (through holes 841A, 841B, 843A, 843B, 851A, 851B, 853A, 853B).

  In the case of the gaming machine according to the feature H2, the first mounting portion protrudes at a predetermined position on the back side of the flat portion continuous to the cover bending portion in the cover portion or on the front side of the light source unit. The 1st hole part which can be penetrated is provided in the light source unit or the cover part. The first hole is formed longer in the predetermined continuous direction than the intersecting direction intersecting the continuous direction. Therefore, the first mounting portion can be positioned in the predetermined continuous direction with a larger allowable range of positioning than the crossing direction, and the predetermined continuous direction accompanying the deformation of the light guide bending portion (the direction in which the plate surfaces are continuous). It is possible to configure so as to allow displacement along.

<Feature H3>
A gaming machine according to feature H2,
The second mounting portion is
2nd hole part provided in the both ends of the crossing direction in the light guide member, respectively, wherein the length in the predetermined continuous direction is shorter than the length in the continuous direction in the first hole part. Formed second holes (through holes 861A, 861B, through holes 862A, 862B);
A second support (projections 844A and 844B, projections 854A and 854B) formed on the light source unit so as to be able to be inserted into the second hole,
The length of the second hole (through holes 861B, 862B) provided on one side of the cross direction is the length of the second hole (projection 844A) provided on the other side of the cross direction. , 854A) is longer than the length in the crossing direction.

  In the gaming machine according to the feature H3, the second attachment portion includes a second hole portion provided at each of both ends of the light guide member in the intersecting direction, and a light source that can be inserted into the second hole portion. And a second support provided in the unit. Each of the second hole portions provided on both ends in the intersecting direction is formed such that the length in the predetermined continuous direction is shorter than the length in the predetermined continuous direction in the first hole portion. Thus, the second mounting portion can be set to have a smaller positioning tolerance in the predetermined continuous direction than the first mounting portion, and the predetermined continuous direction (direction in which the plate surfaces are continuous) compared to the first mounting portion. It is possible to configure so as not to allow displacement along.

  Moreover, the length of the said cross direction in the 2nd hole provided in the one side of the said cross direction among the 2nd holes provided in the both ends of the said cross direction is the other side of the said cross direction. Since it is formed longer than the length in the intersecting direction in the second hole provided, even if there is a manufacturing error or the like in the installation positions of the second holes provided on both ends in the intersecting direction, Manufacturing errors can be absorbed in the cross direction. Thereby, it can suppress that the manufacturing error of the position of a 2nd hole part has a bad influence on the positioning accuracy of the light source unit with respect to a light guide member in the predetermined continuous direction.

<Feature H4>
A gaming machine according to any one of features H0 to H3,
A curved holding portion (pressing member 811) capable of holding the light guiding curved portion overlapping the rear side of the cover curved portion while being pressed against the cover curved portion along the cover curved portion;
The light guide member is configured to be integrated with the cover portion by the first attachment portion after the light guide curve portion is held by the curve holding portion. Machine.

  In the gaming machine according to the feature H4, the light guide member overlaps the rear side of the cover bending portion before the light guide member is integrated with the cover portion by the first mounting portion. It is held in a state of being pressed along the cover bending portion with respect to the cover bending portion. Therefore, when the light guide bending portion is manufactured by being deformed to a certain amount or more due to manufacturing variation or the like, the shape of the light guide bending portion is corrected to the shape of the cover bending portion by the curve holding portion. The light guide member and the cover portion can be integrated by one mounting portion. Therefore, the shape of the light guide curved portion can be corrected within a certain range while greatly allowing variation in manufacturing of the light guide member including the light guide curved portion, and a predetermined image using the light guide member looks good. It can be displayed well.

<Feature H5>
A predetermined structure (reel device 710) is provided at a position overlapping the front side of the structure portion so as to be visible from the front side, and a cross section viewed from a predetermined direction crossing the front-rear direction in the front view of the gaming machine is on the front side. A light guide member having a light guide curved portion (curved portion 715B1) that curves and protrudes (or has a substantially constant thickness), and has a predetermined continuous direction (or plate) that intersects the thickness direction. When light is incident from a predetermined end side (end surfaces 715B4, 715B5) so that the light travels along a predetermined continuous direction in which the surfaces are continuous or a predetermined continuous direction in which light can be guided A light guide member (light guide plate 715B) capable of emitting and displaying a predetermined image (pattern 743) at least on the light guide curved portion by the light;
The light guide member is provided so as to overlap at least the front side of the light guide bending portion, and has a light transmittance so that the predetermined image light-emitting and displayed on the light guide member can be viewed from the front side. A cover portion (outer cover 715A) having a curved cover bending portion (curved portion 715A1) along the portion;
A light source unit (light source unit 812, 813) having light emitting means (light emitting means 824, 834) for outputting light incident on the predetermined end portion side of the light guide member,
When one of the light source unit and the cover portion is integrated with the other, the mounting portions (through holes 841A and 841B) that allow the positioning in the direction along the predetermined continuous direction with respect to the other in a predetermined range. , 843A, 843B, 851A, 851B, 853A, 853B)
The gaming machine, wherein the light guide member is integrated with the cover portion via the light source unit by integrating the light source unit and the cover portion with the attachment portion.

  A typical example of a gaming machine is a pachinko machine. In a conventional typical pachinko machine, when entering a start opening provided in a game area, a lottery is performed according to the entry, and when a big win is won in the lottery, a special gaming state is entered. A configuration is known in which a large number of game balls can enter a winning opening. In recent years, a pachinko machine having a variety of effects by providing a light guide plate that emits light from an end face to display a predetermined design in a game area is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-80625). ).

  However, for a light guide member having a curved plate-like portion (curved portion) instead of a flat light guide plate, there is a possibility that a problem may occur during assembly when unitizing. For example, if the curved portion cannot be accurately manufactured to the shape as designed, there is a possibility that the predetermined design cannot be displayed with good light emission. On the other hand, if an attempt is made to manufacture with high accuracy by reducing the tolerance of the light guide member including the curved portion, the cost of the light guide member increases and the cost as a gaming machine increases. Further, if an excessive force is applied so that the curved portion of the light guide plate is deformed, the light source and the light guide member may be misaligned to impair the light guide function.

  In contrast, with the gaming machine described in the feature H5, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably assembling a unit including a light guide member having a curved portion. That is, at a position overlapping a front side of the structure portion so that the predetermined structure can be seen from the front side, a cross section viewed from the predetermined direction intersecting the front-rear direction in the front view of the gaming machine is curved and protrudes forward. A light guide member having a plate-like light guide curved portion is provided. The light guide member can emit and display a predetermined image on at least the light guide curved portion when light is incident from a predetermined end side so that the light travels in a predetermined continuous direction. Composed. A light emitting unit is provided in the light source unit so that light is incident on a predetermined end side of the light guide member. For this reason, when a predetermined structure including a shape that protrudes by bending to the front side is arranged on the rear side of the light guide bending portion, the distance is largely separated as a whole in front of the predetermined structure. A predetermined image can be displayed. Therefore, even if the player's viewpoint position changes depending on the player's height, posture, etc., the position at which the predetermined image is displayed in front of the predetermined structure may greatly deviate. And a predetermined image can be displayed at an appropriate position.

  In addition, a cover portion having a curved cover bending portion along the light guide bending portion is provided to overlap at least the front side of the light guide bending portion in the light guide member. The cover portion has light permeability so that a predetermined image light-emitting and displayed on the light guide member can be viewed from the front side.

  Here, since the light guide member is integrated with the cover portion via the light source unit by integrating the light source unit and the cover portion, the light source unit is integrated with the light guide member in advance. The position of the light source with respect to the light guide member can be suitably matched.

  Further, when one of the light source unit and the cover part is integrated with the other, the mounting part is configured so that positioning in a direction along a predetermined continuous direction with respect to the other is allowed within a predetermined range. Yes. Therefore, even when the light guide bending portion is manufactured by being deformed due to manufacturing variation or the like, when the light guide member is integrated with the cover portion via the light source unit, a predetermined continuous direction Since the manufacturing error is absorbed by the attachment portion, the manufacturing cost of the light guide member including the curved portion can be suppressed by allowing a large variation in the manufacture of the light guide member along a predetermined continuous direction.

<Feature J0>
A predetermined end side so that the light travels along a predetermined continuous direction (or a predetermined continuous direction in which the plate surfaces are continuous, or a predetermined continuous direction in which light can be guided) intersecting the thickness direction ( A light guide member (light guide plate 715B) having a light guide part (curved part 715B1) capable of emitting and displaying a predetermined image (picture 743) by light when the light is incident from the end faces 715B4 and 715B5);
A plurality of light emitting means (light emitting means 824, 834) for outputting light incident on the predetermined end side of the light guide member;
Light that is incident on the light guide member from the light emitting means travels partially as weak light, or guides light that includes a predetermined direction (regions D1 and D2) in which the light does not travel. Means (concave portion Z),
The light guide means shines stronger than a portion extending in the predetermined direction on both sides inclined to one and the other about the light source along the plate surface of the light guide member with respect to the predetermined direction. A gaming machine characterized by guiding light from a light emitting means.

  A typical example of a gaming machine is a pachinko machine. In a conventional typical pachinko machine, when entering a start opening provided in a game area, a lottery is performed according to the entry, and when a big win is won in the lottery, a special gaming state is entered. A configuration is known in which a large number of game balls can enter a winning opening. In recent years, a pachinko machine having a variety of effects by providing a light guide plate that emits light from an end face to display a predetermined design in a game area is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-80625). ).

  However, the mode in which the predetermined design is displayed by the light guide plate (light guide member) shines uniformly according to the color of the light source such as the LED, and the variation of the mode displayed by the light guide tends to be poor. There was a problem.

  On the other hand, with the gaming machine described in the feature J0, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of realizing diversification of image display modes using the light guide member. That is, a light guide member having a light guide portion capable of emitting and displaying a predetermined image with light when light is incident from a predetermined end side so that the light travels along a predetermined continuous direction is provided. ing. A plurality of light emitting means for outputting light is provided so that light is incident on a predetermined end side of the light guide member.

  Moreover, the light that has entered the light guide member from the light emitting means is partially weakened by the light guide means, or the light guide includes a predetermined direction in which the light does not travel. For this reason, a portion that causes the light guide means to shine more strongly than a part extending in the predetermined direction on both sides inclined to one side and the other about the light emitting means along the plate surface of the light guide member with respect to the predetermined direction. Can be provided. As a result, the way the light guide member shines can be made non-uniform and random, and diversification of the image display mode by the light guide member can be realized.

  Note that the predetermined image in the feature J0 may include at least an image displayed by light output from the plurality of light emitting units.

<Feature J1>
A predetermined end side so that the light travels along a predetermined continuous direction (or a predetermined continuous direction in which the plate surfaces are continuous, or a predetermined continuous direction in which light can be guided) intersecting the thickness direction ( A light guide member (light guide plate 715B) having a light guide part (curved part 715B1) capable of emitting and displaying a predetermined image (picture 743) by light when the light is incident from the end faces 715B4 and 715B5);
A plurality of light emitting means (light emitting means 824, 834) for outputting light incident on the predetermined end side of the light guide member;
The light incident on the light guide member from the light emitting means is separated into at least two directions (arrow F1 direction, arrow F2 direction, arrow F3 direction) and travels in the light guide member. And a light guide means (concave portion Z) configured to form regions (regions D1 and D2) where the light is weaker than the light or does not reach the light. .

  A typical example of a gaming machine is a pachinko machine. In a conventional typical pachinko machine, when entering a start opening provided in a game area, a lottery is performed according to the entry, and when a big win is won in the lottery, a special gaming state is entered. A configuration is known in which a large number of game balls can enter a winning opening. In recent years, a pachinko machine having a variety of effects by providing a light guide plate that emits light from an end face to display a predetermined design in a game area is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-80625). ).

  However, the mode in which the predetermined design is displayed by the light guide plate (light guide member) shines uniformly according to the color of the light source such as the LED, and the variation of the mode displayed by the light guide tends to be poor. There was a problem.

  On the other hand, with the gaming machine described in the feature J1, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can realize diversification of image display modes using the light guide member. That is, a light guide member having a light guide portion capable of emitting and displaying a predetermined image with light when light is incident from a predetermined end side so that the light travels along a predetermined continuous direction is provided. ing. A plurality of light emitting means for outputting light are provided so that light is incident on a predetermined end side of the light guide member.

  In addition, the light that has entered the light guide member from the light emitting means is separated into at least two directions by the light guide means and travels in the light guide member, and the light in each direction separated is weaker than the light. Alternatively, a region where the light does not reach can be formed. As a result, the way the light guide member shines can be made non-uniform and random, and diversification of the image display mode by the light guide member can be realized.

  Note that the predetermined image in the feature J1 may include at least an image displayed by light output from the plurality of light emitting units.

<Feature J2>
A gaming machine according to feature J0 or feature J1,
The light guide means includes two or more sides (sides Z1, Z2, and Z3) formed on an end surface of the light guide member on the predetermined end side, and light from the light source among the two or more sides. A gaming machine characterized by being a recess having a top (left end C1, right end C2) formed by two adjacent sides that are different in angle with the output direction.

  In the gaming machine according to the characteristic J1, the light guide means is based on at least two or more sides formed on an end face of the light guide member on a predetermined end side, and a light source among the two or more sides. Since it is a recess having a top formed by two adjacent sides that are different in angle with the light output direction, the end of the light guide member can be processed by processing the shape of the end of the light guide member without attaching a dedicated component. How to shine can be made random.

  Note that at least one feature described in the features 10 to J2 may be applied in combination with any one or a plurality of other features. The basic configuration of the gaming machine to which the above-described features can be applied is shown below.

  Pachinko machine: launch operation means operated by a player, game ball launch means for launching a game ball based on the operation of the launch operation means, a passage section for guiding the launched game ball to a predetermined game area, A gaming machine that includes each gaming component arranged in a gaming area, and gives a bonus to a player when a gaming ball passes through a predetermined passing portion of each gaming component.

  A spinning machine such as a slot machine: the rotation of the circulating body is started based on the operation of the start operation means, the rotation of the circulating body is stopped based on the operation of the stop operation means, and the player is made according to the pattern after the stop. A gaming machine that grants bonuses.

  As described above, the present invention is suitable for a gaming machine such as a ball game machine.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 100 ... Game machine, 261 ... Press operation device, 263 ... Selection operation device, 479 ... Decoration design display device, 710 ... Reel device, 711L ... Left reel, 711M ... Middle reel, 711R ... Right reel, 712 ... Main design, 713B ... second sub-pattern, 730 ... lottery result display device, 920 ... main control board, 940 ... sub-control board, 401 ... base, 701 ... base, 702 ... side wall, 715 ... resin cover, 715A ... outer cover, 715A1 ... Curved portion, 715B ... light guide plate, 715B1 ... curved portion, 715B4, 715B5 ... end face, 717A ... reel side lamp, 720 ... hold lamp, 741,742,743 ... picture, 753 ... information display portion, 761A, 761B ... half mirror , 771 ... Wave lamp, 781, 782, 783 ... Gear, 1441A, 1441B ... Start winning switch, DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 10 ... Entrance, 1612 ... Guide passage, 1613A, 1613B ... First passage, 1614A, 1614B ... Second passage, 1631 ... First rear side, second rear side, 1631A, 1631B ... Passage wall, 811 ... Presser Member, 812, 813 ... Light source unit, 824, 834 ... Light emitting means, 892, 893 ... Projection, 841A, 841B, 843A, 843B, 851A, 851B, 853A, 853B ... Through-hole, 844A, 844B, 854A, 854B ... Projection, 842A, 842B, 852A, 852B ... through hole, 861A, 861B, 862A, 862B ... through hole, D1, D2 ... region, Z ... recesses Z1, Z2, Z3 ... side, C1 ... left end of side Z1, C2 ... Right edge of side Z1

Claims (2)

A light guide member having a light guide portion capable of emitting and displaying a predetermined image by light when the light is incident from a predetermined end side so that the light travels along a predetermined continuous direction intersecting the thickness direction When,
A plurality of light emitting means for outputting light incident on the predetermined end side of the light guide member;
Light incident on the light guide member from the light emitting means travels partially as weak light, or comprises a light guide means serving as a light guide including a predetermined direction in which the light does not travel,
The light guide means shines stronger than a portion extending in the predetermined direction on both sides inclined to one and the other about the light source along the plate surface of the light guide member with respect to the predetermined direction. A gaming machine characterized by guiding light from a light emitting means. A light guide member having a light guide portion capable of emitting and displaying a predetermined image by light when the light is incident from a predetermined end side so that the light travels along a predetermined continuous direction intersecting the thickness direction When,
A plurality of light emitting means for outputting light incident on the predetermined end side of the light guide member;
The light incident on the light guide member from the light emitting means is separated into at least two directions and travels in the light guide member, and the light is emitted weaker than the light between the separated lights, or the light And a light guide means configured to form a region that does not reach the game machine.